Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/ahnslatingrammarOOahnfrich Steiger's Latin Series. AHN'S LATIN GRAMMAR. WITH REFERENCES to the EXERCISES IN THE FIRST, Second and third latin books. BY Dr. P. HENN. NEW YORK: B. STEIGER&CO. 1881. ' /r n A BEQUEST. The undersigned, in their efforts to secure the greatest possible correctness in their educational publications, will feel obliged for the suggestion of improvements. JS?. Steiger & Co.^ PublisTiers. Copyright, 1881, by E. Steiger & Co. IN MEMORIAW Press of ML Steiger & Co., N, T. PREFACE. AHN'S Latin Grmntnar forms part of a series which has been undertaken with the design to facilitate the study of Latin for begin- ners. The author desires to state at the outset that this volume is in no respect a condensation of the Firsts Second, and Third Latin Books. It is constructed on a plan of its own, and with a twofold object in view: first, to provide a complete grammatical course for those teachers who prefer the synthetic method to the exclusion of the analytic, and secondly, to supply for reference in study a really compendious grammar, which may answer the needs of young scho- lars, while it is sufficiently comprehensive and full for more advanced students — in a word, the first and also the last grammar in the student's hands. In pursuance of this plan, the Grammar retains from the First, Second, and Third Latin Books the general statement of gram- matical facts in tlie exact form and language of those books, but, of course, in the traditional presentation of synthetic grammar. In the treatment of Etymology the following have been the leading fea- tures. While scientific accuracy has been aimed at, the convenience of teacher or learner has in no case been sacrificed to theoretical completeness. Of the stem theory especially the author has meant Jo place before the learner just so much as may be used to explain difficulties ~ not to multiply them. The pupil's attention should be directed first to what most needs to be learned, viz.: the etymolo- gical forms themselves. With this in view, the Grammar embraces all the important features of the series which are of practical assistance to the learner, particularly during the first year. The sharp distinction, for instance, of inflectional endings by bold-faced type is a matter of no small importance if we wish to make the pupil from the very outset so familiar with all the inflections that he will recognize them with promptness and certainty wherever they occur. 926545 — iV — Of course, a real understanding he will obtain only by learning how those inflections arose, and here again the brief, clear and practical rules on the subject will be found to simplify a very complex matter, and to remove perhaps the greatest difficulty in the study of Latin grammar. As complementary to the etymological part the careful classification and definition of derivative endings cannot fail to be valuable for constant reference, if not for class study. In the treatment of Syntax the points which have received par- ticular attention are: to set forth the facta of classical Latin (repre- sented by Caesar and Cicero) just as they are in themselves; to describe as fairly and briefly as possible the actual uses of syntac- tical forms, to illustrate them by carefully selected examples, and, withal, to bear constantly in mind that this Course is meant to lead at the earliest possible moment to the reading of the classical authors. It will be for professional teachers to say whether the endeavor to reach this practical end has been successful. To furnish to teachers who may so desire, the opportunity of drilling their pupils in the more important rules and principles while they are learning them, references to the corresponding exercises in the First, Second, and Third Latin Books are inserted through- out this Grammar. The detailed Index of Subjects will be found to contain every topic in the text. To summarize: the design of this Latin Series is to enable pupils to gain a thorough knowledge of Latin — not without honest exer- tions, yet with the greatest possible ease. TABLE OF CONTENTS. General Division of the Subject. Page 1 PAET I. -PHONOLOGY. Alphabet; Classification 1 Pronunciation 3 Roman Method 3 Continental Method 4 English Method 5 Syllables '. 6 Quantity 6 Accent ^ 7 PART II. — ETYMOLOGY. The Parts of Speech 7 Substantives 8-48 Gender 8 Number and Case 10 Declensions 10 General Eules 11 Fii^st Declension 12 Second Declension 13 Adjectives 16 Third Declension 20 Formation of the Genitive 20 Adjectives , 33 Remarks on Certain Gases 35 GreeTc Nouns 38 Gender in Third Declension 38 Fourth Declension 42 Fifth Declension 43 Irregular Nouns 44 Proper Names 47 Adjectives 48-53 Declension 48 Comparison 50 Numerals 54-59 Numeral Adjectives 54 Numeral Adverbs 58 — VI — Pronouns Page 59-65 Personal Pronouns 59 Pronouns of the Third Person 61 Demonstrative 61 Determinative 62 Relative 63 Interrogative 64 Indefinite 64 Pronominal Adjectives 65 Verbs 66-145 Voices 66 Tenses 67 Moods 67 Verbal Nouns and Adjectives 68 Numbers and Persons : 69 Ilie Four Conjugations 69 Simple Forms 70 Compound Forms 72 Periphrastic Conjugation 75 First Conjugation (Paradigm) 77 Second Conjugation (Paradigm) 80 Third Conjugation (Paradigm) 84 Fourth Conjugation (Paradigm) 88 Deponent Verbs (Paradigms) 92 Appendix to Third Conjugation (Verbs in lo) 100 Special Forms in Conjugation 103 Formation of the Principal Parts 105 in the First Conjugation -. 106 in the Second Conjugation 108 in the Third Conjugation 112 Stems in u, V 113 Verbs in lo 114 Stems in d, t 115 Stems in b, p 118 Stems in c, g, q, h, ct 119 Stems in 1, m, 11, r 121 Stems in s, K 124 Stems in sc (Inceptives) 124 in the Fourth Conjugation 129 Irregular Verbs 130 Defective Verbs 141 Impersonal Verbs 144 — VII — Adverbs Page 145-151 Primitive and Derivative ' 145 Comparison 150 Prepositions 151 Conjunctions 152-154 Co-ordinating 152 Subordinating 153 Interjections 155 Word-formation 155 -168 Derivation of Verbs 155 of Substantives 158 of Adjectives 161 Composition of Verbs 164 of Substantives 168 of Adjectives 168 PART III. — SYNTAX. The Sentence 169 Subject and Predicate 169 Attribute and Apposition 172 Agreement of Pronouns 173 The Order of Words 175 Construction of Cases 176-208 Genitive with Substantives 176 with Adjectives 178 with Verbs 179 Accusative^ Direct Object 182 two Accusatives 183 with Impersonal Verbs 184 Idiomatic Uses 185 Dative with Verbs 185 with Adjectives . .'. 189 Ethical Dative 190 Ablative of Cause 190 of Means and Instrument 191 of Limitation 191 of Comparison 191 of Manner 192 of Quality 193 of Price 193 of Separation^ Plenty and Want 194 in Special Constructions 196 _ VIII _ Timej Space, Place Page 197-207 Use of Preposiiiono Time Space Place Special Uses of Substantives of Adjectives of Pronouns Syntax of the Verb 214-246 Use of Tenses Sequence of Tensas Use of the Indicative Independent Uses of the Subjunctive Dependent Uses of the Subjunctive Consecutive and Final Conjunctions Concessive and Comparative Conjunctions Temporal Conjunctions Causal Conjunctions Conditional Conjunctions Relative Clauses with Subjunctive Direct Questions Indirect Questions The Imperative The Infinitive Accusative with the Infinitive Tenses of the Infinitive Nominative with the Infinitive Direct Discourse. Indirect Discourse Participles ,.., Ablative Absolute Gerund Gerundive Supine and its Equivalents Co-ordinating Conjunctions 246 259 Copulative 246 Disjunctive 247 Adversative , 248 Causal 249 Illative 249 Corresponsive , , . . 24S — IX -— POETICAL FORMS. Prosody Page 250-256 Quantity. General Rules 250 Middle Syllables 251 Final Syllables 253 Monosyllables 254 Compounds 255 Figures of Prosody 255 Essentials of Yersification 257-268 Feet. Rhythm 257 Dactylic Hexameter . 260 Elegiac Pentameter 261 Iambic Trimeter 261 Compound Verses 261 Metres of Horace 263 Index of the Metres of Horace 267 MISCELLANEOUS. The Roman Calendar 269 Roman Money ^ Weights^ and Measures 272 Abbreviations 273 Principal Latin Authors 274 Index of Verbs 277 Index of Subjects 288 LATIN GRAMMAB. General Division of the Subject. 1. Latin Grammar is a description of the usages of the Latin language according to the different ways in which words (vocabula) are put together to form speech (oratio). It is divided into three parts: I. Phonology which deals with the elementary sounds in the Latin language. II. Etymology which treats of the forms of single words — Inflection — and of derivation and composition — Word-formation. m. Syntax which treats of the arrangement and combination of words in sentences. Paet FiesTo phonology. 2. Nearly all words are composed of articulate sounds. These are represented to the eye by the letters of the Alphabet which is the same as the Eng- lish, except that it has no w. The Latin Alphabet consists, strictly, of but twenty-three letters, i and j being anciently but one character, as likewise u and V. During the classical age, y and z were recognized as Greek letters, and x was the twenty-first and last letter of the Latin alphabet (see 4. below). — 2 — 3, The Alphabetical Names still most generally used in English schools, are the English. Yet, it is more probable that in the ancient spelling of Latin the letters were named in the following manner: "t a . A ; ^\ ; •; ' m M em t> B ' bay ' . n N en c ;€• • •;L{ty : \ ' o O d . 30 ' ' day • ' • ' ' P P pay e E ay q Q koo f F eff r R er g G gay s S ess h H hah t T tay i I ee (vowel) u U 00 (vowel) J J ee (consonant) V V 00 (consonant) k K kah X X ix 1 li el y Y ipseelon z Z tsaytah ' The Latin uses capital initial letters at the beginning of sen- tences; also for all proper names, and for substantives and adjectives derived from proper names. 4. The Vowels are: a, e, i, o, u, y. All other letters, except the aspirate h, are consonants. Originally, i and u were used both as vowels and as consonants, and supplied the place of j and v. y and z occur in Greek words only. 5. The Diphthongs are: ae, oe, au, eu. 6. Consonaiits are classified according to the principal organs by which they are produced, as; Labials (lip-sounds) : b, p, f, v, m; Dentals (tooth-sounds): d, t, n, s; Linguals (tongue-sounds): 1, r; Gutturals (throat-sounds): c, g", k, q; and according to the mode of utterance^ as: Liquids which can be uttered without a vowel: 1, m, n, r, s; Mutes which cannot be perfectly sounded without a vowel: b, c, d, f, g, k, p, q, t. 7. Double Consonants are: z = dz in adze; x = cs (gs). Pronunciation. 8. The Pronunciation of Latin is different in differ- ent countries. In the United States, general usage is now strongly in favor of either the Roman or the Continental Method, the difference between these two not being very considerable. Many persons, however, prefer to retain the English Method, which has been the prevailing system of pronunciation among English- speaking scholars for the last two or three centuries.* Roman Method. 9. By the Roman, or Phonetic Method, every letter has always the same sound. Sounds of the Vowels. 10. As a general rule, each simple vowel is either long or short. Yowels marked thus: a e i o u y are long; marked thus: a e i 5 ii y are short. a =r a in father a = a in idea e = 6 in prey e = e in met i = i in machine i = i in holiest o = o in bone 6 = o in obey u = oo in boot ti = i* in full f = iin machine y = i in holiest Sounds of the Diphthongs. 11. Diphthongs are pronounced by the rapid successive utter- ance of the elements forming them. ae = ay in aye au = ou in house oe = o in world eu = oy in hoy (nearly) The sound of eu is much disputed; many scholars contend for eu as English eWj in few. 12. All diphthongs are long, as: foediis, a treaty. IS. To denote that two successive vowels which might otherwise be taken for a diphthong, are to be pronounced separately, the Diaeresis (") is placed over the second vowel, as: po6ta, a poet * For class-instruction in Latin pronunciation and current reading Ahn^Henn's Latin Beading Charts will be found valuable. Sounds of the Consonants. 14. The Consonants are sounded as in English, with the fol- lowing exceptions: c is hard and sounds in all situations like k, as: Cicero = Kikero. ch in Latin words is a k; in Greek words a k with the subaddi- tion of h, commonly pronounced as ^ in German. The latter sound can only be acquired through means of oral instruction. g" is hard throughout, as in get^ give. j has the sound of y in you. qu = kw (nearly). g"ii and su before another vowel when both vowels belong to the same syllable = giv, sw, as: lingua, lingwa; siietus, swetus. rli is pronounced like r simply. s and X are always hard, as in hiss, axe. t has the same sound as t in English, but is never aspirated; th is pronounced like t simply. V = t^^ in we. Continental Method. 15, In the pronunciation of the vowels, the Con- tinental Method is identical with the Roman. As to the pronunciation of the consonants, in which it more nearly coincides with the English Method, the following letters deserve special notice. t before i (short i) with another vowel, has the sharp sound of th in thin; when preceded by another t, s, or x, or when i is long (i), and in Greek words, t retains its original sound, as; mix' ti 0, a mixtui^e, c before e, i, y, ae, oe, eu, is pronounced like ts in nets; in every other position it is hard like the English k. ei before a vowel has nearly the same sound as ti in the same position, and they are sometimes interchangeable. ch = k with the subaddition of h, has a hard guttural sound like the German ift. sch is pronounced by the successive utter- ance of s and ch. Neither of these sounds (ch and sch) has an equivalent in English, and they must be learned from the lips of a teacher. 1 — 5 — English Method. 16. As a general rule, those who prefer to retain the English Method, should read a Latin sentence just as if the words were English^ carefully observing the directions which follow, especially the Rules of Accent (29-31,), and bearing in mind that there are no silent letters. Sounds of the Vowels and Diphthongs. 17. Vowels have their long English sounds, as in fate, me, pine, no, tube, type, in the following situations : at the end of a word, as: dom' i ni, masters; cor' nu, a horn; 16' 8, a lion; before another vowel or diphthong, as: De'us, God; vi'a, a tvay; ja' nii a, a door; when ending an accented syllable; as: pS.' ter, a father; de' dit, he gave; vi'viis, living; so' liis, alone; ly'ra, a lyre. Exceptions: a unaccented has the sound of final a in America; as: men' sa, a table. In tibi, to thee, and sil)i, to one's self, final i has its short sound. 18. Vowels have their short English sounds, as in fat, met, pin, not, tub, symbol, when followed by a consonant in the same syllable, as: mag'nus, great; fin' go, I fashion; cor' pns, a body; mens, the mind. Exceptions: post, after, is pronounced as the same word in English; the termination es like the English word ease, and the termination os like osem morose, as: a' ves, birds; pu' 6 ros. 19. The Diphthongs ae and oe are pronounced as e would be in the same place; an like aw, and eu like ew, as: poe'na, punishment; au'rum, gold; Euro' pa, Europe; Cae'sar, Ccesar. Sounds of the Consonants. 20. The Consonants are pronounced, in general, as in English. The following, however, require special notice: c and g are soft (like s and j) before e, i, y, ae, and oe, and hard in other situations, as: cen'tum, a hundred; ci'vts, a citizen; ca'do, 1 fall; ge'nu, the Jcnee; gra'num, a grain. — 6 — ch is hard like fc, as: cho'riis, a choir. The consonants c, s, t, immediately preceded by the accent, and standing before i, followed by another vowel, are aspirated, c, s, and t taking the sound of sh, x that of ksh, as: so' ci us (so'- she us), a companion; HelvO'tia (Hel ve' shi a), Switzerland. — c following an accented syllable has also the same sound before eu and yo, as: ca du' ce us (ca du' she us), a herald's stajf, — t preceded by another t, s, or x, has its hard sound, as: o' sti um^ a door; mix'ti 6, a mixture. Syllables. 21. A Syllable is one or more sounds pronounced by a single impulse of the voice; it consists of a vowel, or a vowel and one or more consonants. 22, A single consonant between two vowels belongs to the lat- ter, as: si'tis, thirst, 23. Of several consonants coming together between two vowels, those which can be used to begin a Latin word, belong to the next syllable, as: men'sa, a table; tern' plum, a temple; ca'stra, a military camp. 24, Compound words must be divided into the words which compose them, as: post' ea, afterward. But if the former part has dropped its termination, the compound word is to be divided like a simple word, as: ta met' si (contracted from ta'm6n et'sl), although. 23. The last syllable of the word is called the ultima; the next to the last the penult; the one before the penult, the antepenult. Quantity. The following are general Rules of Quantity; 26. A syllable is long by nature when it contains a long vowel or diphthong, as: soL the sun; aurum, gold; by position when a short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or by j, x, z; as: aptus, Jit; collis, hill; saxum, rock. 27. A syllable ending in a short vowel, followed by a mute with 1 or r is common (anceps), that is, it may be long or short in verse, as in tenebrae, darkness; in prose it is invariably short. 28. A vowel before another vowel is short, no account being taken of h, as: Deus, God; traho, I draw. — 1 — Accent. The following are Rules of Accent: 29, Words of two syllables are always accented on the first, as: la'na, wool 30, Words of more than two syllables are accented on the penult^ if that is long, as: man da'ta, orders; if it is short, then on the antepenult, as: a' da mas, the diamond. 31, When -que, -ne, -ve are joined to a word, the accent falls on the syllable next before these words, whether it be short or long, as: terra 'que, and the earth. Pakt Second. etymology. The Parts of Speech. 32. The classes into which words are divided, accord- ing to their uses, are called Parts of Speech; namely, the Substantive, which is the name of a person, thing, or idea; as: vl[r, a man; domus, a house; dies irae, the day of wrath; the Adjective, which is used to qualify a noun, as: rar^ avis, a rare bird; the Pronoun, which points out some person or thing, as: tQ, thou; hoc, that; the Verb, which is used to assert or declare something, as: diim spiro, spero, while I breathe^ I hope; the Adverb, which is used to qualify a verb or an adjective, as: nota bene, mark well; the Preposition, which joins a word to some other word to show the relation between them, as: lupus in fabula, the wolf in the fable; the Conjunction, which connects sentences together, or words used in the same sentence, as: ora et labora, pray and work; the Interjection, which is an exclamation, expressive of feeling; as: O curas hominum! the cares of men! 33, The word Noun is used as a name for both Nouns and Adjectives, the former being distinguished as nouns substantive, or Substantives, and the latter as nouns adjective^ or Adjectives. — 8 — 34:. Inflection is a change made chiefly in the end J of a word, to show its grammatical relation. 85. Nouns J Adjectives, and Pronouns have inflections of Declension, to denote number, gender, and case. Verbs have inflections of Conjugation, to denote voice, mood, tense, number, and person. 30. Those parts of speech which are not inflected are called Particles; these are Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections. Substantives. 37. The Substantive is the name of a Person or Thing (Concrete), or of a Quality (Abstract). 38. Concrete Substantives are either: Proper, i. e. peculiar to certain persons or things, as: Homeriis, Homer; Tiberis, Tiber; or Common to a whole class, as: arb5r, a tree; or Collective, denoting in the singular more than one, as: exercitus, an army. To this class belong also the names of Materials, as: lignum, wood. Gender. 39. There are, as in English, three Genders: Mas- culine, Feminine, and Neuter. The gender of Latin nouns, in many instances, is to be determined by their signification, according to the following General Rules. 40. Masculine are the names of males, rivers, winds, and months, as: nauta, a sailor; Rhenus, the Rhine; notus, the south- ': wind; Aprilis, April - 41. Exceptions: In the following words, Gender is determined by the termination, and not by the distinction of sex: copiae, troops vigiliae, watchmen custodiae, guards excubiae, sentinels 6p6rae, laborers mancipium, a slave auxnia, auxiliary troops, j — 9 — 42, Feminine are: the names of females, countries, towns, islands, and trees, as: virgo, a maid; Aegyptus, Egypt; N^apolis, Naples; Rhodus, Rhodes; pirus, apear-ti^ee. 43, The numerous Exceptions are chiefly names of towns, which, as to gender, follow the termination, instead of the signifi- cation^ as: Masculine: ArgI, Argos; Neuter: Saguntum, Saguntum. 44, Neuter are : all Indeclinable Nouns, terms or phrases used as nouns, and words quoted merely as such, without reference to their meaning, as: nihil, nothing; sclrg tiium, thy knowledge; hoc did, this (ivord) diu, 45, Nouns which have but one form for masculine and feminine are said to be of Common Gender: artifex, an artist dux, a leader testis, a witness cms, a citizen heres, an heir judex, a judge comSs, a companion parens, a parent patruSlis, a cousin custos, a keeper juvenis a youth vates, a prophet, 46, Names of Persons with different terminations to distinguish masculines and feminines, are called substantiva niobilia; as: a protector a master, mistress a conqueror a teacher a king, queen. 47, Names of Animals deserve special notice. With some of them gender is expressed by difference of termination, as: leo, a lion leaena, a lioness cervus, a stag cerva, a hind; others are of the common gender, as: hic bos, this ox haec bos, this cow; others have for both sexes one grammatical gender; these are called epicoena. Thus lepus, a hare, is always masculine, and vulpes, fox, always feminine. If necessary, the sexes are distinguished by mas, male, and femina, female, as: vulpes mas, a male fox lepiis femina, a female hare. 48, The gender of Substantives not determined by their sig- nification, is to be ascertained by their termination, according to the Special Rules of Gender under the several declensions. Adjec- tives distinguish gender by different forms in the same words, and agree in gender with their Substantives, patron us patrona dominus domina victor victrix magister magistra rex reglna — 10 ~ Number and Case. 49. The Latin, like the Enghsh, has two Numbers; the Singular Number denotes one, the Plural, more than one. There are six Cases in Latin: the Nomina- tive, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative, and Ablative. The Nominative is the case of the subject of the sentence, and answers the question Who? or What? The Genitive may be translated by the English Possessive or with the preposition of; it answers the question Whose? or Whereof? The Dative may usually be translated by the preposition to or for J answering the question To whom? or For whom? Sometimes it corresponds to the English Objective. The Accusative nearly corresponds to the English Objective; it answers the question Wliom? or What? The Vocative is the case of direct address. The Ablative may usually be translated by the prepositions from, by, with; it answers the questions Where? Whence? or Wherewith? 50. According to their relations, the cases are divided into casus recti. Independent Cases, and casus obliqui, Dependent Cases. Nominative and Vocative are casus recti; Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Ablative, casus obllqul. Declensions. 51. The formation of the several cases is called Declension. There are five Declensions in Latin, dis- tinguished by the endings of the Genitive Singular. First Declension. Genitive Singular ae Second Declension. ^* '' i Third Declension. ^^ ** is Fourth. Declension. ^^ *^ us Fifth Declension. ^^ *^ ei 52. The Stem is that part of the word which remains after tak- ing away the Inflections; its last letter is called the Characteristic. 53. The stem may be found from the Genitive Plural, in the First, Second and Fifth Declensions by cutting off rum; in the Third and Fourth by cutting off um. — 11 — 54. Case-endings of the Five Declensions.* FlEST Decixension. Second Declension. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Norn a (e, as, es) ae us. er, ir, iir, fim i, Neut. a Gen. ae (es) arum i orum Dat. ae IS (abus) o IS Ace. am (en) as tim els, Neut. a Voc. a (a, e) ae e, Sr, Ir, to, iim i, Neut. a Abl. a(e) IS (abus) o Is Third Declension. Singular. Plural. Nom a, 6, 5, §, y, c, 1, n, r, s, t, X es, Neut. a (ia) Gen. is lim (ium) Dat. 1 ibus Ace. em (im) Neut. like Nom. es, Neut. a (ta) Voe. like Nom. es, Neut. a (ia) Abl. e(i) ibiis Fourth Declension. Fifth Declension. Singular. Plural. Singular. JPlural. Nom us, u us, Neut. ua es es Gen. us uum ei, 6i ertim Dat. ill, u ibus (ubus) ei, 6i ebtis Ace. um, u us, Neut. ua gm 5s Voe. us, u us, Neut. ua es 6s Abl. a ibus (ubus) e ebtls ^^5. The following are General Riiles applying to all Declensions: 1. In both numbers the Vocative is the same as the Nominative, except in the singular of nouns in us of the Second Declension. 2. Neuters have the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative alike in both numbers, and these cases, in the plural, always end in a. 3. The Dative and Ablative plural are alwaya alike. * This Synopsis of Case-endings is embodied in Ahn-Henn's Latin Paradigm Charts, printed in large type and intended for permanent display on the wall. — 12 — First Declension. 56. Latin nouns which have ae in the Genitive Singular, are of the First Declension. They have the Nominative like the stem^ ending in a. Singular. Plural. Norn, men' sS, a table men' sae, tables Gen. men' sae, of a table men sa' riiin, of tables Dat. men' sae, to a table men' sis, to tables Ace. men' sam, a table men' sas, tables Voc. men' s^, table men' sae, tables Abl. men' sa, with a table men' sis, with tables 57. The Latin has no Article; therefore mensa may be ren- dered a table, or the tabley or table, according to the connection. Examples for Practice: Idina, -ae, the moon ran3<, ~ae, a frog Stella, -ae, a star terra, -ae, the earth, land via, -ae, a way, road alauda, -ae, a lark insula, -ae, an island rosa, -ae, a rose nauta, -ae, a sailor viola, -ae, a violet [is—is] * ^8, In composition with pater, mater, fllius, filia, the word familia has in the Grenitive Singular familias, e. g., paterfamilias, the father of a family. 59. The Dative and Ablative Plural of dgS., a goddess, and filiS, a daughter, end in abus, viz.: deabus, filiabus, to distinguish them from the same cases of deus, a god, and fllius, a son. Greek Nouns. 60. To the First Declension belong also some Greek Nouns, ending in e, as, es. The declension of these nouns in the plural differs in no respect from that of Latin nouns of the First Declension. Singular. Norn. 6 pi' to me, epitome bo' re as, north-wind py ri' tes, flint Gen. 6 pi' to mes bo' re ae py n' tae Dat. e pi' to mae bo' re ae py rl' tae Ace. g pi' to men bo' re am (an) py rl' ten Voc. 6 pi' to me bo' re a py rl' te Abl. 6 pi' to me bo' r6 a py rl' te * These figures refer to the ;E3ceycises fox translation in the First^ Becond and Third Zatin Books. i — 13 — Examples for Practice: grammaiice, -es, grammar Messlas, -ae, the Messiah aloe, -es, the aloe Lucas, -ae, Luke muslce, -es, music cometes, -ae, a comet Many of them have also regular Latin forms, as: planetes and planeta, a planet [loi, 102.] Rule of Gender. 61. Nouns of the First Declension ending in a and e are feminine; those in as and es are mascuhne. Exceptions. 62o Nearly all the exceptions are such as are masculine from their signification, according to the General Rule above mentioned {55, 1.), as: nauta, a sailor; also Hadria, the Adi^iatic. Second Declension. 63. Latin nouns whose genitive is i, are of the Second Declension. In the nominative they end in us, er, ir, ur, um. Those ending in um are neuter, the rest are masculine. Singular. Norn. flu' VI fls, a river tec' tiim, a roof Gen. flu' VI 1, of a river tec' ti, of a roof Dat. flu' VI 0, to a river tec' to, to a roof Ace. flu' vi um, a river tec' tiim, a roof Voc. flu' VI e, river tec' turn, roof Abl. flu' vi 0, with a river tec' to, with a roof Plural. Norn. flu' VI 1, rivers tec' ta, roofs Gen. flu VI 0' rum, of rivers tec to' rum, of roofs Dat. flu' VI IS, to rivers tec' tis, to roofs Ace. flu' VI OS, rivers tec' ta, roofs Voc. flu' vi T, rivers tec' ta, roofs Abl. flu' vi is, with rivers tec' tis, with roofs In Nouns of the Second Declension the stem ends in d-, as: fliivio-, tecto-, piiero-, agro-. In the Genitive Singular 11, from Substantives in iiis, ium, is often contracted into 1, the accent remaining unchanged, as: Appius, Gen, AppI consilium, Gen. consi'II — 14 — Examples for Practice: dSminus, -i, a master^ lord caelum, -i, the heaven, sky mundiis, -i, the world aumm, -i, gold anniis, -i, a year ferrftm, -i, iron morbus, ~i, a disease metallum, -T, a metal animus, -i, the mind, soul initium, -i, a beginning discipulus, -1, a scholar, pupil signuin, -i, a sign ventus, -i, the wind insectuni, -i, an insect gquus, -i, a horse pratum, -i, a meadow ociilus, -1, an eye mendacium, -i, a lie hortus, -T, a garden aedificium, -i, a building [19. 20] 64, Words of the Second Declension, ending in the nominative in er (ir, tir) have dropped the original ending us of the nomi- native. In most of them the e is only inserted in the Nominative and Vocative, and disappears in the other cases. Singular. Plural. Nom. a' ger, a field a' gri, fields Gen. a' gri, of a field a gro' riim, of fields Dat. a' gro, to a field a' gris, to fields Ace. a' grum, a field a' gros, fields Voc. a' ger, field a' gri, fields Abl. a' gro, with a field a' gris, with fields Examples for Practice: magister, -ri, a teacher, master culter, ~ri, a Tcnife ITber, -ri, a book aper, -ri, a wild boar arbiter, -ri, a judge faber, -ri, a smith auster, -ri^ the south wind minister, -ri, a servant cancer, -ri, a crab caper, -ri, a goat 65. In other words ending in er, the e of the Nominative belongs to the stem and is retained through all the cases, as: Singular. Plural. Nom. pu' er, a boy pu' e ri, boys Gen. pu' e ri, of a boy pu 6 ro' rQm, of boys Dat. pu' e ro, to a boy pu' e ris, to boys Ace. pu' 6 rttm, a boy pu' S r5s, boys Voc. pu' er, boy pu' 6 ri, boys Ab^ pu' 6 rSj ivith a boy pu' 6 ris, with boya — 16 — To this class belong: Substantives: adulter,-!, an adulterer gener, -i, a son-in-law puer, -i, a boy socSr, -i, a father-in-law vesper, -i, evening Liber, -i, Bacchus llberi, -orum, children Adjectives: asper, aspera, asperum, rough lacer, lacera, lacerum, torn miser, misera, miserum, ivretched prosper, prospera, prosperum, prosperous tener, teiiera, tenerum, tender dexter, dext(e)ra, dext(e)rum, right. Words ending in fer and ger from f ero, / bear, and g^ro, I carry: Lucifer, -i, light-bringer armiger, -i, an armor-bearer frugifer, frugifera, frugiferum, fruit-bearing laniffer, laiiiffera, lanigerfim, wool-bearing. [23, 24,] 66. The only words in ir and ur are: vir, -T, a man, with its compounds, as: l6vir, -i, a brother-in-law, and the masculine of the adjective satur, -a, -um, sated. 67. Proper Nouns in ius omit e in the Vocative, as: Anto- nius, Anthony, Antoni; likewise fllius, a son, and genius, a guardian angel, make fili and geni. The possessive meiis, my, (but not mea, meum) has mi, and Deus, God, has Deus. In the plural Nominative and Vocative, deus has dii or di; Genitive: deoruui; Dative and Ablative: dlis, dis. 68. In the Genitive plural of the Second Declension um is often found for orum, especially in certain words denoting money, measure, or weight, as: nummum for nummorum, of moneys; also in a few other words, as: deiim for deorum, llberum for llberorum. 69. A few Greek Nouns of the Second Declension end in 5s, 6n, instead of us, fim. Greek Nouns ending in eiis (like Orpheus) are thus declined: Norn. Or'pheus Dat Or' phe o Voc. Or' pheii Gen. Or' phe i Ace. Or' phe um Abl. Or' phe o [101. 102.] — 16 in um Rule of Gender, 70. Nouns in us, er, ir are masculine; neuter. Exceptions. 71. Of nouns ending in us the names of towns, islands, and trees are Feminine, as: Corinthus, Corinth; Sam lis, Samos; populus, a poplar J etc. {42) ; also : alviis, -T, the belly humus, -i, soil colus, -i, a distaff vanniis, i, a van I and many Greek words of frequent occurrence, as: ■ diphthongus, -T, a diphthong methodus, -i, a method paragraphiis, -i, a paragraph dialectus, -i, a dialect The following in us are Neuter: pelagus, -1, the sea; vulgus, -i, the rabble; virus, -I, poison; their accusative, as of all neuters, is the same as the nominative, but they have no plural. [^7. ^s.] Adjectives in us, a, um. 72. Adjectives in us, a, um are declined in the masculine and neuter like substantives of the Second Declension, and in the feminine like substantives of the First. bona, boniim. Singular. /. bo' na bo' nae bo' nae bo' nam bo' na bo' na Plural. bo' nae bo na' rum b6' nis bo' nas bo' nae bo' nis bonus, good 7n. Nom. bo' nus Gen. bo'ni Dat. bo' no Ace. bo' niim Voc. bo'ne Abl. bo' no Nom. bo'ni Gen. bo no' rum Dat. bo' nis Ace. bo' nos Voc. bo'ni Abl. bo' nis n. bo' niim bo' ni bo' no bo' niim bo' niim bo' no bo' ' na bo no' rum bo' nis bo' na bo' na bo' nis ~ 17 — Examples for Practice: sedulQs, -a, -um, busy modestiis, -a, -um, modest timidus, -a, -um, timid beattis, -a, -um, happy^ hleaaed rotundiis, -a, -vLui^round albus, -a, -um, white odorus, -a, -um, fragrant fulvus, -a, -tim, yellow clams, -a, -um, bright^ clear multus, -a, -um, much^ 7nany iucidus, -S-, -um, shining magnus, -a,-um, great^ large arduus,-a,-um, arduous^ steep parvus, -a, -um, little^ small umbrosus, -a, -um, shady htimanus, -a, um, human garrulus, -a, -um, garrulous verus, -a, -um, true ® 1^1, 22.] 73, Substantives and Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions are combined in the following manner: Singular. Norn, nau'ta lae'tiis, a merry sailor Gen. nau'tae lae'ti, of a merry sailor Dat. nau'tae lae'to, to a merry sailor Ace. nau'tam lae'tiim, a merry sailor Voc. nau'ta lae'te, merry sailor Abl. nau'ta lae'to, with a merry sailor Plural. Norn, nau'tae lae'ti, merry sailors Gen. nauta'rum laeto'rum, of merry sailors Dat nau'tis lae'tTs, to merry sailors Ace. nau'tas lae'tos, merry sailora Voc. nau'tae lae'ti, merry sailors Abl. nau'tis lae'tis, with merry sailors Singular. Nonn. coe'na mo'dica, a moderate dinner Gen. coe'nae mo'dicae, of a moderate dinner Dat. coe'nae mo'dicae, to a moderate dinner Ace. coe'nam mo'dicam, a moderate dinner Voc. coe'na mo'dica, moderate dinner Abl. coe'na mo'dica, with a moderate dinner Plural. Norn, coe'nae mo'dicae, moderate dinners Gen. coena'rum modica'rum, of moderate dinners Dat. coe'nis mo'dicis, to moderate dinners Ace. coe'nas mo'dicas, moderate dinners Voc. coe'nae mo'dicae, moderate dinners Abl. coe'nis mo'dicis, with moderate dinners — 18 — Singular. Norn, tec'tfim al'tum, a high roof Gen. tec'ti al'ti, of a high roof Dat tec 'to al'to, to a high roof Ace. tec'tflm al'tum, a high roof Voc. tec 'turn al'ttim, high roof Abl. tec 'to al'to, with a high roof Plural. Norn, tec'ta al'ta, high roofs Gen. tecto'rum alto'rum, of high roofs Dat. tec 'tis al'tis, to high roofs Ace. tec'ta al'ta, Jiigh roofs Voc. tec'ta al'ta, high roofs Abi. tec 'tis al'tis, with high roofs Examples for Practice, poeta clariis, a famous poet fluviiis lattis, a broad river formica seduia, the busy ant colluni longum, a long neck. Adjectives in 6r, ; a, uni. 74. Adjectives in er, &, um, are declined in the masculine and neuter like substantives of the Second Declension, and in the feminine, like substantives of the First. niger, nigra, nigrum, black Singular. m. / n. Nonn. ni' g6r ni' gra nV griim Gen. ni' gri ni' grae ni' gri Dat. ni' gro ni' grae ni' gro Ace. ni' griiin ni' gram ni' griim Voc. ni' ger ni' gra ni' griim Abl. ni' gro ni' gra Plural. ni' gro Norn, ni' gri ill' grae ni' gra Gen. ni gro' riiiii ni gra' rum ni gro' rtim Dat. ni' gris ni' gris ni' gris Ace. ni' gros ni' gras ni' grS, Voc. ni' gri ni' grae ni' gra Abl. ni' gris ni' gris ni' gris 19 m. Norn. 1!' ber li Gen. IV be ri 11' Dat. IT' be ro ir Ace. 11' be rum li' Voc. ir ber li' Abl. IV be ro li' Norn. 11' be ri ir Gen. 11 be ro' rum li Dat. 11' b6 ris li' Ace. li' be ros li' Voc. 11' b6 ri li' Abl. \V be ris li' libgr, libera, liberum, free Singular. /. n. be ra li' be rum be rae li' be ri be rae li' be ro be ram li' be rum be ra li' be rum be ra li' be ro Plural. be rae li' be ra li be ra' riim li be ro' rum be ris li' be ris be ras li' be ra be rae li' be ra be ris li' bS ris 75. Most adjectives in €r, a, um drop the S before the r like niger. Examples are: aeger, aegrS., aegriim, siclc ereber, crebra, erebrum, frequent rubSr, rubra, rubrum, red pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum, beautiful^ fine sinister, Sinistra, sinistrtim, left pTger, pigra, pigrum, lazy integer, Integra, integrum, whole, entire 76. A few adjectives in er, a, tim retain the e throughout, like liber. (See 65.) 125. 26,] 77. These nine adjectives have the genitive sin- gular in ius, and the dative in i in all the genders: Nominative, alius, -a, -ud, another nullus, -a, -um, no, not any, no one solus, -a, -um, alone totus, -a, -um, ivhole uUus, -a, -um, any iinus, -a, -um, one alter, -a, -um, the other (of two) titer, -ra, -rum, ivhich (of two) neuter, -ra, -rum, neither The plural is regular like that of bonus. Grenitive. Dative. aliiis alii nullius nulli solius soil totius toti ullius ulli unius uni alteriiis altgri utriils utri neutrius neutri [71. 72.] — 20 — Third Declensioiio 78. Nouns whose genitive ends in is, are of the Third Declension. Their nominative ends in a, e, i, 6, y, c, 1, n, r, s, t, and x. 79. In the Third Declension, the stem ends either in i (Vowel- stem) or in a consonant (Consonant-stem). There are only two u-stems, SLi-s, a swine, and grCi-s, a crane. The stem can be found by cutting off uni from the Genitive Plural: avis, a bird Gen. Plur. avium Stem avi- lapis, a stone '' lapidum " lapid- 80. All nouns having the same number of syllables in the Nominative and Genitive (Parisyllabic) have Vowel-stems in i. They end in the Nominative in is, es, e, al, ar, those in al and ar having lost a final e. Norn, navis Gen. iiavi-s '^ nubes " nubi-s ^^ mare ^' mari-s Norn, animal (e) Gen. animali-s '^ calcar(e) ^' calcari-s 81. All nouns increasing in the Genitive (Imparisyllabic) have Consonant-stems: Nom. lapis Gen. lapid-is | Norn, homo Gen. hoinin-is Formation of the Genitive. 82. The Entire Declension of any Substantive of the Third Declension may be readily formed by sub- stituting for the Grenitive-ending is, the proper end- ings of the other cases. Hence to decline a word correctly, in this Declension, we need to know how its Genitive is formed. But we must bear in mind that Neuters always form the Accusa- tive and Vocative cases in both numbers like the Nominative, and the Nominative Plural in a. This is a rule of highest importance. 83. Nouns in a are Neuters of Greek origin and change ^ into atis to form the genitive, as: poSma, poemS-tis. — 21 — Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Singularo p6 6' ma, a poem po e' ma tis, of a poem p6 6' ma ti, to a poem p6 6' ma, a poem p6 6' ma, poem Plural. p6 e' ma ta, poems p6 6' ma turn, of poems p6 e ma' ti bus, to poems po 6' ma ta, poems p6 6' ma ta, poems p6 6' ma te, with a poem p6 e ma' ti bus, with poems Examples for Practice: aroma, -tis, a spice aenigma, -tis, a riddle [63. 66,'] 84, Nouns in e change e into is to form the genitive, as: rete, retis. They are Neuter. Singular. Plural. Nom. rg' te, a net re' ti a, nets Geii. rg' tis, of a net re' ti um, of nets Dat. re' ti, to a net rS' ti bus, to nets Ace. re' te, a net re' ti a, nets Voc. re' tS, net re' ti a; nets Abl. re' ti, with a net r6' ti bGs, with nets Examples for Practice: mare, -is, the sea, ocean cubile, -is, a lair altare, -is, an altar conclave, -is, a room [53. 54:] 85, Certam nouns ending in form their genitive by changing 5 into inis, as: homo, hominis. Singular. Nom. ho' mo, man Gen. ho' mi nis, of man Dat. ho' mi ni, to man Ace. ho' mi nem, man Voc. ho' mo, man Abl. ho' mine, with man Thus we have: homO, -inis, man nemO, -inis, nobody and nearly all the words in d.5 and go, as: or do, -inis, order imagO, -inis, an image consuetud6,-inis, habit pulchritudO, -inis, beauty. 86, Mark: ckrOj flesh; carnis, gen. plur.: carnium. Plural, ho' mi nes, menj people ho' mi niini, of men ho mi' ni bus, to men ho' mi nes, men ho' mi nes, men ho mi' ni bus, with men turbo, -inis, a ivhirlwind Apollo, -inis, Apollo — 22 — $7, All other words ending in 8 change S into 5nis to form the genitive, as: 160, leonis. Singular. Norn. 16' 6, a lion Gen. 16 0' nis, of a lion Dat. le 0' ni, to a lion Ace. le o' nem, a lion Voc. le' 0, lion Abl. le o' ne, with a lion Such are: pav8, -onis, a peacocJc pulmo, -onis, a lung also a few in dO and g-O, namely: harpagO, -onis, a grapple-Jiook praedO, -onis, a robber comedo, -onis, a glutton ligO, -onis, a mattock . ^ [29-32.] Peculiar: AniO, -enis, the river Anio. 88, Nouns in i and y (Neuters of Greek origin) take is, yis in the genitive, as: sinapi, -is, mustard; misy, -yis, copperas. 89, Neuters in c: only alSc, alScis, pickle; lac, lactis, milk. 90, Nouns in 1 add is to the nominative to form the genitive: Plural. 16 o' nes, lions 16 o' num, of lions 16 o' ni "biis, to lions 16 o' nes, lions 16 0' nes, lions 16 o' ni "bus, with lions aquilO, -onis, the north wind pOtiO, -onis, a drink(ing) Singular. Norn, con' sul, a consul Gen. con' su lis, of a consul Dat. con' su li, to a consul Ace. con' su lem, a consul Voc. con' sul, consul Abl. con' su le, with a consul sol, sOlis, the sun sal, salis, salt Plural, con' su les, the consuls con' su lum, of the consuls con su' li bus, to the consuls con' sules, the consuls con' su les, consuls con su' li bus, with the consuls Examples for Practice: exsul, exsulis, an exile piigil, pugilis, a pugilist 91, Nouns in al change ai to alis to form the genitive, as: animS.1, animalis. They are Neuter. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Singular, a' ni mal, an animal a ni ma' lis, of an animal a ni ma' li, to an animal a' m mal, an animal a' ni mal, animal Plural, a ni ma' li a, animals a ni ma' li um, of animals a ni ma' li bus, to animals a ni ma' li a, animals a ni ma' li 3», animals a ni ma' li, with an animal a ni ma' U bQs, with animals — 23 — Examples for Practice: vectig&l, -alls, a tax tribunal, -alis, a tribunal 92. m61, honey J has mellis, and the plural mellS; fel, gall^ has fellis, but is without a plural; both are Neuter. [53. s4.] 93. Nouns in en form their genitive by changing en into inis, as: carmen, carminis; Nouns in en, by adding is, as: r6n, renis. All in men are Neuter. Singular. Plural. Norn, car' men, a poem car' mi na, poems Gen. car' mi nis, of a poem car' mi num, of poems Dat. car' mi ni, to a poem car mi' ni bus, to poems Ace. car' men, a poem car' mi na, poems Voc. car' men, poem car' mi na, poems Abl. car' mi ne, with a poem car mi' ni btls, with poems Examples fbr Practice: nomen, -mis, a name (rSn, rSnis) usually pi.: renes, lumen, -inis, light renilni, the kidneys omen, -inis, an omen lien, lienis, spleen lulmen, -inis, a thunder-bolt spl6n, splenis, spleen gramen, -inis, grass pecten, -inis, a comb [59. 60.] 94. As a rule, nouns in r, viz. 3Ve; amnis, a river; &c, 2. Also the following: axis, -, an axis pulvis, -eris, dust collis, -, a hill lapis, -idis, a stone orbis, -, a circle vermis, -, a worm anguis, -, a serpent mensis, -, a month fascis, -, a bundle piscis, -, a fish postis, -, a post unguis, -, a claw torquis, -, a collar fustis, -, a club sanguis, -inis, blood ensis, ~, a sword — 41 — 167, Exceptions in x. Masculine. 1. Greek nouns in ax, as: thorax, a hr east-plate; 2. Most nouns in ex, -icTs, as: cortex, -icis, harlc; ciilex, -icis, a gnat; &c. Only the following in ex are Feminine: lex, l6gis, a law faex, faecis, lees nex, necis, a murder supellex, -ectilis, furniture (prex), preces, prayers 3. Two in ix: calix, -icis, a cup fornix, -icis, an arch 168, Exceptions in s preceded by a consonant. Masculine. 1. fons, -tis, a spring pons, -tis, a bridge mons, -tis, a mountain adeps, -ipis, fat dens, -tis, a tooth 2. Some nouns in ns, originally Adjectives with a masculine noun understood, as: 6riens, -tis (sol), east riidens, -tis (funis), a cable occidens, -tis (sol), west torrens,-tis (fluvius), a torrent III. Neuters. 169. Nouns of the Third Declension in a, 6, i, c, 1, n, t, y, ar, iir, us: hoc aenigma, this riddle hoc nomSn, this name hoc mare, this sea hoc caput, this head hoc lac, this milk hoc calcar, this spur hoc animal, this animal hoc fulgur, this lightning hoc tempus, this time. 170. Exceptions. Masculine. sal, salis, salt ISpiis, -6ris, a hare sol, solis, the sun miis, muris, a mouse turtur, -is, a turtle-dove ren, renis, kidney furfur, -is, bran ITen, liSnis, 1 .^^^ vuitiir, -is, a vulture splen, splSnis i salar, -is, trout pecten, -inis, a comb 42 — Feminine. jiiventus, -utis, youth incus, -udis, an anvil sgnectus, -utis, old age palus, -udis, a marsh virtus, -litis, virtue pecus, -udis, a head of cattle servitus, -utis, slavery tellus, -uris, the earth salus, -utis, safety BUS, suis, a swine grus, gruis, a crane Fourth Declension. 171. Latin nouns whose genitive ends in us, are of the Fourth Declension. The Stem of nouns of the Fourth Declension ends in ii. Mas- culine and Feminine nouns end in the Nominative in us; Neuters in u. Singular. Plural. Norn, fruc' tus, fruit fruc' tus, fruits Gen. fruc' tus, of fruit fruc' tu uin, of fruits Dat. fruc' tu i, to fruit fruc' ti "bus, to fruits Ace. fruc' turn, fruit fruc' tus, fruits Voc. fruc' tus, fruit fruc' tus, fruits Abl. fruc' tu, with fruit fruc' ti bus, with fruits Norn, cor' nu, a horn cor' nu a, horns Gen. cor' nus, of a horn cor' nu um, of horns Dat. cor' nu (ui), to a horn cor' ni bus, to horns Ace. cor' nu, a horn cor' nu S,, horns Voc. cor' nu, horn cor' nu a, horns Abl. cor' nu, with a horn cor' ni bus, with horns Examples for Practice; sensiis, -us, sense olfactus, -us, smell obitiis, -us, death visus, -us, sight motiis, -us, motion nutus, -us, a nod gustus, -us, taste fluctus, -us, a flood gelii, -us, (icy) cold tactus, -us, touch cantus, -us, a song genu, -us, the knee 172. The following have the Dative and Ablative plural in ubus: acus, acubiis, a needle artiis, artubus, a joint arcus, arcubus, a bow partus, p artubus, birth lacus, lacQbtis, a lake portus, portubus, a harbor pScu, pecubtis, cattle tribiis, trTl)ubus, a tribe quercus, quercGbiis, an oak v6ru, v6rubiis, a spit Bp6ciiSj spgctibtis, a cave — 43 — 173. domus, a house^ is declined thus: Singular. Plural. Norn. d5' mils, a house do'mus, houses Gen. ] f ""P^- f, « ^'"''' f: "i^ ^' [ Of houses (do' mi, at home do mo' rum, i Dat. do' mu i, to a house do' mi bus, to houses Ace. do' mum, a house, home do'mus & do'mos, houses Voc. do' mus, house do' mus, houses Abl. do' mo, with a housej from home do' mi bus, with houses Rule of Gender. 174, Most nouns of the Fourth Declension m us are masculme. The few words in u are all neuter. 175, Exceptions. Feminine. actis, -us, a needle mantis, -us, the hand domiis, -us, a house porticiis, -us, a gallery Idiis, -iiiim (pi.), the Ides tribtls, -us, a tribe [67. 68. 105. 106.] Fifth Declension. 176. Nouns which have ei or 6i in the genitive from es in the nominative are of the Fifth Declension. The Stem of nouns of the Fifth Declension ends in e, which appears in all the cases. Singular. Norn. di' es, a day res, a thing Gen. di e' 1, of a day re' i, of a thing Dat. di e' i, to a day r6' i, to a thing Ace. di' em, a day rem, a thing Voc. di' es, day res, thing Abl. di' e, with a day re, with a thing Plural. Norn. di' es, days res, things Gen. d! e' rum, of days re' rum, of things Dat. di e' bus, to days re' bus, io things Ace. di' es, days res, things Voc. dV es, days res, things Abl. di e' bus, with days re' bus, with things — 44 — Examples for Practice: facies, -ei, the face series, -ei, a series effigies, -ei, a likeness superficies, -el, a surface spes, -ei, hope fides, -ei, faith glacies, -ei, ice progenies, -ei, offspring 177. Of all the nouns of the Fifth Declension only two are com- plete in the plural, viz.: dies and res. 178. The e of ei in the genitive and dative is long when preceded by a vowel, as: di-e-i, and short when preceded by a con- sonant, as: fi-de-i. Riile of Gender. 179. All Nouns of this declension are feminine, ex- cept meridies, mid-day^ and the plural of dies, a day, which are always masculine. ISO, In the singular, dies is usually masculine, but sometimes feminine, especially in phrases indicating a fixed time, or time in general, as: constituta die, on the appointed day. [69. 70. 105. 106.] Irregular Nouns. 181. The Latin has only a few Indeclinable Nouns; viz.: fas, right manS, morning nefas, wrong nihil, nothing instar, an image, kind pondo, (lit. in weight), pounds necesse, necessary opus, need besides the names of the Latin and Greek letters, as: A, D, alpha, delta, and some foreign words, as: sinapl, mustard. 182. Some nouns are Defective in Case, ^. e., they want one or more cases. The commonest of them are: (dicio), sway, Norn. sing, wanting, fors, chance, only in Norn. & AM. sing, forte, by chance. (frux), fruit, Nom. sing, wanting, grates, thanks, only in Nom. & Ace. plur. impetus, attack, only in Nom., Ace. & Abl. sing. & Nom. «f ^^^^ (^^ ^ooks) \ loca, -orum, j)^(^ces margarita, -ae, a pearl \ ^ar|arlta, -oriim [ ^''"' '* caelum, -i, heaven caeli, -oriim, heavens epiiliim, -i, a banquet gpulae, -arum, a meal balneum, -i, a bath balneae, -arum, baths, a bathhouse frentim, -T, a bridle frgiii, -orum, & fr6na, -orum, a bit \107. lOS.] 192. Sometimes a Noun in combination with an adjective takes a special signification, both parts being regularly inflected, as: jus- jurandum, an oath; rgspublica, a commonwealth. Singular. an oath a commonwealth Norn. jusjuran'diim res pu' bit cS Gen. ju risju ran'di re i pu' bli cae Dat. ju rijii ran' do re 1 pu' bit cae Ace. jCisju ran' diim rem pu'bli cam Voc. jus ju ran' dum res pu'bli ca Abl. ju reju ran' do re pu' bli ca Plural. Nom, ju raju ran' da res pu' bli cae Gen. re rum pu bli ca' rum Dat. rebus pu'blicis Ace. ju raju ran' da res pu' bli cas Voc. res pu' bli cae Abl. re bus pu' bli cTs r^^g Proper Names. 193. The Romans regularly had three names, as: Marcus TuUTus Cicero. 194. Marcus, the praenomen, corresponded to our Christian name; Tulllus, the nomen, was the name of the gens or clanship; the eognomien, or surname^ as Cicero, indicated the particular family to which one belonged. Another species of surname, agnSmen, — 48 — was some significant epithet, as: Publius Cornelius Scipio Africa- nus, from the conquest of Carthage in Africa. 195. The three names, however, were not always used, com- monly two. The Romans, when addressing a person, generally used the praenomen. 196. Women had no personal names, but were known only by that of their gens with a feminine termination, as: Julia, the daugh- ter of Gains Julius Caesar, 197. The commonest praenomens are thus abbreviated: A. = Aulus L. == Lucius Q. (Qu.) = Quintus App. = Appius M. = Marcus S. (Sex.) ^ SextuB C. (G.) == Gains M'. = Manius Serv. = Servius Cn. (Gn.) == Gnaeus Mam. = Mamercus Sp. = Spurius D. = Decimus N. (Num.)=Numerius T. = Titus K. = Kaeso P. = Publius Ti. (Tib.) = Tiberius. Adjectives. 198. Adjectives and Participles are in general de- clined like substantives. They distinguish gender by different forms in the same word, corresponding with their substantives in Number, Gender, and Case. 199. Some Adjectives denote each gender by a different termi- nation, and consequently have three terminations, viz.: Of the First and Second Declensions: Qs, a, tim, as: bontis, ^a, -um, . good (see 72.) er, a, urn, as:-!^^^^^' -^' "^^^ /^^^ (^^^ ^^0 I niger, -rS, -rum, black (see 76.) Or, a, um, only satur, -a, -iim, sated (see 66.) [21, 22, 25, 26,} Of the Third Declension: gr, is, g, as: acgp, -ris, -r§, sharp (see 137.) ,^^ ^^, ' [oo. OO.J 200. Some Adjectives of the Tliird Declension have two termina- tions — one for the masculine and feminine, and the other for the neuter; they end in: Is, e, as: tristis, -e, sad (see 139.) dr, fis, as: diirior, -Qs, harder (see 139.) [5S. S6. 73, 74,] — 49 — 201, Some Adjectives of the Third Declension have only one termination which is common to all genders j they end in: 1, as: vigil, wakeful (see 90.) r, as: pauper, poor (see 95,) s, as: prQdens, sensible (see 14:1,) X, as: felix, happy (see 14:1,) [57—60,] Irregular Adjectives. 202, The following Adjectives with their Compounds have the Genitive singular in iGs, and the Dative in i for all genders (see 77.). alius, -a, -tid, another ullus, -S, -um, any nulltis, -a, -iim, no unus, -a, -um, one solGs, ~a, -uni, alone alt^r, -&, -um, ^Tie other (of two) totus, -3;, -dm, whole iitSr, -r3r, -rmn, which (of two) neutgr, -r3», -rum, neither alona Like ut^r are declined its compounds, as uterque, iitraquS, utrumqug, either. Of alteruter, the one or the other of the two, either both parts are declined; alter ut6r, altera utra, alt^rum utrum; or only the latter: alt6riiter, alt^rutra, alterutrum. [71. 72,] 203, Many Adjectives of one termination, especially such as end in er, §s, 6r, 5s, fex, are not used in the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative plural of the neuter gender, viz.: dgggngr, ~is, degenerate comp6s, -5tis, capable pauper, -is, poor artlfex, -icis, artificial ales, -itis, winged inops, inopis, needy bipes, -edis, two-footed rSdux, -ucis, returning dives, -itis, rich sons, -tis, guilty sospes, -itis, safe supplex, -icis, suppliant concolor, -oris, of the same co- trux, -ucis, fierce mgmor, -is, mindful {lor vigil, -is, wakeful 204. Of ceteri, -ae, -S., the rest, the Nominative singular mascu- line is not used, singuli, -ae, -&, one at a time; pauci, -ae, -3», few; and pleriqug, pl^raeque, pleraquS are not used in the singular. Singular. m. /. n. Norn. so' lus so'ia S5' lum, Gen. so If lis so li' lis SO li' tis Dat. so' li SO'll so'li — 50 — 205, The following Adjectives are Indeclinable: frugl, frugal t6t, so many n6quam, worthless quot, how many 206, The Substantives: victSr, victrix, conqueror, and ult6r, ultrix, avenger^ are also used as Adjectives — victorious, revenge- ful — and, in poetry, they admit even a neuter of the plural, as: arma victrlcia, victorious arms. Comparison. 207, Adjectives have three degrees of Comparison: the Positive, the Comparative, and the Superlative. 208, The Positive Degree is expressed by the adjective in its simple form, as: duriis, hard, 209, The Comparative Degree ends in or for the masculine and feminine, and in us for the neuter, and is formed by changing the genitive ending i or is of the positive into ior, iiis; thus: Positive. Genitive. Comparative. excelsus, high excels! excelsior, excelsius iTber, free liberi liberior, liberius pulcher, beautiful pulchri pulchrior, pulchriiis acer, sharp acris acrior, acriiis l^vis, light ievis levior, levius sagax, sagacious sagacis sagacior, sagaciQs prudens, prudent prCidentis prudentior, prudontius 210, Comparatives are of the Third Declension; they are de- clined like duridr, duritis (see 139,) 211, The Superlative is formed by changing the genitive end- ing i or is of the positive into issimiis, issima, issimum; thus: Positive. Genitive. Superlative, pretiosus, valuable prStTosi pretiosissimus dlligens, diligent dllTgentis diligentissimtls 212, Superlatives are declined like bonus, -a,-uin of the First and Second Declensions. 213, Adjectives in er add rimus to the positive to form the Superlative, as: pulcher, beautiful, pulcherrimus; ac6r, sharp, acerrimus. — 61 — 214, vStus, old^ has Superlative vSterrlmtls, and matHriis, rijpe^ matarissinius and sometimes maturriniiis. 215. Six adjectives in ilis form their Superlative by changing the ending is into limus, as: facilis, facillimus. These are: facilis, easy^ facillimiis difflcilis, difficulty difficillimtis similis, like^ simillimtis dissimilis, unlike^ dissimillimiis gracilis, slender^ gracilliinus humilis, low^ humillimiis 216. Compound adjectives in dicus, ficiis, and vdliis form their Comparative and Superlative by changing lis into entior, entissimus, as: b^nevoliis, benevolent b^nSvolentiop b6nev61entissimiis bengficQs, beneficent beneflcentior bgngficentissimus magnificus, magnificent magnificentior magnificentissimus 217, In like manner are compared: gggnus (ggens), needy egentior providiis, jjrovident provldentior egentissimQs providentissinius 218. Adjectives in Qs, preceded by a vowel, are compared by means of magis and maxime, more and most: dubiiis, doubtful mag^is dubius maxime diibius 219. But adjectives in quQs are regular: antlqutis, old antlquior antiquissiniiis [75-76-.] Irregular and Defective Comparison. 220. The following adjectives have different words for expres- sing the different degrees of comparison : bonus, good m61T6r, better malus, bad P^jor, worse magnus, great major, greater parvus, little minor, less^ lesser multus, much plus, more 221. plus, more^ is thus declined: Singular. Plural. Norn. &. Ace. plus plu' res plu' rS (plu' ri a) Gen. plu' ris plu' ri iim plu' ri iim Dat. &. Abl. _ plu' ri bus plu' ri bus complurgs, several^ very many, is declined like plurfis. optimus, best pessimus, worst maximiis, greatest minimus, least plurimiis, most 62 — 222, Mark the degrees of the two Indeclinable adjectives: ngquam, worthless nSquior ngquissimus frugl, frugal frugalior frrigalisslmus 223, The following adjectives have two Irregular Superlatives: extgrus, outward exterior, outer extrSmus, (extlraiis), outmost infgriis, below inferior, lower infimiis, imus, lowest ^^ . , , - .. {latter postremus, ) last posterns, next posterior, |^^^^^ postumus; } ?ates< siip^ms, above superior, upper supr^mns, summm, highest 224, The following adjectives are Defective in their comparison : 1. Positive wanting. Comparative, citerior, viore on this side interior, inner prior, prior, former propior, nearer ulterior, ulterior, further ocior, swifter potior, preferable deterior, worse Superlative, citlmus, most on this side intimus, innermost, intimate primus, foremost, first proximus, nearest ultimus, furthest, last ocissimus, swiftest potissimiis, most important deterrimus, worst II. Comparative wanting. Positive. Superlative. diversus, different diversissimus, most different falsus, false falsissimus, falsest incliitus, renowned inclutissimus, most renowned invitus, unwilling invitissTmus, most unwilling noviis, new novissimus, latest, last j^acer, sacred sacerrimus, most sacred vetiis, old v^terrimiis, oldest III. Superlative wanting. Positive. Comparative. juvgnis, young janI5r, younger sgnex, old senior, older alacer, gay alacrior, gayer longinquus, far longinquior, farther propinquus, near propinciuior, nearer popularis, popular popularior, more popular salutaris, salutary saltitarior, more salutary [*77. 7«.) - 53 — 225, Some Adjectives are, by their meaning, excluded from comparison. Among these are certain words implying matter, time, place, and person, as: ferrous, iron; hodiernus, of to-day; R5manuSj Roman; paternus, paternal; also words denoting the lowest or highest degree of a quality, as: singiilaris, alone of its kind, and Compounds with per and prae; but praeclarus, re- nowned, and pertinax, very tenacious, are found in the Compara- tive and Superlative. 226, Again, there are Adjectives which, from their form, or without any obvious reason, are incapable of comparison, viz.: 1. Adjectives in Gs, after a vowel (see 218,). 2. Compound Adjectives containing a verb or a substantive, as: particeps, sharing; inops, needy; except Compounds of dico, faciO, volo (see 216,), and Compounds of ars, cor, mens, as: iners, un- skilled; concors, harmonious; amens, senseless; which are regularly compared. 3. Adjectives in ictis, Imtls, InQs, iniis, orGs, tilus, as: mSdicus, moderate; legitimus, lawful; dlutiniis, lasting; matutlnus, early; canorus, melodious; sedulus, busy, 4. Many Adjectives which cannot be classed under distinct head- ings: caducus, drooping m^rus, mere ciciir, tame m6di6cris, middling curvus, curved m6m6r, mindful feriis, wild mirus, wonderful gnarus, skilful par, equal impiger, active impar, unequal lacer, torn rudis, rude lassus, wearied trCix, fierce miitilus, maimed vagus, vagrant 227, Participles, when used as Adjectives, are regularly com- pared, as: doctiis, leaimed, doctior, doctissimus; abstinens, abstinent, abstmentior, abstinentissimus. Adverbs formed from Adjectives are compared as follows (see 440): carus, dear: care, carius. carissimS mis6r, wretched: misers, misgruis, miserrime 16vis, light: 16vlter, levius, i^vissime — 54 — 228. simplest many ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 101 200 300 400 Numerals. Numeral Adjectives. Cardinal Numerals express number in its form, and answer the question quot? how I Uniis, una, unflm II du6, duae, du6 III tres, tria lY quattiior V quinque VI sex VII septum VIII octo IX n6v6m X decern XI undecim XII diiodecim XIII tredecim (d6cem et tres) XTV quattuordecim (decern et qnattiior) XV quind^cim (d6cem 6t quinque) XVI sedgcim (decern et sex) XVII septendecim (decern et septum) XVIII duodevlgintl (dec6m 6t octo) XIX undeviginti (decern 6t nov6m) XX vigintl XXI unus 6t vigintl or vTgintT fin us XXII duo et vigintl or vigintl duo XXIII tr6s et vigintl or vigintl tr6s XXX triginta XXXX or XL quadraginta L quinquaginta LX sexaginta LXX septuaginta LXXX octoginta LXXXX or XC nonaginta C centum CI centum et uniis or centum ilnus CC ducenti, -ae, -& ceo trgcenti, -ae, -S, CCCC quadringenti, -ae, -a — 55 500 D or 10 quingenti, ~ae, -& 600 DC or TOO sescenti, -ae, -S, 700 DCC or lOCC septingenti, -ae, -& 800 DCCC octingenti, -ae, -3. 900 DCCCC nongenti, -ae, -S. 1000 M or CIO mills 2000 MM or IIM duo mllia 5000 100 quinqug milia 6000 lOOM sex mllia 10 000 CCIOO decern milia 50 000 1000 quinquaginta milia 100 000 CCCIOOO centum milia 000 000 CCCCIOOOO decigs centena mllia [milia 229. The three first are declined; the rest, as far as one hun- dred, are indeclinable. Hundreds, as: ducenti, ae, a, trecenti, ae, S», etc., are declined like the plural of bonus. unus, una, unum, one Singular. Plural. m. /. n. m. /. n. N. u' nils tl' na tl' niim ii'ni u' nae fi'na G. GnT'iis uni'iis fi ni' us u no' rtim u na' ruin u no' rum D. u' ni u' ni u' ni u' nis u' nis G' nis A. V. A. u' niim H' nam u' niirn u' nos u' nas u'na a' no u'na u' n5 u' nis u'nis Q'nis The plural of Gnus occurs only with such nouns as have no sin- gular, as: una castra, one camp; unae nuptlae, one marriage. m, N. du'o G. du o' riiiu du o' bus du' OS, du'o duo, diiae, duo, two / du' ae du a' rQm du a' bus du' as n. dii'6 du o' rum du o' bus du'o tres, tria, three m. <&f. tres tri' um tri' bus tres n. tri' a tri' Om tri' bus tri' a du o' bus du a' bus du o' bQs tri 'bus tri' bus ambo, ambae, ambo, both, is declined like duo. 230, In the singular mille is an Indeclinable Adjective; in the plural it is a Substantive and takes the genitive, as: mille milites, a thousand soldiers; duo mllia mllitiim, two thousand soldiers. — 56 — 231. From 20 to 100, the compound numerals stand in the same order as the English, as: viginti unus, twenty-one^ or anus 6t vIgintL one and twenty. 232. From 100 on, units follow tens, tens hundreds, etc., as in English; 6t, andy is either omitted, or used only between the two highest denominations, as: centum 6t quinquaginta or centum quinquaginta, 150 centum et quinquaginta tres or centum quinquaginta trGs, 153. 233. sexcenti is used indefinitely for any large number, as one thousand in English. [79, ^o.] 234. Ordinal Numerals denote a series, and answer the question quotus ? which one in the series ? 1st, primus, -a, -um (pri6p,--as) 23d, tertius 6t vlc6simus 2d, secundus (altSr) 30th, tricesimus or triggsi- 3d, tertius mus 4th, quartus 40th, quadragesimus 5th, quintus 50th, quinquagesimiis 6th, sextiis 60th, sexagesimus 7th, Septimus 70th, septuagesimiis 8th, octavus 80th, octogesimus 9th, nonus 90th, nonagesimus 10th, dgcimiis 100th, centesimus 11th, undgcimus 101st, centesimus (6t) primus 12th, diiodgcimus 200th, ducentesimus 13th, tertius dgcimus 300th, trgcentSsimus 14th, quartus d6cimus 400th, quadringentesimus 15th, quintus d6cimus 500th, quingentesimiis 16th, sextus dgcimiis 600th, sescentesimiis 17th, Septimus dgcimus 700th, septingentesimus 18th, octavus dgcimus or diio- 800th, octingentesimus devlcesimus 900th, nongentesimus 19th, nonus decimus or unde- 1000th, millesTmus vicesimus 2000th, bis millSsimus 20th, vicesimus or vigesimus 3000th, t6r millesimiis 21st, unus 6t vicesimus or 10 000th, dgcles milleslmils vlcesimiis primus 100 000th, centies millesimus 22d, altSr 6t vicesimus or 1 000 000th, d6ci6s centies mill6- vicesimus secundus simus 5t — 235. All Ordinals are adjectives in tls, &, tim; except pri6r, prius, firsts which is used instead of primus in speaking of two\ alter is often used for secundus. In compounding Ordinals, observe the same practice as with Cardinals (see 231). 236. Ordinals with pars, part, expressed or understood, may be used to denote fractions, as: tertia pars, a third; quarta pars, a fourth; duae quintae, two fifths, ^g^^ ^^^j 237. Distributive Numerals answer the question quotem? how many at a time? and are declined like the plural of bonus. 1. singuli, -ae, -3-, one by one 2. bini, -ae, -3, two by two, etc. 3. tern! (trini) 4. quaterni 5. qulni 6. sen! 7. septeni 8. octoni 9. noveni 10. deni 11. undenT 12. duodeni 13. tenu dSnl 14. quaterni deni 15. quIni deni 16. sen! deni 22. vic6ui binI 23. vic6ni tern! 30. trlcenl 40. quadragSni 50. quinquaggni 60. sexageni 70. septuageni 80. octogeni 90. nonagem 100. centeni 200. diiceni 300. treceni 400. quadringgni 500. qulngeiii 600. sexcSnl 700. septinggnl 800. octingSnl 900. nongSni 1000. singula milia 2000. bina mIlia 3000. terna milia, etc. 17. septeni den! 18. octoni deni or duodSvIcgni 19. noveni deni or undSvicenl 20. viceni 21. viceni singuli 238. Distributives are used as follows: In the meaning of so many a piece or on each side, as: Scipio et Hannibal cum singulis interpretibus congressi sunt, Scipio and Hannibal met, with an interpreter on each side; In multiplication, as: bis bina, twice two; Instead of Cardinals, when a noun is plural in form, but singular in meaning, as: bina castra, two camps. But with these, uni, -ae, -3- is used instead of singuli, and trin! instead of term; as: tinae Utt0- rae, one letter; trinae littSrae, three letters. — 58 — 239. Multiplicative Numerals answer the question quotuplex? how many fold? They are adjectives in ex, icis. simplex, -icis, single quincuplex, fivefold duplex, twofold, double septemplex, sevenfold triplex, threefold, triple decemplex, tenfold i quadruplex, fourfold centuplex, a hundredfold 1 240. Proportional Numerals answer the question quotuplus? how many times as great? and are adjec- tives in us, ft, uni. Only a few are commonly used. simplus, -a, -flm, simple quadruplus, four times as great diiplus, twice as great septuplus, seven times as great tripliiSj three imes as great octuplus, eight times as great Numeral Adverbs. 241. Numeral Adverbs answer the question quoti- ens? how often? Being adverbs, they are indeclinable. 1. s6m61, once 21. semel St vicTes 2. bis, twice 22. bis et vicies 3. ter, thrice 23. t6r et vleies 4. quater, four times, etc. 30. tricles 5. quinquies 40. quadragies 6. sexies 50. quinquagies 7. septies 60. sexagies 8. octies 70. septuagies 9. n6vi5s 80. octOgles 10. dScles 90. nonagles 11. undecTSs 100. centles 12. duodScigs 200. ducentigs 13. terdecies (tr6dgci6s) 300. tr6eenti6s 14. quaterdecies (quattuordecles) 400. quadringentigs 15. quinquigsdecies (quindeci^s) 500. quingenties " 16. sexiesdecles 600. sescenties 17. septiesdgcies 700. septingenties 18. duodgvicies (octies dScigs) 800. octingentigs 19. undevlcles (novles dScles) 900. nongentles 20. vicieB 1000, mines — 59 - 2000. bis m!lT6s 100 000. centigs mili6s 3000. ter milies 1 000 000. milies miligs 10 000. dgcles mines 2 000 000. bis mllies milles 242. The Accusative and Ablative neuter of Ordinals are used as Adverbs of order, thus: primum, prirao, flrst^ at first; (secundum, s6cundo) commonly: itSriim, secondly; tertium, tertiO, thirdly. [81, 82,\ Pronouns. 243. Pronouns distinguish the Person speaking, or the First Person, from the Person spoken to, or the Second Person, and the object spoken of. Third Person. Accordingly, we have pronouns of the First, Second, and Third persons which are used either substantively or adjectively, or both substantively and adjectively. 244. Strictly speaking, the Pronouns of the First and Second Persons are the only Personal Pronouns, because they apply to Persons, and to these only. 245. The Personal Pronouns of the First Person are: Possessive. Singular. m6tis, mSft, mSum, my Substantive. Norn. 6'g6, / Gen. mh' T, of me Dat. mV hi, to me Ace. me, me Voc. — Abl. me, from me Norn. nos, we Gen. no' stram ^^ ^^ no' stri "^ Dat no' bis, to us Ace. nos, us Voc. — Abl. no' bis, from us Plural noster, nostra, nostrtlm, our 60 246. The Personal Pronouns of the Second Person are: Substantive. Nom. tQ, thou Gen. tii'i, of thee Dat. iV bi, to thee Ace. te, thee Voc. tu, thou Abl. t6, fi^om thee Nom. vos, ye or you Gen. ve' strum) . ve' strl ) -^ ^ Dat vO' bis, to you Ace. vos, you Voc. vos, ye or you Abl. vo' bis, /rom 2/0 w Singular. PossEssin. tutls, tiia, tuum, ^/ty, your Plural. vester, vestrft, vestrttm, your The Genitiyes nostrum, vestrtlm are used partitively in reference to number. 247. The Personal Pronouns of the Third Person (he, she, it, they J are wanting in Latin; they are re- presented by the Determinative is, ea, id, he, she, it. Substantive. Possessive. Singular. m. /. n. N. is 6' a id he, shey it G. 6' jus 6' jus 6' jus of him, etc. {supplied by the Gen.) D. g'l €'i e'i to, for him ejus, hiSf herSf A. 6' urn 6' am id him, her, it its A. 6'o g'a e'o from, by him Plural. N. 1' 1, 6' 1 6' ae 6' a they G. e o' rum 6 a' rum e o' rum of them eorum, 6ariim, D. i' IS, g' Is V Is, g' is 1' Is, 6' Is to, /or them ^Orum, ^/leir A. e' OS 6' as €' a ^/lem or ^/leir^ A. ris, 6' Is i'ls, 6' IS i'ls, 6' is from, by them Pronouns of the Third ferson, froni their signification, cannot have a Vocative. — 61 — 248. The Reflexive Pronoun of the Third Person is: Substantive. Possessive. Singular. Nom. Gen. su' 1, of him (self), her (self) ^ it (self J vw .w .^ Dat. sV bi, to him(self), her(self), it(self) '''t'w'sf y/fo"^.^' ' Ace. se, him(self), her(self), it(self) ^^^'^^' ^^^ ^^^ Abl. se, with him(self), her(self), it(self) Nom. Plural. Gen. SUM of them(selves) ^.^ sua,suttm, their Dat. si' bi, to them (selves) ' ' ' Ace. se, them (selves) Abl. se, w;i each one ^ any one \ you please, r any one J you like 266. They are all declined like the Interrogatives, except ali- quis, which has in the feminine singular and the neuter plural ali- qua. They take quid in the neuter when used substantively, and quod when used adjectively; quisquam, any one, is almost always a substantive, and used in negative sentences. 267. unusquisqug, unSquaeque, unumquidque, imumquodquS, each one, every one, each, is used only in the singular, and both unus and quisqu6 are declined: Gen. aniiiscujusqug, Dat. finicuTqug, and so on. 268. Akin to Indefinite Pronouns are Indefinite Adjectives: ulliis, -S», -um, any aliGs, -a, -ud, another nullGs, -5., -um, no alter, -a,-iini, the other (of two) nonnullus, -&, -Gni, some neuter, -ra, -rum, neither To ullus and null us the corresponding nouns are: nemO (-inis), nobody y and nihil (indeclinable), nothing. 269. Mark the following Pronominal Adjectives: Demonstrative, talis, -e, such tantus, -Sr, -tini, so great tot, so many Interrogative. qualTs, -e ? luhat? of what sort? quantfls, -&, -iiin ? how greats quot? how many? Relative, qualis, -e, such as quantQs, -S, -iim, as great quot, as many as Indefinite, aliquantiis, -a, -um, some, con- sidei^able aliquot, some Of these tot, quot, 'aliquot are indeclinable, the rest are declined like adjectives. They are called Correlatives, when used in pairs, so that one refers or answers to the other, as: talis, .qualis, such., as; like., like; tantus. .quantus, so great, .as; tot. .qu6t, so many, .as; 189, 90,] — 66 — Verbs. 270. The Essential Characteristic of a verb is that it ascribes some action, state, or quality to a subject. Verbs, like Nouns and Pronouns^ have their inflec- tion, or changes of form in order to express certain changes of meaning; this inflection is called their Conjugation. The forms of Conjugation are: Voices, genera; Tenses, temp6ra; Moods, mOdi; Numbers and Persons, numeri et personae. Voices. 271. Some verbs are usually followed by an object signifying that at which the action of the verb is directed. They are said to be Transitive Verbs and express an assertion in two forms, called the Active Voice and the Passive Voice. 272. The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds from the subject, as: canis pu6rum mordebat, the dog hit the hoy. The Passive denotes that the subject receives the action of the verb, as: puer niordebatur a cane, the hoy was hitten hy the dog. 273. Other verbs, again, express an action which is limited to the subject, as: puer currit, the hoy runs. They are called In- transitive Verbs, and from their nature cannot be regularly used in the Passive Voice. 274. Transitive verbs may be used without any expressed ob- ject ( absolutely ), as: puer scribit, the hoy lointes. 275. A Reflexive Verb is one that represents the action as exerted by the subject upon itself The Passive Toice often has a re- flexive meaning, as: occasio datur, the occasion offers^ presents itself . 276. The Active and Passive Voices in Latin are equivalent to the corresponding English forms. Many verbs are only used in the Passive form, but with an active or reflexive signification; they are called Deponents. — 6T — 277. Some verbs which form their Perfect like Deponents^ are called Semi-Deponents, as: audeo, -ere, to dare ausiis sum, / dared gaudeo, -ere, to rejoice gavisiis sum, / rejoiced soleo, -ere, to he wont solitus sum, / was wont fido, -ere, to trust fisiis sum, / trusted 278. Some Active Verbs have a Perfect Passive Participle with Active meaning, viz.: ceno, -are, to dine c6natus, having dined l)randeo, -ere, to breakfast pransus, having treakfasted poto, -are, to drink potus, having drunk jlro, -are, to swear jtiratus, having swoim 279. Again, a few Active verbs have a Passive meaning; thoy are sometimes called Neutral Passives, viz.: vapulare, to he flogged; v6nTr6 (venum Tre, to go to sale)^ to he sold. l^enses. 280. There are Six Tenses in Latin, viz.: Of Continued Action the Present, as: scribo, / am writing; the Imperfect, used chiefly for description or repeated action, as: scribebam, I ic as writing ; the Future, as: scribam, I shall write. Of Completed Action the Perfect, either definite or nistorical, as: scrips!, / have vritten (definite), or: Itvrote (historical); the Pluperfect, as: scripsSram, I had written; the Puture Perfect, as: scripsero, T shall have written. The Passive has the same tenses. (For Particulars see Syntax.) Moods. 281. The Moods are three, Indicative, Subjunctive, and Imperative. 282. The Indicative is used for direct assertions or interro- gations, corresponding, without any auxiliary, to the three forms of an English verb, viz.: the Simple, Progressive, and Emphatic, as: scribo, I write^ am writing^ do write. — 68 — 283, The Subjunctive represents the action of the verb as something merely entertained by the mind and dependent on other circumstances, as: amarem, / should love. 284, The Imperative is used to express a command^ wish, advice, or exhortation, as: este diligentes, pueri, he diligent, boys! 285, These three moods wliich are limited by person, number, and time are called the Finite Verb. Verbal Nouns and Adjectives. 286, Outside of the Finite Verb, and partaking of the nature of nouns, are certain Verbal Forms which are so important that they are always given with the inflectional forms, as part of the conjugation of the verb. 287, The Infinitive is not limited to a particular number or person, as the ordinary verbal forms, but is really a Verbal Noun, as: amare, to love. 288, The Gerund is a verbal noun of the Second Declension, used only in the singular, and wanting the nominative and vocative; it corresponds to the English Participial Infinitive in ing^ as: amandi, of loving. 289, The Gerundive difiers from the Gerund only in having adjective terminations in lis, a, fiiii, thus: Gerund, amandi, of lov- ing; Gerundive, amandiis, -S;, -uiii, to be loved, deserving to be loved. 290, The Participle gives, like the English Participle, the meaning of the verb in the form of an Adjective. 291, A Latin verb may have four Participles: two in the Active, the Present and the Future — amans, loving; amatiirus, about to love; and two in the Passive, the Perfect, amatus, loved, and the Future, commonly called Gerundive; amandus, deserving to be loved. 292, The Supine is a verbal noun of the Fourth Declension, having only the accusative and ablative singular, as; amatQin, amatu, to love. — 69 — Numbers and Persons. 293. There are two Numbers, Singular and Plural, and three Persons: First, Second, and Third, 294, The Personal Endings for each of the three persons, both singular and plural, active and passive, are as follows: Peeson. Active. Passive. Sing. 1. / -5, -m am-o -r amo-r 2. thou, you -s ama-s -ris ama-ris 3. he, she, it -t ama-t -tur ama-tiir Plur. 1. we -mus ama-mus -mur ama-niiir 2. you -tis ama-tis ^mini ama-miiii 3. they -nt ama-nt -ntur ama-ntur The Imperative has the following terminations: Sing. 2. ama -rS ama-re ^' 3. -to ama-to -tor ama-tor Plur. 2. -te, -tote ?>ma-te -mini ama-mini " 3. -nto ama-nto -nt6r ama-ntor The Perfect Indicative (active) has the special terminations: Sing. 2. -sti amavi-sti Plur. 2. -stis amavi-stis ^' 3. -erunt amav-erunt The Four Conjugations. 295. Verbs are inflected in four regular Conjuga- tions, distinguished by the ending of the Present In- finitive Active, viz.: I. First Conjugation -are; stem ending in a; II. Second Conjugation -ere; " " in e; III. Third Conjugation -ere; '* ^' in a consonant or fi; ly. Fourth. Conjugation -ire; ^^ '' in i. 296. Besides the Present Infinitive we need to know the Present Indicative Active, First Person, the Perfect Indicative Active, First Person, the Former Supine, in order to understand the whole inflection of any verb. Hence these four are called the Principal Parts — TO — or Stem-forms, and in describing any verb these are given. Their regular forms are seen in the following: Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Supine. I. amo amarg, to love amavi amatiiin II. moneS monerg, to advise moniil monitum III. 16go legere, to read legi lectum IV. audio audire, to hear audivi auditiim 297. The Principal Parts being known, the rest of the conjugation is found by the following rules. Simple Forms of the Verb. 298. From the Present Indicative are formed: the Present Subjunctive by changing I. II. III. lY. -o into -em -earn -am -lam am-o mon-eo leg-o aud-io the Imperfect Lidicative by changing I. II. III. lY. -eo -o -15 into -abam -ebam -ebSm -lebam am-o mon-eo leg-o aud-io the Future Indicative by changing I. II. III. lY. ~o -eo -o ~io into -abo -eb3 -am -iS,m am-o mon-eo leg-o aud-io the Present Participle by changing I. 11. III. lY. -o into -ans -eo ' ' -ens -o ' ' -ens -io * ' -iens am-o mon-eo leg-o aud-io am-em mon-eam leg-Sm aud-iSm am-abSm mon-ebam 16g-ebS,m aud-ieb^m am-abo mon-ebo 16g-am aud-Iam am-ans mon-ens leg-ens aud-iens the Gerundive (and the Gerund) by changing I. n. III. lY. -o mto -go '' -o '' -io '' -andus -endiis -endus -iendus am-o mon-eo leg-o aud-i5 am-andQs mon-endQs Igg-endQs aud-iendtis — 71 — 299, From the Present Infinitive are formed: the Imperfect Subjunctive Active by adding m: I. amare, amarS-m III. 16g6r6, 16gere-m II. moiiere, moiiere-m lY. audirS, audire-m the Imperfect Subjunctive Passive by adding r: I. amare, amar6-r III. Ieg6r6, leger6-r II. monere, m5n6re-r IV. audlrg, audire-r the Present Imperative Active by dropping r6: I. ama-re, ama III. Igg6-re, lege II. mone-re, mon6 IV. audl-re, audi the Present Imperative Passive identically: I. amarg II. mongrg III. 16g6re TV. audlrg the Present Infinitive Passive by changing I. 5 into i amar-6 amar-i II. S ^* 1 moner-S moner-i III. 6rg ** i leg-erS l^g-i lY. 5 *' i audIr-6 audlr-i 300. From the Perfect Indicative are formed: the Pluperfect Indicative by changing i into firam: I. amav-i, amav-eram III. I6g-i, l6g-eram II. monu-i, m6iiu-er5/in lY. audiv-T, audlv-er5;in the Future Perfect by changing i into 6ro: I. amav-i, araav-ero III. ISg-i, l6g-6ro II. monu-i, monu-ero lY. audlv-i, audiv-ero the Perfect Subjunctive by changing i into erim: I. amav-i, amav-erim III. ISg-i, leg- grim n. monu-i, monu-erim lY. audiv-i, audiv-erim the Pluperfect Subjunctive by changing i into iss6m: I. amav-i, amav-issem III. I6g-i, I5g-iss6m II. monu-i, monu-issem lY. audiv-i, audlv-issem the Perfect Infinitive by changing i into iss6: I. amav-i, amav-iss6 III. I5g-i, leg-issS II. monu-i, m6nu-iss6 lY. audiv-i, audiv-issS — 72 — SOio From the Supine are formed: the Perfect Participle by changing una into us: 1. amat-iim, amat-us III. lect-Qm, lect-iis II. monit-um, monit-iis IV. audlt-um, audit-iis the Future Participle by changing um into urus: I amat-um, amat-uriis III. lect-uni, lect-urus II. monit-iiin, monit-urus IV audit-iim, audlt-uriis 302. Of the active tenses of continued action, viz.: Present, Imperfect, and Future, those ending in 6 be- come passive by changing o into or; those ending in m, by changing m into r, as: I. am-o, am-5r III. 16g-o, 16g-5r ame-m, ame-r lega-m, lega^r II. mone-o, m6n6-5r IV. audi-o, audi-or monea-m, monea-r audia-iu, audia-r To Teacheks. As the theory of conjugation is beset, to the beginner, by some special diflficulties, it seems best that the Paradigms themselves should be made very familiar, before the systematic study of the foregoing rulis is taken up. At this stage, AHN-HENITS J'ara dig^m Charts ex- hibiting the Essentials of Latin Conjugation, will greatly help in mastering one of the numerous difficulties of the language. Compound Forms. 303. All the rest are compound forms, made by the aid of the Auxiliaoy verb esse, to he: Pres. Ind. Pres. M. Perfect. Supine. sum ess6, to he fuT — Indicative. Present Perfect. sum, / am fu' T, I have been (was) Ss, thou art fii i' sti, thou hast been est, 7ie, she^ it is fu' it, he has been su' mus, we are fu' i mus, we have been e' stis, you are fu i' stis, you have oeen sunt, they are fu 6' runt, they have been — n — Imperfect. 6' ram, / was 6' ras, nwu wast 6' rat, he was 6 ra' mus, we were e ra' tis, you were 6' rant, they were ro, Future. / shall he ris, thou wilt he e' 6' 6' rit, he will he 6' ri mus, we shall he 6' ri tIs, you will he g' runt, they will he Indicative. Pluperfect, fu' 6 ram, / had heen fu' 6 ras, thou hadst heen fu' e rat, he had heen fu 6 ra' mus, we had heen fu e ra' tis, you had been fu' e rant, they had heen Future Perfect. fu' g r6, / shall have heen fu' 6 ris, thou wilt have heen fu' 6 rit, /le wiZ? /iai;e heen fu e ri mus, we shall have heen fu 6 ri tis, 2/02^ tt^iZZ have heen fu' e rint, they will have heen Subjunctive. Sim, Present. may I he* Perfect. sis, he thoUj or may you he sit, let him he (may he he) si' mus, let us he si' tis, he ye^ or may ye he fu' 6 rim, / may have heen fu' e ris, thou may est have been fu' e rit, he may have heen fil e ri mus, we may have heen f u e ri tis, you may have been sint, let them he (may they he) fu' e rint, they may have heen Imperfect. es' s6m, / should he (were) es' sSs, thou ivouldst be es' set, he would he es s6' mus, we should he es s6' tis, you would he es' sent, they would be Pluperfect, fu is' sem, / should have been fu is' ses, thou wouldst have been fu is' set, he would have heen fu is se' mus, we should have heen fu is s6' tis, you would have been fu is' sent, they would have been Future. Sim, / may be about to be sis, thou mayest he about to be sit, he may he about to be si' mus, we may be about to be si' tis, you may be about to be sint, they may he about to he •* The rendering of the Subjunctive here given shows the most fre- quent meanings of its forms when used independently. fu tu' riis, -a, -um - fu til' ri, -ae, -a — u Present. Future. Present. Perfect. Future. Imperative. Singular. Plural. 6s, be thou e' ste, be ye e' sto, thou Shalt be e sto' t6, ye shall be e' sto, he shall be sun' to, they shall be Infinitive. es' se, to be fu is' se, to have been fu tu' mm, -am, -iim es'se, or fo'rS, to be about to be Future Participle, fu tu' riis, -a, -iimi, about to be 304. The Future Perfect is wanting in the Subjunctive which is represented, when necessary, by the Subjunctive of the Perfect or Pluperfect, according to the connection of the sentence. 805, The verb esse has no Gerund but the Future. or Supine, and no Participle 306. Compounds of esse. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. absum abesse, to be absent^ be away afui — adsum adesse, to be present adfuT dSsum deesse, to be wanting defiii in sum iness6, to be in infuT intersum interesse, to be betw 'een interfui — obsum obesse, to be in the way obfui praesum praeesse, to be over praeful — prosum prodessg, to be useful proful subsum subessg, to be undent r wanting supersum superesse, to remain over superfui 307. All these Compounds are conjugated like sum; but prosum nserts a d when pro would be followed by e. thus: Present. Imperf. Indie. Imperf. Subj. Future. prosum proderam prodessem proderO prodgs prodgras prodesses proderis prodest proderat prodesset proderit prosumus prodgramus prodessemus proderlmus prodestis proderatis prodessetis prOderiljs prosunt proderant prodessent proderunt Imperative. Infinitive. prod^s prodeste prodesse prOdestO prodestotg — 75 — 308. Neither sura nor any of its compounds has a present participle, except: praesens, -tis, present; absens, -tis, absent; ess6 is also compounded with potis, pdte, able, in the verb poss6. For its inflection see 401. [iis. lie,] 309. The Perfect, Pluperfect and Future Perfect, and also the Perfect Infinitive in the Passive Voice are compound forms, made up of the Perfect Participle and the verb esse as an auxiliary, as: Perf. a ma' tus, -a, -um sum, / have been or was loved Perf. Inf. a ma' tus, -a, -um es's6, to have been loved Pluperf. a ma' tus, -S, -flm eram, / had been loved Put. Perf. a ma' tus, -3., -um 6rO, / shall have been loved Put. Inf. a ma' ttis, -&, -um f6r6, to be about to be loved 310. In the compound tenses of the Passive, the Participle is treated as an adjective, agreeing in gender and number with the subject of the verb, as: bellum paratum est, war has been prepared. Periphrastic Conjugation. 811. The Periphrastic Conjugation is formed by combining the tenses of esse with the Future Parti- ciple (Active), and with the Gerundive (Passive). 312. Active Periphrastic Conjugation. Indicative. Present, amaturus, -S, -dm sum, / am about to love Imperf. amaturus, -S,, -um eram, / was about to love Future. amaturus, -a, -iim ero, / shall be about to love Perfect. amaturfls, -a, -um ful, / have been, or was about to love Pluperf. amaturiis, -S,, -um fueram, / had been about to love Fut. Perf. amaturus, -&, -iim fuero, / shall have been about to love Subjunctive. Present, amaturus, -&, -um sim, / may be about to love Imperf. amaturiis, -3», -iim ess6m, / should be about to love Future. (wanting) Perfect. amaturfis, -S., -iim fugrim, I may have been about to love Pluperf. amaturiis, -a, -um fuissSm, / should have been about to Fut. Perf. (wanting) [love — re- present, araatiirus, -a, Perfect. amaturus, -3., 313. Present. Imperf. Future. Perfect. Pluperf. Passive amandus, -S., - amandiis, -a, - amaiidfis, -a, • amandus, -&, - amandus, -a. Put. Perf. amandtts, -3, Present. Imperf. Future. Perfect. Pluperf. Fut. Perf. Present. Perfect. amandus, -&, amandus, -5,, (wanting) amandGs, -S., amandus, -a, (wanting) Infinitivb. -tim ess6, ^o he about to love -um fuissS, to have been about to love Periphrastic Conjugation. Indicative. -um sum, / have to he loved -um gram, / had to he loved -um ero, / shall have to he loved -um fill, / (have) had to he loved -iim fiigram, / had had to he loved -um fiierO, / shall have had to he loved Subjunctive. -um Sim, / may have to he loved -um ossem, / should have to he loved, -iim filerim, / may have had to he loved -um f liissem, / should have had to he loved amandus, -a, amandQs, -&, -tim fiiisse. Infinitive. iim esse, to have to he loved to have had to he loved 314, Impersonal Periphrastic Conjugation. The Neuter of the Gerundive with est, erat, etc., is used imper- sonally, if what is said holds good of people in general, as: vlven- dum est, we or you must live; moriendiim est, we or you must die. But the person hy whom may also be added in the dative, thus: mihi seribendum est, J must or should write tibi seribendum est, thou must or shouldst write el seribendum est, he must or should write nobis seribendum est, tve must or should write vobis seribendum est, you must or should write els seribendum est, they must or should write [171, 172.] 315, The Future Infinitive Passive is a compound form made up (jf the Supine and iri (lit. to he gone), which is the Infinitive Passiim of the verb ire, to go. I. amatum Tri III. lectum iri II. monitum iri IV. audltum Iri — TY — 316. First Conjugation. Pres. Ind. & Prcs. Inf. amo, -arS, to love Indicative. — Active Voice. Perfect. Supine, araavi amatum Subjunctive. a' mo, / love a' mas, thou lovest a' mat, he loves a ma' mils, we love a ma' tis, you love a' mant, they love Present. a' mem, may I love a' mes, love thou a' met, let Jiim love a me' mus, let us love a me' tis, love ye a' ment, let them love a ma' bam, I ivas loving a ma' bas, tJwu wast loving a ma' bat, he was loving a ma ba' mus, we were loving a ma ba' tis, you were loving a ma' baut, they were loving Imperfect. a ma' rem, I should love a ma' res, tltou wouldst love a ma' ret, he would love a ma re' miis, we should love a ma re' tis, you would lore a ma' rent, they would love a ma' bo, I shall lore a ma' bis, thou wilt love a ma' bit, he will love a ma' bi mus, we shall lore a ma' bi tis, you will lore a ma' bunt, they will love a ma' vi, / have loved a ma vi' sti, thou hast loved a ma' vit, he has loved a ma' vi mus, we hare loved a ma vi' stis, you have loved a ma ve' runt, they hare loved Future. a ma tii' riis, -a, -tim a ma tu' ri, -ae, -a Sim \ SIS sit f he about si' mus 1 [ to love si' tis git } Perfect. a ma' vS rim, I may have loved a ma' ve ris, tJiou mayest have l. a ma' ve rit, he may have loved a ma ve ri mils, we may have L a ma ve ri tis, you may hare I a ma' v6 rint, they may have I. Pluperfect, a ma' vS ram, / had lored a ma vis' sem, / should have I. a ma' ve ras, thou hadst loved a ma vis' ses, thou wouldst h. L a ma' ve rat, he had loved a ma vis' sgt, he would have I. a ma ve ra' mils, we had loved a ma vis se' mils, we should h. I. a ma ve ra' tis, you had loved a ma vis se' tis, you would h, I, a ma' ve rant, they had loved a ma vis' sent, they would h. L — 78 — Indicative. Subjunctive. Future Perfect. a ma' v6 ro, / slmll have loved (wanting) a ma' ve ris, thou wilt have loved a ma' ve rit, he will have loved a ma ve ri mus, we shall have loved a ma ve ri tis, you will have loved a ma' ve rint, they will have loved Imperative. Singular. Plural. Present, a' ma, love thou a ma' te, love ye Future, a ma' to, thou shalt love a ma to' te, ye shall love a ma' to, he shall love a man' to, they shall love Present. Perfect. Fut. Sing. u Plur. Present. Future. Infinitive, a ma' re, to love a ma vis' sS, to have loved Norn, a ma tu' riis, -a, -um es' se Ace. a ma tu' riiin, -am, -um es' se Norn, a ma tu' ri, -ae, -a es'se Ace. a ma tu' ros, -as, -a es' se -ff) be about to love Participles. a' mans, a man' tis, loving a ma tti' rtis, a ma tu' ra, a ma tii' rum, about to love Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. 317. Gerund. a man' di, of loving a man' d.5, for loving a man' duni, loving a man' do, by loving Supine, F'irst Conjugation Indicative. a ma' tum ) a ma' tu ) to love [117—130,] Passive Voice. a mor, / am loved a ma' ris, thou art loved a ma' tur, he is loved a ma' mur, we are loved a ma' mi ni, you are loved a man' tur, they are loved SURTUNCTIVE. Present. a' mer, may I be loved a me' ris, be thou loved a me' tur, let him. be loved a me' mur, let us be loved a me' mi ni, be ye loved a men' tur, let them be loved 79 — Indicative. Subjttnctive. Imperfect, a ma' bar, / ivas loved a ma' r§r, / should he loved a ma ba' ris, thou wast loved a ma re' ris, thou wouldst be L a ma ba' tur, he was loved a ma re' tiir, he would be loved a ma ba' niiir, we were loved a ma re' iiiiir, we should be loved a ma ba' mi ni, you ivere loved, a ma re' mi ni, you would be I. a ma ban' tur, they were loved a ma ren' tur, they would be I Future, a ma' bor, I shall be loved (wanting) a ma' be ris, thou wilt be loved. a ma' bi tur, he will be loved a ma' bi mur, we shall be loved a ma bi' mi ni, you will be loved. a ma bun' tur, they will be loved Perfect. / have been or was loved I may have been loved i sum ( Sim a ma' ttls, -&, -um -< Ss a ma' tus, -a, -Qm -J sis ( est ( sit C sii' mils ( si' mus a ma' ti, -ae, -S. -| e' stis a ma' ti, -ae, -a } si' tis ( sunt ( sint Pluperfect. / had been loved I might have been loved i e' ram ( es' sSm a ma' tus, -a, -Um -^ e' ras a ma' tus, -a, -urn -J es' ses ( 6' rat ( es' s6t i 6 ra' mus r es s6' mus a ma' ti, -ae, -a ■< e ra' tis a ma' ti, -ae, -S, -J es s6' tis (6' rant fes'sent / shall have been loved re'rO a ma' tus, -a, -um -] e' ris f e' rit Future Perfect. (wanting) a ma' ti, -ae, -a (6'ri •] 6' ri (6'ru mus tis runt — 80 — Imperative. Singular. Plural. Pres. a ma' re, be thou loved a ina' mi ni, be ye loved Fut. a ma' tor, thou shalt be loved a ma' tor, he shall be loved a man' tor, they shall be loved to have been loved Infinitive. Present. a ma' ri, to be loved Perfect Sing. Nom. a ma' tus, -a, -um es' s6 '^ Ace. a ma' turn, -3.iii, -um es' se Plur, Nom. a ma' ti, ~ae, -a es' se ^^ Ace. a ma' tos, -as, -3; es' se Future. a ma' tiim i' ri, to be about to be loved Participles. Perfect. a ma' tiis, a ma' ta, a ma' tiim, lovedj beloved, or having been loved Gerundive, a man' dus, a man' dS, a man' dum, to be lovedj deserving to be loved Examples agito, -are, to agitate educo, -are, to bring up 6vito, -are, to avoid^ shun administro, -are, to govern turbo, -are, to trouble conservo,-are, to preserve multo, -are, to punish for Practice: spero, -are, to hope for occo, -are, to hai^row comparo, -are, to compare cavo, -lire, to (make) hollow lacero, -are, to tear into pieces expugiio, -are, to capture vasto, -are, to lay waste 121. 122,] 318. Second Conjugation. — Active Voice. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. moneo, -ere, to advise Indicative. mo' n€ o, I advise mo' nes, thou advisest mtV net, he advises mo ne' miis, we advise mo ne' tis, you admse mo' nent, they advise Perfect, monui Supine. monitQm Subjunctive. Present. mo' ne am, may I advise mo' ne as, admse thou mo' ne at, let him advise mo ne a' miis, let us advise mo ne a' tis, advise ye mo' ne ant, let them advise he about -^ 81 — Indicative. Subjttncjtive. Imperfect. mone'bam, I was advising mo ne' r6m, I should advise mo ne' bas, thou wast advising mo ne' res, thou wouldst advise mo lie' bat, he was advising mo ne' ret, he would advise mo lie ba' iiius, we tvere advis^g mo ne re' miis, we should admse mo lie ba' tis, you ivere advis'g mo ne re' tis, you would advise mo lie' baut, they were advis'g mo ne' rent, tliey would advise Future, mo ne' bo, I shall advise . .... _^^ ( sim mo ne' bis, thou wilt advise ^ ^ ' -< sis mo ne' bit, he will advise ~ ' ~ (sit mo ne' bi miis, rve shall advise - - ^^, ^ ( si' mus ^ to advise mo ne' bi tis, you will advise ^ x ' i si' tis \ mo ne' bunt, they will advise ' ( siut / Perfect. mo' nil i, / (have) advised mo nil' e rim, / may have adv^d mo nil i' sti, thou hast advised m() nil' e ris, thou may est have a. mo' nil it, he has advised mo nu' e rit, he may have adv^d mo nil' i miis, ive have advised mo nii e ri mus, we may have a. mo nii i' stis, you have advised mo nii e ri tis, you may have a. mo nu e' runt,^/ie^ have advised mo nii' e rint, they may have a. Pluperfect. mo nii' e ram, / had advised mo nu is' sem, / should have a. m(5 nu' e ras, thou hadst advised mo nii is' ses, thou wouldst h. a, mo nii' e rat, he had advised mo nii is' set, he would have a. mo nii e ra' miis, we had adv'd mo nii is se' miis, we should h. a, mo nii e ra' tis, you had adv^d mo nu is se' tis, you would h. a, mo nil' e rant, they had advised mo nii is' sent, they would h. a. Future Perfect. mo nu' e ro, I shall have advised (wanting) 1110 nii' e ris, thou wilt have adv^d : ni5 nii' e rit, he will liaise advised mo nii e ri miis, we shall have a. . mo nii e ri tis, you will have a. mo nil' e rint, they will have a. 82 — Imperative. Singular. Plural. Pres. mo'ne, advise thou mo nS' t€, advise ye Put. mo ne' to, thou shalt advise mo ne to' tS, ye shall advise mo ne' to, he shall advise mo nen' to, they shall advise Infinititk. Pres. rao ne' rS, to advise Perf. mo nu is' se, to have advised Put. Sing. Norn, mo ni tu' rfls, -S., -Qm es' se '< Ace. mo ni tn ' rttm, -am, -um es' Plur. Norn, mo ni tu' ri, -ae, -3. es' s6 s6 to be about to advise Ace. mo ni til' ros, -as, -^ es' s6 Participles. Pres. mo' nens, mo nen' tis, advising Put. mo ni tu' riis, mo ni tu' ra, mo ni tu' rum, about to advise Gerund. Gen. mo nen' di, of advising Dat. mo nen' do, for advising Ace. mo nen' dtim, advising Abl. mo nen' do, by advising 319. Second Conjugation. Supine. mo' ni turn / mo' ni tu ) to advise [12S. 1:^6 ] Passive Voice. Indicative. mo' ne 6r, I am advised mo ne' ris, thou art advised mo ne' tur, he is advised mo ne' mur, we are advised mo ne' mi ni, you are advised mo nen' tur, they are advised Subjunctive. Present. mo' nS ar, may I be advised mo ne a' ris, be thou advised mo ne a' tur, let him be advised mo ne a' mur, let us be advised mo ne a' mi ni, be ye advised mo ne an' tur, let them be adv^d Imperfect, mo ne' bar, I teas advised mo ne' rer, I should be advised mo ne ba' ris, thou wast advised mo ne re' ris, thou tvouldst 6. a. mo ne ba' tur, he was advised mo ne re' tur, he would b. a. mo ne ba' mur, we were advised mo ne re' miir, we should b. a. mo ne ba' mi ni, you were adv^d mo ne re' mi ni, you loould b. a, m5 ne ban' ttir, they were adv'd mo ne ren' tur, they would b. a. 83 Indicative. Future. mo ne' bor, I shall he advised mo ne' be ris, thou wilt be adv^d mo ne' bi tiir, he will be advised mo ne' bi iniir, we shall be adv'd mo ne bi' mi ni, you ivill be adv^d mo ne bun' tiir, they will be a. SUBJUNCTR'E. (wanting) Perfect. / have been or was advised I may have been advised ( sum ( Sim mo' ni tus, -a, -um } es mo' ni tus, -&, -um ^ sis ( est ( sit su' mus ( si' mils mo' ni ti, ~ae, -3» -^ e' stis mo' ni ti, -ae, -S» -< si' tis sunt (sint Pluperfect. I had been advised mo' ni tus, -a, -iim mo' ni ti, -ae, -a li / should have been advised e' ram ( es' sSm e' ras mo' m tiSs, -a, - iim -< es' ses e' rat ( es' set e ra' mus ( es s6' mus e ra' tis mo' ni ti, -ae, -a -| es se' tis e' rant / es' sent Future Perfect. / shall have been advised re'ro mo' ni tvis, -a, -um -| e' ris ( e' rit ( e' ri mus m(5' ni ti, -ae, -a -^ e' ri tis f e' runt (wanting) Imperative. Singular. Plural Pres. mo ne' re, be thou advised mo ne' mi ni, be ye advised Fut. mo ne' tor, thou shalt be a. mo ne' t5r, he shall he adv. mo nen' tdr, they shall be adv* 84 — Infinitive. Pres. m6 ne' rl, to be advised Perf. Sing. Nom. mo' ni tus, -5., -ttm es' sg ^* Ace. mo' nitiim,-ain,-uin es'se Plur. Nom. mo' ni ti, -ae, -S. es' s6 ** Ace. mo' ni tos, -as, -Si es' s6 Fut. mo' ni turn i' ri, to he about to he advised ■ to have been advised Pabticiples. Perfect. mo' ni tus, mo' nl ta, mo' ni tiiin, advised Grerundive. mo nen' dtis, mo nen' d^, mo nen' diim, to advised, deserving to he advised Examples for Practice*. be habeo, -ere, to have, maintain adhibeo, -ere, to employ, apply pareo, -ere, to obey taceo, -ere, to be silent placeo, -ere, to please praebeo, -erS, to afford^ give debeo, -ere, to owe exerceo, -ere, to exercise noceo, -ere, to hurt, do harm terreo, -ere, to frighten val6o, -ere, to avail, he well coerceo, -ere, to restrain [127. 128,] 320. Third Conjugation. — Active Voice. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. 16go, -ere, to read Indicative. 16' go, / read le' gis, thou readest 16' git, he reads le' gi mus, we read le' gi tis, you read le' gunt, they read Perfect. I6gi Supine. lectum SUBJUNCTIVK Present. 16' gS;in, may I read 16' gas, read thou 16' gat, let him read 16 ga' iiitts, let us read 16 ga' tis, read ye 16' gant, let them read Imperfect. 16 ge' bam, I was reading 16' ge rem, I should read 16 ge' bas, thou wast reading 16' ge res, thou wouldst read 16 ge' bat, he was reading le' ge ret, he would read 16 ge ba' mfis, we were reading 16 ge re' mils, we should read 16 ge ba' tis, you were reading 16 ge re' tis, you ivould read 16 ge' baut, they were reading 16' ge rent, they would read 85 — Indicativb. le' gS^m, I shall read 16' ges, thou wilt read IS' get, he will read le ge' mils, we shall read le ge' tis, you will i^ead le' geiit, they will read le' gi, I (have) read 16 gi' sti, thou hast read IS' git, he has read le gi mils, we have read Is gi' stis, you have rend le ge' runt, ^/le^/ '^^^'^ ^'^«^ Future. Subjunctive. lee til' riis, -a, -um lee tu' ri, -ae, -a Sim SIS sit si' mils si' tis sint he about to read le' ge ram, / had i^ead Is' gS ras, ^/lot^ hadst read Is' gS rat, he had read is ge ra' miis, ive had read Is ge ra' tis, 7/oit had read IS' gS rant, they had read Perfect. «IS' ge rim, I may have read IS' ge ris, ^/lou may est have read Is' ge rit, he may have read Is ge ri miis, t(;6? ?7ia2/ have read Is ge ri tis, you may have read IS' ge rint, ^/ie^/ iwa?/ have read Pluperfect. le gis' sem I should have read le gis' seSjthou wouldst have read Is gis' set, he would have read is gis se' mus, we should have r. is gis se' tis, you would have r. le gis' sent, they would have read Future Perfect. le' ge ro, I shall have read le' ge ris, thou wilt have read Is' ge rit, he will have read Is ge ri mus, we shall have read Is ge ri tis, you will have read Is' gS rint, they will have read Imperative. Preso Sing, le' gS, read thou Plur. Put. '^ le' gi tn, thou Shalt read " " IS' gi to, /le shall read '' (wayiting) le' gi tS, reac? 2/^ le gi to' te, ye shall regd le gun' to, they shall read Infinitive. Pres. le' gg rg, ^o rm(? Perf, is gis' se, to have read Put. Sing. Norn, lee tu' rus, -a, -iim es'se '' Ace. lee tu' riim, -am, -Qm es'se Plur. Norn, lectu'ri, -ae, -5- es'se '^ Ace. lectu'ros, -as, -& es'se to be about to read 86 Pabticiples. Pres. le' gens, 16 gen' tis, reading Put. lee tu' riis, lee tu' rS,, lee tu' rum, Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. 321. Gerund. le gen' di, of reading 16 gen' do, for reading 16 gen' dum, reading 16 gen' do, by reading about to read Supine. lee' lee' turn) tu i to read [133. 134,] Third Conjugatidti. — Passive Voice. Indicative. 16' g5r, / am read 16' ge ris, thou art read le' gi tur, he is read 16' gi mur, we are read 16 gi' mi ni, you are read 16 gun' tur, they are read Present. 16' £ Subjunctive. 16 ge' bar, I was read 16 ge ba' ris, thou wast read 16 ge ba' tur, he was read 16 ge ba' mur, we were read 16 ge ba' mi ni, you were read 16 ge ban' tur, they were read !•, may I be read 16 ga' ris, be thou read 16 ga' tur, let him be read 16 ga' mur, let us be read 16 ga' mi ni, be ye read 16 gan' tur, let them be read Imperfect. le' ge rer, I should be read le ge re' ris, thou wouldst be read 16 ge re' tur, he would be read 16 ge re' mur, we should be read 16 ge re' mi ni^you would be read 16 ge ren' tur, they would be read. Future. 16' gar, I shall be read (wanting) 16 ge' ris, thou wilt be read 16 ge' tur, he will be read 16 ge' miir, ive shall be read 16 ge' mi ni, you will be read ]g gen' tur, they will be read Perfect. / was or have been read I may have been read ( Slim ( Sim lee' ttis, -a, -Qm -j es (est lee' ti, -ae, -a lee' tQs, -a, -um -^ sis sit su' mus f si 'ill us es'tis lee' ti, -ae, -a -| si' tis sunt ( sint — 8T Indicative. / had been read Subjunctive. Pluperfect. / should have been read i e' ram i es' s6m lee' tus, -a, -Gm -] e' ras lee' tiis, -a, -um } es' ses ( e' rat 1 es'set C e ra' miis ( es s6' mus lee' ti, -ae, -a -]era' tis lee' ti, -ae, -& -j es sg' tis (6' rant ( es' sent Future Perfect. / shall have been read rg'ro lee' ttis, -a, -tim -] e' ris (wanting) ( 6' rit ( 6' ri mils lee' ti, -ae, -a -| e' rl tis ( e' runt Imperative. Singular. Plural. Pres. 16' ge re, be thou read le gi' mi ni, be ye read Fut. le' gi tor, thou shall be read 16' gi t5r, he shall be read 16 gun' t6r, they shall be read Infinitive. Pres. IS'gi, to be read Perf. Sing. Nom. lee' tiis, -&, -um es' se *^ Ace. lec' tiim, -am, -um es'se Plur. Nom. lee' ti, -ae, -S es' se f ^^ ^^^'^ ^^''^^ ^'^^^^^ "' Ace. lee' tOs, -as, -a es' se Fut. lee' turn T' ri, to be about to'be read Participles. Perfect. lee' tfis, lee' ta, lee' tum, read Gerundive, le gen' dus, le gen' da, le gen' dum, to be read, de- serving to be read Examples for Practice: Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. emo, -erg, to buy gmi emptum serlbo, -ere, to write seripsi scriptum ago, -ere, to drive figi actum acuo, -Sre, to ivhet S.cui aefitiim [13S, 136,] — 88 — 322, Fourth Conjugation. — Active Voice. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. audio, -ire, to hear Indicative. au' (li o, / hear au' dis, thou hearest au' dit, he hearts au di' miis, we hear au di' tis, you hear au' di unt, they hear audivi auditum SUBJUNCTIYE. Present. au' di am, may I hear au' di as, hear thou au' di at, let him hear au di a' iiiiis, let us hear au di a' tis, hear ye au' di ant, let them hear Imperfect, au di e' bam, / was hearing au di' rem, / should hear au di e' bas, thou wast hearing au di' res, thou loouldst hear au di e' bat, he ivas hearing au di' ret, he would hear au di e ha' mus^ we were hearing au di re' miis, we should hear au di e ba' tis, you ivere hearing au di re' tis, you would hear au di e' bant, tlieytcere hearing au di' rent, they would hear Future. au' di am, I shall hear au' di es, thou wilt hear . au' di et, he will hear au di e' mus, we shall hear au di e' tis, you will hear au' di ent, they will hear au di' vi, / (have) heard au di vi' sti, thou hast heard au di' vit, he has heard au di' vi mus, we have heard au di vi' stis, you have heard au di ve' runt, they have heard au ditu' riis, -a, -iim au di tu' ri, -ae, a Sim sis sit si' mus si' tis sint he about to hear Perfect. au di' ve rim, I may have heard au di' ve ris, thou may est have h. au di' ve rit, he may have heard au di ve ri mus, we may have h. au di ve ri tis, you may have h. au di' ve rint, they may have h. au di' ve ram, / had heard au di' ve ras, thou hadst heard au di' ve rat, he had heard au di ve ra' mus, ive had heard au di ve ra' tis, you had heard au di' ve rant, they had heard Pluperfect. au di vis' sgm, / should have h. au di vis' ses, thouwouldst h. //. au di vis' set, he would have h. au di vis se' mus, we shouldh. h, au di vis se' tis, you would h. h. au di vis' sent, they would h. h. — 89 Indicative. SuBJUNcmvE. Future Perfect, au di' ve ro, I shall have heard (wanting) au di' ve ris, thou wilt have heard au di' ve rit, he will have heard au di ve ri nius, we shall have h, au di ve ri tis, you will have h. au di' ve rint, they will have h. Impebative. Singular. Plural. Pres. au' di, hear thou au di' tS, hear ye Fut. au di' to, thou shatt hear au di to' te, ye shall hear au di' to, he shall hear au di un' to^ they shall hear Infinitive. Pres. au di' rg, to hear Perf. au di vis' s6, to have heard Fut. Sing. Norn, au dl tu' rus, -&, -um es' se '^ Ace. au dl tu' rum, -ani,-um es'se ' Plur. Nom. au di tu' ri, -ae, -a es' se '^ Ace. audlta'ros, -as, -& es'se ■ to be about to hear Present, au' di ens, Future, au di tu' rus, Participles. au di en' tis, hearing au di tu' ra, au di tu' riini, about to hear Gerund. Gen. au di en' di, of hearing Dat. au di en' do, for hearing Ace. au di en' dum, hearing Abl. au di en' do, by hearing 323. Fourth Conjugation. Indicative. Supine. au di' turn ) au di' tu f to hear [155. 150.] Passive Voice. Subjunctive. au' di or, /am heay^d au di' ris, thou art heai^d au di' tur, he is heard au di' niiir, we ai^e heai^d au di' mi ni, you are heard au di un' tur, they are heard Present. au' di ar, may I be heard au di a' ris, be thou heard au di a' tur, let him be heard au di a' miir, let us be heard au di a' mi ni, be ye heard au di an' tur, let them he heard — 90 — Indicative. Subjunctivb. Imperfect, au d5 e' l>3.r, I was heard an di' rer, / should be heard au di e ba' ris, thou wast heard au di re' ris, thou wouldst he h. au di e ba' tur, he was heard au di re' tur, he would he heard au di e ba' mur, we were heard au di re' mur, we should he h. au di e ba' mi ni, you ivere h. au di re' mi ni, you would he h. au di e ban' tur, they were h. au di ren' tur, they would he h. Future, au' di ar, / shall he heard (wanting) au di e' ris, thou wilt he heard au di e' tur, he will he heard au di e' mur, tve shall he heai^d au di e' mi ni, you will he heard au di en' tur, they will he heard Perfect, / was or have heen heard i sum au dV ttis, -a, -um 4 es (est ( su' mus au dl' ti, -ae, -a 4e' stis (sunt / may have heen heard ( si] 11 an di' tils, -&, -um } sis (sit ( si' mus au di' ti, -ae, -a -| sT' tis ( sint Pluperfect. I had been heard I should have heen heard ^6' ram r es' sem au di' tiis, -a, -Gm | e' ras au di' tiis, -a, -um -| es' ses (6' rat (es'set 6ra' mus ress6' mus au di' ti, -ae, -3. -^ 6 ra' tis au di' ti, -ae, -a -] es s6' tis ^' rant / es' sent / shatl have heen heard e' ro au di' tus, -a, -um -^ e' ris 6' rit Future Perfect, (wanting) au di' ti, -ae, -& ^ S' ri mus J 6' ri tis ( e' runt — 91 -. Impebative. Singular. Plural. Pres. au di' re, be thou heard au di' mi ni, he ye heard Put. au di' tor, thou shalt be h. au di' tor, he shall be heard au di un' tor, they shall be heard Infinitive. Pres. au di' ri, to be heard Perf. Sing. Nom. au di' tiis, -a, -fim es' se ^ " Ace. au dr tarn, -am, -iiin es' sP ( ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^,.^ Plur. Nom. au di' ti, -ae, -& es's6 | " Ace. au dr tos, -as, -a es'se J Put. au dr tiiin i' ri, to be about to be heard Pabticiples. Perfect, au di' tQs, au di' ta, au di' tiim, heard Gerundive, au di en' dQs, au di en' da, au di en'dfim, to he heard, deserving to be heard Examples for Practice: dormio, -irg, to sleep vestio, -irg, to clothe custodio, -ir6, to guard l6nio, -irS, to appease erudio, -irS, to instruct nutrio, -ire, to nourish impedio, -ire, to hinder puniS, -ir§, to punish condio, -irS, to season finio, -ir€, to finish [157. 158.] Deponent Verbs. 324, Deponent Verbs have the form of the PassiAC Yoice with an active signification, as: hortor, hortatus sum, hortari, to exhort, the Perfect hortatus sum representing at the same time the Supine liortatuiii. 325, Deponent Verbs have Pour Participles: the Present Participle, as: hortans, exhorting tlie Perfect Participle, as: hortatus, having exhorted the Put. Part. Act., as: hortaturus, being about to exhort the Put. Part. Pass., as: hortandiis, to be exhorted. 326, The Future Infinitive is always to be given in the active form, thus: hortaturus ess6, to be about to exhoi-t (not hortatum Tri). — 92 — 327. Deponent of the First Conjugation. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. hortor, -ari, to exhort Perfect. hortatiis sum Indicative. / exhort hor' tor hor ta' ris hor ta' tur hor ta' miir hor ta' mi ni hor tan' tur Present. Subjunctive. / may exhort hor' ter hor te' ris hor te' tiir hor te' miir hor te' mi ni hor ten' tur I was exhorting hor ta' b^r hor ta ba' ris hor ta ba' tur hor ta ba' mtir hor ta ba' mi ni hor ta ban' tur Imperfect. / should exhort hor ta' rer hor ta re' ris hor ta re' tur hor ta re' mur lior ta re' mi ni hor ta ren' tur / shall exhort lior ta' bor hor ta' be ris hor ta' bi tur hor ta' bi miir lior ta bi' mi ni hor ta bun' tur Future. / may he about to exhort i Sim hor ta ta' rus, -S, -um } sis (sit \ si' miis hor ta tu' ri, -ae, -H } si' tis / sint Perfect. / (have) exhorted i sum hor ta' tGs, -a, -um •< es (est / may have exhorted i Sim hor ta' tus, -a, -um < sis (sit hor ta' ti, -ae, -a C su' mus C si' miis -j e' stis hor ta' ti, -ae, -a } si' tis ( sunt ( sint — 93 — Indicative. Subjunctive. Pluperfect. / had exhorted / should have exhorted ( e'ram ( es' sem hor ta' tus, -a, -ilm \ e' ras hor ta' tus, -a, -iim } es' s6s (e'rat ( es' set 6 ra' miis ^ es s6' mus hor ta' ti, -ae, -a -< e ra' tis horta'ti, -ae, -^ -J esse' tis ( e' rant ( es' sent FutuTt Perfect. / shall have exhorted i e' ro hor ta' tQs, -a, -iim -] e' ris (wanting) ( 6' rit i' 6' ri mus lior ta' ti, -ae, -a \ g' n tis f e' runt Impeeative. Singular. l*lural. Pres. hor ta' rg, exhort thou hor ta' iiii ni, exhort ye Fut. hor ta' tor, thou shalt exhort hor ta' tor, he shall exhort hor tan' tor, they shall exhort Infinitive. Pres. hor ta' ri, to exhort Perf. Sing. Nom. hor ta' tus, -a, -um es' se ^ ^' Ace. hor ta' tum, -am, -umi es' se [ , , r, . 7 TjT ., 1, x-.x- « r - r^^^ ^^^^6 exhorted Plur. Nom. hor ta' ti, -ae, -3, es' se ^' Ace. hor ta' tos, -as, -& es' se ) Put. Sing. Nom. hor ta tu'rus, -a, -ttm es' se 1 ** Ace. hortatu'riim, -am, -limes' se ( /o he about to Plur. Nom. hor ta tu'ri, -ae, -a es'se ( exhort ^^ Aec. hortatu'ros, -as, -H es'se j Participles. Present. hor' tans, hor tan' tis, exhorting Perfect. hor ta' tus, hor ta' ta, hor ta' tum, having exhorted Put. Aci hor ta tii' rus, hor ta tli' ra, hor ta tu' rum, about to exhort Gerundive, hor tan' dus, hor tan' da, hor tan' dum, to be exhorted 94 -' Geettnd. Supine. Gen. hor tan' di, of exhorting Dat. hor tan' do, for exhorting Ace. hor tan' dum, exhorting hor ta' tQm ' Abl. hor tan' do, by exhorting hor ta' tu ! Examples for Practice: to exhort pisc6r, -ari, to fish imit5r, -ari, to imitate rScordor, -ari, to r 677} ember proeliSr, -ari, to fight laetor, -ari, to rejoice (at) vendr, -ari, to hunt arbitror, -ari, to regard con5r, -ari, to try comitor, -ari, to accompany vagor, -ari, to roam mlror, -ari, to admire minor, -ari, to threaten [161, 162. 328. Deponent Pres. Ind. & Pres. vereor, -eri, to Indicative. I fear v6' rg or v6 re' ris ve re' tiir v6 re' mur v6 re' mi iii ve ren' tiir I was fearing ve r6' bar v6 re ba' ris v6 re ba' tur ve re ba' mfir v6 re ba' mi ni ve re ban' tur / shall fear v6 re' b6r v6 re' be ris v6 re' bi tur v6 re' bi mur v6 rS bi' mi ni v6 re bun' tur of the Second Conjugation, .Inf. fear Present. Imperfect. Future. Perfect. veritiis sum Subjunctive, / may fear ve' re ar ve re a' ris ve re a' tiir ve rS a' mfir vg re a' mi nl v6 re an' tiir I should fear v6 re' r6r ve re re' ris ve re re' ttir ve re re' miir ve re re' mi ni ve re ren' tur / may be about to fear n tu' rus, -a, -lim ve ri tu' ri, j -ac, a j SIS Sit si' mus si' tis slnt 95 — Indicative. Subjunctive. Perfect. / (have) feared / may have feared i sum i Sim 4 es ve' ri tus, -&, -Gm ■< sis ( est ( sit ve'ri tiis, -a, ilm I sii' mus I si' mus ^ e' stis v6' ri ti, -ae, -a -| si' tis v§' ri ti, -ae, -a ( sunt ( sint Pluperfect. / had feared / should have feared i e' ram C es' sem v6' ri tus, -a, -tim -< 6' ras v6' rt tGs, -a, -tiin -J es' ses ( 6' rat ( es' s6t ^ e ra' mus ( es s6' mus ve'riti, -ae, -& •] 6 ra' tis vg' ri ti, -ae, -a -| es s6' tis ( 6' rant ( es' sent Future Perfect. / s/ia?? ^ai;^ feared g'ro (wanting) ve' ri tGs, -a, -iim ' 6'ris ( e' rit i e' ri mus ^•^' ri ti, -ae, ~a -] e' ri tis ( e' runt Impeeative. Singular. Plural. Pres. ve re' re, fear thou ve re' mi ni, fear ye Fut. ve re' t6r, thou shalt fear v6 re' tor, he shall fear v^ ren' tor, they s-hall fear Infinitive. Pres. ve re' ri, to fear Perf. Sing. Nom. ve' ri tus, -a, -iim es' sg '^ Ace ve' ri turn, -am, -iim es' se Plur. Nom. ve' ri ti, -ae, -a es' se " Ace. ve' ri tos, -as, -a es' se Fut. Sing. Nom. vg ri tu' rus, -a, -um es' s6 ) *' Ace. ve ri tu' rfim, -am, -Qmi es'sO f Plur. Nom. v6 ri tu' ri, -ae, -a es' s6 T '' Ace. v6 ri tu' rSs, -as, -a es' s6 J 1o hare feared to be about to fear PARTICIPIiES. ve' reus, ve ren' tis, fearing ve' ri tQs, v6' ri t^-, ve' ri tuin^ having feared ve li tu' rus, v6 ri tii' r3., v6 ri tti' rum, about to fear Gerundive, ve ren' diis, v6 ren' da, ve ren' duin, to be feared Gerund. Supine. v6 ren' di, of fearing v6 ren' do, for fearing ve ren' dum, fearing ve' ri turn \ . ^ , ve ren' do, by fearing ve' ri tii ( Examples for Practice: liceor, -eri, to bid tuedr, -eri, to look to polliceor, -eri^ to promise intiieor, -eri, to look at mgrgor, -eri, to deserve revSredr, -eri, to respect [103. 104.] 329. Deponent of the Third Conjugation. Present. Perfect. Put. Act. Gen, Dat. Ace. Abl. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. sequor, -i, to follow Indicative. Present. se' quor, I folloiv s6' que ris s6' qui tur s6' qui mur se qui' mi m se quun' tur Imperfect. s6 que' bar, / ivas following se que ba' ris se que ba' tiir se que ba' mur se que ba' mi iii se que ban' tui* / shall follow se' quar se que' ris se que' tur se que' mtir s6 que' mi ni s6 quen'tur Future. Perfect. secuttis sum Subjunctive. se' quSr, / may follow se qua' ris se qua' tur se qua' mur se qua' mi ni s6 quan' tur se' querer, I should follow s6 que re' ris se que re' tur se que re' miir se que re' mi ni se que ren' tur / may be about to follow se cu til' rtis, -a, -um se cfi tu' ri, -ae, -a sim ■{ sis sit si' mus si' tis sint — • 97 Indicative. / (have) followed s6cu'ttls, -Slj -tlm s6 cu' ti, -ae, -a / Jiad followed sS ctl' tQs, ~&, -van s6 cd' ti, ~ae, -S, Subjunctive. Perfeoi. / may have followed ' sum r Sim gs sg cii' tiSs, -a, -iim ^ sis ' est ( sit su' mus } aV mus [ e' stis s6 cu' ti, -ae, -& ^ sr tis . sunt ( Bint Pluperfeoi / should have followed g' ram 6' ras e'rat 6 ra' mus 6 ra' tis e' rant sS cu' tiis, -&, -um s6 cti' ti, -ae, -H es' sem es' s6s es' set es se' mus 68 se'tifl es' sent / shall have followed sgcu'ttis, -a, -tini s6cu'ti, -ae, -a Future Perfeot. e' ro (wanting) 6' ris e' rit S' ri mus e' ri tis 6' runt Impebative. Singular. Plur&l. Pres. s6' que rg, /o??oii? ^/ioz^ se qui' mi ni, follow ye Put. se'quitdr, thou shalt follow s6' qui tdr, he shall follow s6 quun' tor, they shall follow Inhnitive. Pres. eS'qui, to follow Perf. Sing. Norn s6 cti' tQs, -S, -urn es' s6 ^' Ace. se cu' turn, -am, -lim es' se Plur. Norn, se cu' ti, -ae, -a es' se ** Ace. s6 cu' tSs, -as, ~& es' se Put. Sing. Norn. sS cu tu'rtis -S, -tim es' se *' Ace. s6 ca tu'rGm,-am,-umes'se Plur. Norn. s6 cu tu' ri, -ae, -a es' se *^ Ace. sectitu'ros, -as, -3. es' se ■to have followed to be about to follow — 98 Paeticiples. Preient. se' quens, s6 quen' tis, following Perfect. sScu'tGs, sScu'ta, secu'tuin, having followed Fut. Act. se cii tu' rtis, s6 cu tu' ra, se cu tu' rum, about to follow Gerundive, se quen' dtis, s6 quen' da, se quen' dum, to he followed Geeund. Gen. s6 quen' di, of following Dat se quen' do, for following Ace. s6 quen' dum, following Abl. se quen' do, hy following Supine. se cu' turn ) , . „ s6cu'tu \^o follow Examples for Practice: Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. loqudr, -i, to speak fru5r, -T, to enjoy fungdr, -i, to discharge f Perfect, locutus sum fruetus sum functiis sum [165. 166.] 330. Deponent of the Fourth Conjugation. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. blandior, -iri Indicative, blan' dT 6r, I flatter blan di' ris blan di' tiir , blan di' miir blan di' mi ni blan di un' tur Perfect. blanditus sum _ . Subjunctive. Present. blan' di S-r, / may flatter blan di a' ris blan di a' tiir blan di a' miir blan di a' mi ni blan di an' tur Imperfect, blan di e'bar, I was flattering blan di' rer, / should flatter blan di e ba' ris blan di re' ris blan di e ba' tur blan di re' tur blan di e ba' miir blan di re' nitir blan di e ba' mi ni blan di re' mi ni l)lan di e ban' tur blan di ren' tur blan' di 5r, / shall flatter blan di e' ris blan di e' tur blan di e' mur blan di e' mi ni blan di en' tur Future, blan di tu'riis, -a, -tim blan di W ri, -ae, -a sim sis sit C si' mus -J si' tlS (sint be about to flatter — 99 — INDICATIVB. SuBJUNcrrvB. Perfect. / (have) flattered / may have flattered i sum C Sim blan dr tus, -a, -urn ■ } es blan dr tiis, -a, -flm } sis (est ( sit 1 C su' mus i s!' mus blan di' ti, -ae, -a - 1 e' stis blan di' ti, -ae, -a -j si' tis ( sunt ( sint / had flattered Pluperfect. / should have flattered i e' ram ( es' s6m blan di' tiis, -a, -ttm - 1 6' ras blan di' tiis, -a, -iim J es' s^s (6' rat (es'set 1 fe ra'miis ( es s6'mus blan dl' ti, -ae, -S, - 1 e ra' tis blan di' ti, -ae, -a -] es s5' tls 1 ( e' rant ( es' sent Future Perfect. / shall have flattered blan dl' tus, -a, -liin - (e' Yd (wanting) } e' ris ( e' rit 1 f 6' rimus blan dr ti, -ae, -a - 1 6' ri tis 1 fe' runt Imperative Singular. Plural. Pres. blan di' re, flatter thou blan di' mi ni, flatter ye Put. blan di' tor, thou shalt flatter blan di' tor, he shall flatter blan di im' tor, they shall flatter Infinitive. Pres. blan di' ri, to flatter Perf. Sing. Nom. blan di' tiis, -a, -um es' se ^ '* Ace. blan di' tiim, -aTn,-iiin es' s6 f Plur. Nom. blan di' ti, -ae, -a es' se j^ ^^ ^^^^ flattered '^ Ace. blan di' tos, -as, -a es' se j Put. Sing. Nom. blan di tu'riis, -a, -iiin es' se \ '^ Ace. blan di tu' riim, -am, -ttm es' se f to he about to Plur. Nom. blan di tu' ri, -ae, -a es' s6 [ flatter ** Ace. blan di tu' ros, -as, -a es' se J — 100 — Pabticiples. Present, blan' dl ens, blan dl en' tis, flattering Perfect, blan di' tQs, blan di' ta, blan di' tflni, having flattered fut. Act. blan di tu' rQs, blan di tu' ra, blan di tii' riim, about to flatter Ckrundive. blan dl en' dQs, blan dl en' da, blan di en' diim, to he flattered Gebund. Supine. Gen. blandlen'di, of flattering Dat. blan dl en' do, for flattering Ace. blan dl en' dQm, flattering blan di'ttini) ^ Hatter Abl. blan dl en' do, by flattering blan di' tu ) Examples for Practice: largldr, ~iri, to bestow partiSr, -iri, to share, divide raentidr, -iri, to lie p6tI5r, -iri, to possess one^s self moli5r, -iri, to strive sortiSr, -iri, to draw lots [167. 168.] Appendix to the Third Conjugation. Yerbs in io. 331. Some verbs of the Third Conjugation insert 1 before the ending of the Present, as: capere, io take; capio, / take. This i appears Hkewise in all the other forms derived from the Present and In- finitive, but not before another i or e, except in the third person of the future active: capiet, he will take. Active Voice. Fres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. capIS, -grg, to take cepi captiini Indicative. / take ca' pi Present. Subjunctive. / may take ca' pi am ca' pis ca' pit ca' pi miis ca' pi tis ca' pi unt ca' pi as ca' pi at ca pi a' miis ca pi a' tis ca' pi ant — 101 — Indicative. / was taking ca pi 6' bam ca pi e' bas ca pi 6' bat ca pi 6 ba' mus ca pi 6 ba' tis ca pi 6' bant / shall take ca' pi am ca' pi 6s ca' pi 6t ca pi 6' mus ca pi 6' tis ca' pi ent Imperfeot. Future. SUBJUNCTrVB. / might take ca' p6 rSm ca' p6 r$8 . ca' p? ret ca p6 r6' D)us ca p^ r^' tis ca' p6 rent / may be about to take ^ i Sim cap tu' rtis, * -a, -iim SIS sit cap tfi -ae. , « (si'mus ^^; ^ si' tis ' -* (sint / have taken or / took ce' pi (like leg!) Pres, Put. Perfect. / may have taken c6' p6 rim {like legSrim) Pluperfect. / had taken I might have taken c6' pS ram {like Iggeram) c6 pis' s6m {like I6giss6m) Future Perfect. / shall have taken c6' p6 ro {like legSro) (wanting) Impkrative. Singular. Plural, ca' pe, take thou ca' pi te, take ye ca' pi to, thou shalt take ca pi to' t6, i/^ s^aZZ - to fill (up) rSpleo, -ere ) [616o, / grovj] obsoleo, -ere, to go out of use aboleo, -ere, to abolish adoleo, -ere, to grow up 357, Perfect in i, Su caveo, -ere, to be on one's guard favfio, -ere, to favor foveo, -ere, to cherish moveo, -ere, to move, trouble voveo, -ere ) . ^ ^ in etum (itur n, tiim): delevT deletfim flevi flettim nevi netiim complevi eompletmii implevi impletiini rgplevi repletum obsolevi obsoletum abolevi abolitum adolevi adultum pine in turn: cavi cautQm favi fautiiiu fovi fotiiin mOvi motmu vovi votiim devOvi devOtQia — 110 — paveo, -ere, to quake for fear ferveo, -ere, to glow pavi J fervi I \ ferbuT ( wanting ic anting cOniveo, -ere, to shut the eyes ■! _ . . j- wanting 358. Dropping the i doceo, -ere, to teach teneo, -ere, to hold obtineo, -ere, to occupy attineo, -ere, to belong pertlneo, -ere, to pertain abstliieo, -ere, to abstain contiiieo, -ere, to hold together misceo, -ere, to miXj mingle torreo, -ere, to roast censeo, -ere, to value, think recenseo, -ere, to review perceuseo, -ere, to survey of the Supine: dociii teniii obtiiiui attiniii pertinui abstinui continui miscui torrui censui recensui percensui 359, Perfect in si. Supine in turn: augeo, -ere, to increase indulgeo, -ere, to indulge torqueo, -ei*e, to torture ICiceo, -ere, to shine lageo, -ere, to mourn frigeo, -ere, to be cold auxi indulsi torsi luxi luxi frixi 360. Perfect in sT, Supine in siini: ardeo, -ere, to burn arsi haereo, -ere, to hang haesT adbaereo, -erfi ) cohaereo, -ere f ^"^ ""^'"'^ adhaesi cohaesT jubeo, -ere, to order jussi maneo, -ere, to stay, remain man SI remaneo, -ere, to remain remansi mulceo, -ere, to soothe mulsi permulceo, -ere, to aj)pease permulsi mulgSo, -ere, to milk mulsi doctum (tentuin) obtentuni wanting wanting wanting wanting \ mixtum I mistum tostum censum Irecensuin receiisitiiin wanting auctiiin iridultum tortum wanting wanting wanting [120. 130.\ arsum haesuni ridhaesiiin ccibaesuiii jussiiin mansuin rem an Slim mulsiim permulsum mulstitti — Ill — rIdSo, -ere, to laugh arrideo, -ere, to smile upon derideo, -ere, to laugh at suadeo, -ere, to advise dissuadeo, -ere, to dissuade persuadeo, -ere, to persuade terffeo, -ere ) . . ^-. ' w w \ to wipe tergo, -ere ) abstergeo, -ere, to wipe off abstersi Compounds only take the Second Conjugation, algeo, -ere, to he cold alsi fulgeo, -ere, to shine fulsT tiirgeo, -ere, to swell tursi urgeo, -ere, to urge ursi risi arrlsi derisi suasi dissiiasi persuasi tersi rlsum arrlsum derisum suasiim dissuasum persuasiim tersiim abstersum wanting wanting wanting wanting 361, Perfect in i, Supine in sum: prandeo, -ere, to breakfast prandi pransum Participle praiisils, in an active sense, having breakfasted sedeo, -ere, to sit circumsedeo, -ere, to sit around supersedeo, -ere, to forbear assideo, -ere, to sit by insideo, -ere, to sit upon obsideo, -ere, to besiege possideo, -ere, to possess dissideo, -ere, to disagree praesideo^ -ere, to preside resideo, -ere, to remain behind video, -ere, to see invideo, -ere, to envy provideo, -ere, to provide strideo, -ere, to whiz, creak With Redup niordeo, -ere, to bite pendeo, -ere, to hang dependeo, -ere, to hang down impendeo, -ere, to hang over spondeo, -ere, to pledge respondeo, -ere, to answer despondeo, -ere, to promise tondeo, -ere, to shear s6di sessum circumsedT circumsessiim siipersedi supersessum assedi assessum insedi insesstiin obsSdi obsessum possedi possessuni dissedi loanting praesedi ivanting resedl wanting vidi visum invldi invlsum providi provisum stridi wanting lication: momordi morsum pependi pensum ivanting wanting wanting wanting spopondi sponsumi respond! re sp on sum despondi desponsum totondl tonsilm m — 112 — Reduplication, or the repetition of the initial consonant with the following vowel, is generally dropped in Compounds, as: re-spondi. 362. Mark the solitary verb: eieo, -ere | . civi cltiiin «_ , ^ yto rouse .^^ CIO, -ire j civi citum . accio, -ire, to call in accivi accitiiiu >■ . . "" concio, -ire, to call together concivi concituin ) J^S^^^^^- 363. A few verbs of the Second Conjugation form the tenses of completed action like the Passive; they are called Semi-Deponents (see 277)'. audeo, -ere, to dare ausus sum, I dared gaudeo, -ere, to rejoice gavisus sum, I rejoiced soleo, -ere, to he wont solitus sum, / was wont [131. 132,] 364. Deponent Verbs. Pres. Ind. & Inf. Perfect, fateor, -eri, to con/ess fassus sum confiteor, -eri, to confess confessus sum diffiteor, -eri, to disavow diffessus sum mededr, -eri, to cure wanting misereor, -eri, to have pity miseritus, misSrtus sum redr, -eri, to think ratus sum [163. 164.] VEKBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 36t^» The Third Conjugation includes all verbs with stems ending in u (v), or one of the consonants. The Regular Forms of the Third Conjugation are seen in the following: Stem. Perfect. Supine. acu-6r6, to sharpen acii-i acii-tiim ed-erg, to eat Sd-i e-stim carp-ere, to pluck carp-si carp-tuni Stems in u take i in the Perfect, and turn in the Supine. Consonant-stems take in the Perfect partly i, partly si; and in the Supine partly turn, partly sum. A few verbs in iio belong to the First Conjugation, as: fluctu-o, -arg, to wave. — 113 — Stems in u(v). 366, Perfect in i, Supine in turn: aciio, -erS, to sharpen aciii acfitum Perf. Part, wanting; aciitus, sharp j is adjective only. arguo, -gre, to accuse argui (argutiim) coarguo, -ere, to convict coarguT wanting redargiio, -ere, to refute rgdargui wanting imbuo, -ere, to dip, dye imbui imbutiim induo, -erg, to put on indiii iudutiun exuo, -ere, to put off exui exutum iuo, -erg, to atone for liii (luitum) luo, -gre, to wash lui latum abluo, -grg, to wash (off) ablui ablutiim mmuo, -grg ) to lessen, imminuo, -grg) weaken minui minutum imminui imminutiim [niio, / nod] abniio, -grg, to dissent abniii wanting adnuo, -grg, to nod assent adnui wanting ruo, -grg, to rush forth rui rutum corruo, -grg, to fall to the ground corriii wanting diruo, -grg, to destroy dlrui dirutum eriio, -grg, to dig out grill erutiini obruo, -grg, to cover obriii obrutum spiio, -grg, to spit spui sputum statiio, -grg, to set, place statu! statutiim restituS, -grg, to resior^e restitui restitutiim siio, -grg, to sew sui sutiim tribiio, -grg, to give, confer on tribiii tributiim contribuo, -grg, to contribute contribui contributiim distribuo, -gre, to distribute distribui distributum solvo, -grg, to loose solvi solutum absolve, -grg, to acquit absolvi absolutiim volvo, -grg, to roll, turn volvi volutiim [gruO or ruo ?] ingruo, -grg, to rush ingrui wanting congriio, -grg, to agree congrui wanting metiio, -grg, to fear metui wanting pluo, -grg, to rain plui wanting sternuo, -grg, to sneeze sternui wanting 1133, 134,] — 114 VlXl victum struxi structum construxi constructiini instruxi instructum fluxi fluxum refluxi refluxuni [135. 136. 367, The following stems in u, v form their Perfect and Supint differently: vivo, -ere, to live struo, -ere, to build constriio, -ere, to construct instruo, -ere, to instruct fluo, -ere, to flow refluo, -ere, to flow hack Verbs in io. 368, Some verbs of the Third Conjugation insert i before the ending of the Present, as: capere, to take; capio, / take. This ] appears likewise in all the other forms derived from the Present and Infinitive, but not before another I or e, except in the third person of the future active: capiet, he will take (see 331). capio, -ere, to take accipio, -ere, to receive decTpio, -ere, to deceive incipio, -ere, io begin facTo, -ere, to do, make patefacio, -erS, to open conficio, -ere, to make interficio, -ere, to kill perficio, -gre, to finish The verb ^cere, to do, make, deserves special notice: It has for its Passive flo, factiis sum, fieri, to be made, become (see 411). Its Imperative is fac, do. The same rule applies to those Compounds of facio, which retain] a, as: patefacio, I open; Pass, patefio, lam opened; Imperat. patefac, | open. The Compounds of facio with Prepositions change a to i, and^ are inflected regularly, as: interficio, / kill; Pass, interflcior; Imperat. interfic6. cepi captiim accepi acceptum d6cepi deceptuni incgpi inceptum fSci factum patef6cT patefactum confeci confectiim interfeci interfectum perfeci perfectiim jacio, -ere, to throw, cast objicio, -ere, to throw to subjicio, -ere, to subject [lacio, / entice^ allicio, -ere ) to allure, pellicio, -ere ) entice elieio, -erS, to entice out jeci objecT subjeci allexi pellexi eliciii j actum objectum subjectum (allectiim) pellectQm elicitiim 115 — [specio, I see] - aspicio, -ere, to look despicio, -€re, to despise respicio, -ere, to consider cupio, -ere, to wishj desire fodio, -ere, to dig confodio, -ere, to pick out effodio, -ere, to dig out fugio, -ere, to flee or fly pario, -ere, to bring forth quatio, -ere, to shake concutio, -ere, to shake rS-pio, -ere, to snatch away arrlpio, -ere, to seize sapio, -ere, to he wise deslpio, -ere, to he foolish Stems in d, t. 369, As a rule, stems in d, t have si in the Perfect, sfim in the Supine. Before the s of the Perfect and Supine, d and t are dropped or become by assimilation ss. 370, The repetition of the initial consonant with the vowel following it or with e (Reduplication) is especially common in the formation of the Perfect of the 3d Conjugation; as^ pendo, / K;ei^/i, pependi; cado, I fall^ cecidi. These reduplicated Perfects are always formed in i. Compound verbs omit the reduplication, but the Compounds of do, / give; sto, / stand; disco, / learn; posco, / demand, and some of those of curro, / run. retain it. aspexi aspectam despexi, despectiiin respexi respectum cupivi ciipitiiin fodi fossiliii confodi confossuiii effodi effossuni fugi fugitum pepgri partum Fut. Part. , pariturus wanting quassum concussi concussGm . rapui raptuin arripui arreptum sapivi, sapiii wanting wanting wanting \137, 138.] 371. Perfect in sT, Supine in sum. claudo, -ere, to shut^ close concludo, -ere, to shut up divido, -ere, to divide^ separate laedo, -ere, to violate^ hurt allido, -ere, to dash against collldo, -ere, to dash together elido, -ere, to strike out clausi clausum conclusi conclusum divisi divlsuni laesi laesiim allisi allisum collisi collisum ellsi elistim — 116 — lado, -gr§, to play lusi iGsiim illudo, -ere, to mock illusi ill u sum plaudo, -ere, to applaud plausi plausQm applaudo, -erS, to applaud applausi applausiiiii explode, -ere, to hiss off explOsi explosum rado, -ere, to scrape rasi rasum rodo, -ere, to gnaw rosi rOsum trudo, -^re, to thrust trusi trusum vado, -ere, to go ^v anting wanting evado, -€rS, to turn out Svasi gvasum cado, -gre, to fall With Reduplication: cecidi occTdo, -ere, to set occidi incido, -ere, to fall into incidi Other Compounds of cado want the Supine. caedo, -ere, to fell cecidT decide, -ere, to cut down decldi excide, -ere, to hew out excidT incide, -ere, to engrave incTdi occide, -ere, to kill occidi pende, -ere, to weigh pependi suspende, -ere, to hang suspend! tende, -gre, to spread tetendi attends, -€rS, to attend to attend! contends, -ere, to exert contend! extends, -ere, to stretch out extendi ostende, -Sre, to show ostendi tunde, -er^, to thump tutud! contunde, -ere, to break down contiid! obtundo, -ere, to stun obtud! castim occasfim loanting caesuin decisum excisiiin incisum occisum l)ensiin'\ suspensum tensuni & lentum attentttin contenttiin extenstini & extentfim ostenstiin tusum & tun sum contusum obtusum 37^, Compounds of clftre with monosyllabic words pass over into the Third Conjugation: credo, -ere, to believe cr^didi crSditum vendo, -erg, to sell vendidi venditGm condS, -gr6, to build condidi conditiim — in abscondo, -erg, to hide abscond! abscondittim 6do, -ere, to give out edidi gditiim perdo, -gre, to ruin perdidi perditiiin reddo, -ere, to give hacJc reddidi reddittiin trado, -ere, to deliver tradidi traditum [139. 140.] 373. Perfect in i, Supine in sum. The Stem of many verbs of this class appears in the Present strengthened by n, as: fundo, Stem fiid. Stems in nd take i in the Perfect. [candO, I hum'] accendo, -ere, to kindle ctido, -ere, to forge edo, -Sre, to eat [fendo, I fend] defendo, -ere, to defend offendo, -ere, to offend mando, -ere, to chew pr^hendo, -gr6, to seize scando, -ere, to climb ascendo, -€r6, to ascend fundo, -ere, to pour circumfundo, -erg, to surround diffundo, -ere, to pour forth effundo, -ere, to pour out verto, -ere, to turn everto, -erg, to overthrow sterto, -gre, to snore The only Semi-Deponent Verb of the Third Conjugation belongs to this class: accendi accenstim cudi casiim 6di esum defend! defensum offend! offensum mand! man sum pr^hend! prehensum scandi scansum . ascend! ascensuni fudi fusQm circumfudi circumfusiim diffudi diffusum effud! effusum vert! versum evert! eversum sterttl! wanting fido, -grg confido, -gre to trust, conllde fisiis sum confisiis sum 374:. Various Irregularities: c6do, -grg, to yield cess! cessHm accedo, -erg, to approach access! accessum finds, -erg, to split, cleave fid! fisstim 118 — scindo, -ere, to cut scidi scissflin discindo, -ere, to split discidi discissuin excindo, -gre, to destroy excidi excisum absclndo, -ere, to tear off abscidi abscisum excindo takes Perfect and Supine from caedo, abscindo the Supine. meto, -ere, to reap messui messtlm mitto, -ere, to send mlsi missum amitto, -ere, to lose amlsi amissum admitto, -ere, to admit admlsT admissum committo, -ere, to commit commisi commissum permitto, -ere, to permit permisl permissum promitto, -ere, to promise promTsi promissum pando, -ere, to spread pandi passiim peto, -ere, to seek petivi, petii petitum repeto, -ere, to repeat repetivi repStitum sido, -ere, to sit down sedi wanting assldo, -ere, to sit down assedi assessum consldo, -ere, to settle consedi consesstim eisto, -ere, to stop stiti statiim obsisto, -ere, to oppose obstiti obstitum Other Compounds want Supine: absisto, -ere, to cease abstiti wanting adsisto, -ere, to stand by adstiti loanting exsisto, -ere, to come forth exstiti wanting [141, 142,] Stems in b, p. 375, Stems in b, p take si in the Perfect, and turn in the Supine\ at the same time b before s and t becomes p, as: nubo, nupsi, nuptum. The stem of many verbs appears in the Present strenghtened by m, as: rumpo, rupi. glubo, -ere, to peel deglubo, -ere, to skin nubo, -erS, to marry scribo, -ere, to write conscribo, -ere, to frame describo, -ere, to describe praescribo, -ere, to prescribe earpo, -6re, to pluck decerpo, -ere, to pluck discerpo, -erg, to tear asunder (glupsT) gluptQin (dgglupsT) degluptum nupsi nuptum scrips! scrip til m conscripsi conscriptum descripsi descripttlm praescripsi praescripttim carpsi carptrtm decerpsi decerptiim discerpsi discerpttim — 119 — repo, -ere, to creepj crawl irrepo, -ere, to creep into scalp o, -ere, to carve sculp o, -ere, to chisel serpo, -ere, to creep 376, Irregular: accumbo, -ere, to recline at table bibo, -ere, to drink rumpo, -ere, to break corrumpo, -ere, to corrupt erumpo, -ere, to break out perrumpo, -ere, to break throui strepo, -ere, to make a noise lambo, -ere, to lick scabo, -ere, to scratch Stems in c, g", q, h, ct. 377, c, g", q, and h with s become x g, h, and q before t become c. duc-o — duxi = ducsi reg-o — rexi = regsi coqu-O — coxi = coqsi trali-O — traxi = trahsi 378, Perfect in si, Supine in turn: cingo, -ere, to gird [fligo, -ere, to strike affligo, -ere, to dash confllgo, -ere, to Jight profligo, -are, to strike down jungo, -ere, to join adjungo, -ere, to join (to) plango, -ere, to beat, lament rego, -ere, to rule, govern corrigo, -ere, to correct dirigo, -ere, to direct (surrlgo) surgo, -ere, to rise (perrigo) pergo, -ere, to go on sugo, -ere, to suck tego, - ere, to cover detego, -ere, to discover protego, -ere, to protect repsi reptiiin irrepsi irreptum scalpsi scalptum sculps! sculptuni serpsi (serptum) ir: accubiii accubitum bibi bibitiim rupi ruptum corrupi corruptum erupi eruptum perrfipi perruptum strSpiii strepitum Iambi (lambitum) scabi wanting {143. 144.] rego — rectum = regtiim traho ' — tractiim = trahtum coquo — coctum = coqtum cinxi cinctfim flixi flictiim] afflixi afflictiiin conflixi conflictum profligavi profligatum junxi junctuni adjunxi adjuncttiin planxi planctuni rexi rectum correxi correctum direxi directum surrexi surrectum perrexi perrectum SUXl suctum texi tectum dgtexi detecttim protexi protectum 120 — tingo (tingii5), -5r5, to stain tinxi ungo (ungiiO), -ere, to anoint unxi [stingiio, I put out] exstinguo, -er6, to put out exstinxi distinguo, -ere, to distinguish distinxi traho, -ere, to draw traxi contrail o, -er6, to contract contraxi veho, -ere, to carry vexi dico, -erg, to say^ tell dixi praedico, -ere, to predict praedixi indico, -er6, to declare indixi diico, -ere, to lead duxi educo, -ere, to lead forth eduxi The Imperatives of dicerg, to say, duc6r6, to lead, compounds follow the simple verbs: 6duc, praedic. coquo, -€re, to cookj hake coxi tinctiiin nnctiiin exstinctQm distinctuiu tractum contraetum vectum dicttiin praedictiiin indictiim ductiini educttiin are: die, due; coctQm 379. The Supine is irregular: fingo, -ere, to fashion finxi pingo, -ere, to paint pinxi stringo, -ere, to bind strinxi figo, -ere, to fix fixi 380. Present strengthened by t: fleet o, -ere, to bend flexi necto, -ere, to tie nexi-nexfii pecto, -erg, to comb pexi plecto, -ere, to beat (only Passive) wanting 381. The Supine is wanting: ango, -ere, to torment, vex ficttiin pictflm strictiiin fixum flexftm nexum pexum wanting ningo, -ere, to snow clango, -ere, to clang 382. anxi ninxi wanting With Reduplication: parco, -gre, to spare peperci pungo, -ere, to pierce, sting ptipugi tango, -grg, to touch tetigi attingo, -SrS, to touch attigi pango, -ere, to strike, drive panxi pango, -gre, to bargain pgpigi compingS, -grg, to drive tight comp6gi parsGm punctOm tactfim attactiim panctttm pactQm eompaetiim — 121 — S83. With lengthened Stem-vowel. Many Consonant-stems with short stem-syllable take i in the Per- fect, before which the stem-vowel is lengthened, and S. becomes e. ag5, -gr6, to drive^ do 6gi actiim pgrago, -ere, to accomplish perggi peractQm abigo, -€r6, to drive away abegi abactum subigo, -grg, to subdue subegi subactum cOgo, -6re, to force (c6-ago) coggi c6actiim dego, -ere, to spend (d6-ag5) d6gi wanting ambigo, -ere, to contend wanting wanting frango, -erg, to break fregi fractum confringo, -ere, to break in two confregi confractGm eflringo, -ere, to break open effrggi eflfractiim lego, -erg, to read legi lectum allege, -ere, to choose allegi allectiim perlego, -ere, to read through perlggi perlectnin r616go, -ere, to read over relggi rSlectum colllgo, -6re, to collect collggi collectum dgligo, -6r6, to choose delegi delectum eligo, -ere, to elect eiegi electtiin diligo, -erg, to love dllexi dllectQin intell^go, -erg, to understand intellexi intellectum neglggo, -grg, to neglect neglexi neglectiiin ico, -grg, to strike ici ictum vinco, -grg, to conquer vici victnm linquo, -grg, to leave liqui wanting relinquo, -grg, to leave {behind) r^llqui rglictum 384. Perfect in si, 1 Supine in sfim: mergo, -grg, to dip iUy plunge mersi mersiSin spargo, -grg, to scatter sparsi sparsum conspergo, -grg, to sprinkle consp'ersi conspersum tergo, -grg, to wipe tersi terstim vergo, -grg, to verge wanting wanting {145, 146.] S T E M s in 1, m, n, r. 385, Perfect in si, Supine in turn, m is sometimes strengthened with p, as : sumo, cOmo, -grg, to adorn compsi demo, -grg, to take away dempsi sumpsi. comptttm demptum — 122 — promo, -SrS, to take out prompsi eumo, -ere, to take sumpsi absumo, -6re, to use up absumpsi consume, -6rS, to consume consumpsi [temno, I despise] contemno, -er€, to despise contempsi prompt^m ft sumptum absumptum consumptflm contemptum 386. According to the Analogy of the 2d Conjugation: alo, -6re, to nourish aWii \ ^^ c61o, -ere, to cultivate c61tli cultiim incSlo, -ere, to inhabit incoliii incultum consiilo, -erS, to counsel consuliii consultum molo, -erg, to grind molQi molituiu occulo, -ere, to conceal occiiltii occultum lr6mo, -ere, to growl tremui fremitum ggmo, -ere, to groan gemiii gemitiim tremo, -ere, to tremble tremui . wanting vomo, -erS, to vomit vomui vomituin 6v6ma, -ere, to vomit up gvomtii evomitum gigno, -ere, to beget ggntii genitiim pOno, -ere, to place p5sm positfim antepoao, -erg, to prefer antgposiil antep5situni oppono, -ere, to oppose opposiii oppositiim [cello, Iim2)el] percello, -ere, to beat down perculi perculsiim antecello, -ere, ) wanting wanting praecello, -SrS, >- to excel wanting wanting excello, -gre, ) wanting wanting 387. With Reduplication: cano, -erg, to sing cecini concino, -gre, to sound together conciniii praeciiio, -ere, to sing to one praeciniii curro, -grg, to run cticurri accurrS, -erg, to run to \ accucurri ) ^ ( accurri ) concurro, -grg, to run together \ concQcurn ) ' Iconciirri ) occurro, -grg, to meet occurri cantiiiii wanting wanting cursiini accurstiin concursiini occursi5m 123 — rgcurrS, -Sr§, to run hack recurri rgcurstim succurro, -ere, to succor succurri succursum fallo, -ere, to cheat felelli falsum refello, -ere, to refute refellT wanting pello, -ere, to drive (away) pepuli pulsum depello, -ere, to dispel depuli depulsum r^pello, -ere, to repel repiili repulsiiin {147. 148.] 388. Perfect in vi: cerno, -ere, to see, discern (crevi) (crettim) decerno, -ere, to determine decrevi decretuin discerno, -ere, to distinguish discrgvi discretGm lino, -ere, to smear levi (llvi) littim allino, -ere, to besmear all6vi allitfim illino, -Srg, to bedaub illevi illitum sino, -ere, to let sivi sTtum desino, -ere, to leave off desTvT, desn desltfim sperno, -€re, to despise sprgvi spretum sterno, -ere, to strew stravT stratum prosterno, -ere, to overthrow prostravi prostratiim sfiro, -ere, to sow s6vi sattim consero, -ere, to plant consevi consltuni iiisero, -ere, to plant in insevi insituni sero, -ere, to join seriiT sertiim dgsero, -ere, to forsake deseruT desertum dissero, -ere, to discourse dissgrtii dissertiim insSro, -ere, to insert inseriii insertuni t6ro, -ere, to ruby wear out trivi tritum cont^ro, -ere, to rub off' contrlvT contritum detSro, -ere, to loeai^ away d^trlvi detrltfim 389, Various Irregularities: vello, -er6, to pluck, pull velli (vulsi) vulsum avello, -ere, to pull down avelli avulsiim premo, -ere, to press pressi pressum comprimo, -ere, to press together ' compressi compressiim exprimo, -ere, to press out express! expressiim siipprimo, -ere, to keep back suppress! suppressQin psallS, -gre.. to play on the cithern psalli wanting 6mo, -ere, to buy gmi emptGni co6mo, -ere, to buy together c66mi coemptiim — 124 — rgdimS, -6r6, to buy hack rgdemi rSdemptiim adimo, -Sr5, to take away ad6mi ademptilm pgrimo, -€rg, to slay pgremi peremptiiin ggro, -Sr6, ^o carry on gessi gestGin conggro, -Srg, ^o bring together congessi congesttliii (Iro, -5r5, ^o burn ussi usttiin combaro, -6rg, fo &wrn {wholly) combussi combustiiln verro, -6r§, ^o sw;eep verri verstim quaero, -6r6, ^o ^eeA:, desire quaesivi quaesitiim acquiro, -6rg, ^o acquire acquisivi acquisitiim anquiro, -6rg, ^o search after anqulsivi anquisitttm inquire, -5r6, to rest rgquiesco, -ere ) suesco, -ere, to become used assuesco, -gre ) to be accus- consuesco, -ere ) tomed compesco, -ere, to restrain disco, -ere, to learn dedisco, -erg, to unlearn edisco, -Sre, to learn by heart posco, -ere, to demand dSposco, -erg, to request exposco, -ere, to request earnestly expdposci reposco, -gre, to demand back wanting glisco, -grg, to grow up wanting crevi novi agnOvi cognovi pavi qui6vi r6qui6vi su6vi assugvi cons ue VI compesciSi didici dedidici gdidici pdposci d5p5posci crettim nottiin agnitfim cognitiiin pastum quletGin rgquietiim suSttiin assuStiiin consuettim wanting wanting wanting wanting wanting wanting wanting wanting wanting {151, 394, But the great majority of Verbal Inceptives are Primitives which actually exist With the Perfect and Supine of their Primitives: 1S2] from abolesco, -grg, to disappear abSlevi abolgo adolesco, -grg, to grow up adolevi addlgo obsSlescO, -grg, to become obsolete obs61evi obsSlgo coalesce, -grg, to grow together c5alQl al5 concupisc5, -grg, to covet concupivi cupio convalesco, -grg, to recover convaltli valgo exardesco, -grg, to take fire exarsi ardgO obdormiscO, -grg, to fall asleep obdormivl dormW abolltfim S.dulttliu obsdlgttUn cdaHtdm conctipittlm convalitfim exarstUn obdormittlm — 126 — rSvivisc5, -er6, to revive revixi rSvictQiii VIVO scisco, -ere, to decree scivi scitum conscisco, -ere, to bring upon conscivi conscitum scio condolesco -erg, U^y^a^^i^ mdolesco, -ere, ) condolm condoKtum indolui indolitiim doleo inveterasco, -ere, to grow old inveteravi inveteratum invStero With the Perfect of their Primitives: acesco, -ere, to turn sour acui aceo aresco, -ere, to become dry ariii areo calesco, -ere, to become warm caliii caleo conticesco, -ere, to become still contictii taceo delitesco, -ere, to hide aiuay delitni lateo eflfervesco, -ere, to boil up efferviii & efferbui ferveo effldresco, -ere, to begin to bloom effloriii floreo extimesco, -ere, to fear extimui timeo eriibesco, -ere, to turn 7'ed griibui riibeo horresco, -ere, to stand on end hormi horreo illCicesco, -ere, to grow light illuxi luceo intumesco, -ere, to swell intumui tiimeo pallesco, -ere, to turn pale palltQ palleo putresco, -ere, to rot piitrGi putreo sSnesco, -gre, to grow old s^ntii sgnS5 — 121 — resipisc5, -ere, to come to one^s resiplii sapio [senses ingemisco, -ere, to groan ingemtii ggmo contrgmisco, -er6, to tremble contremtii ' tremS Wanting Perfect and Supine. hisco, -ere, to yawn flavescO, -ere, to become yellow hio flaveo augesco, -ere, to augment hebesco, -6rS, to grow dull augeo hebeo Denominative Inceptives. 395. Most Denominative Inceptives want both Perfect and Supine; some have the Perfect in uL Wanting Perfect and Supine. aegreseo, -er6, to fall sick plumesco, -ere, to get feathers aeger, slcJc pluma, a feather ditesco, -erS, to grow rich puerasco, -ere, to become a dives, rich pu6r, a child [child diilcesco, -ere, to become sweet javenesco, -grS, to grow young dulcis, sweet juvenis, young grandesco, -gre, to grow large gravesco, -erS, to grow heavy grandis, large miteseo, -ere, to become mild mltis, 7nild pinguesco, -erS, to grow fat pinguis, fat gravis, heavy integrasco, -ere, to begin anew integer, fresh teneresco, -ere, to grow tender tener, tender With the Perfect in ui. ergbreseo,-ere, to become frequent (cr5ber, frequent) crgbrtii duresco, -ere, to grow hard (durus, hard) durui evanesce, -erS, to vanish (vanus, empty) SvantSi innotesco, -ere, to become known (notus, known) innottii macresco, -ere, to grow meager (macer, meager) macrtii maturesco, -ere, to ripen (maturus, ripe) maturGi nigresco, -ere, to become black (niggr, black) nigriii obmutesco, -€re, to become dumb (miitus, dumb) obmtlttii rScrudesco,-ere, to break open afresh (criidus, fresh) rgcrddiii vilesco, -ere, to become vile (vilis, vile) viltii [153, 1S4.] 128 396. Deponent Verbs. fruor, -1, to enjoy perfriidr, -i, to enjoy fully fungor, -i, to discharge defungor, -i, to discharge gradior, -i, to step aggrgdior, -i, to attack labor, -i, to glide, roll on dilabor, ~i, to fall asunder 16qu6r, -i, to speak alloqadr, -i, to address morior, -i, to die nitdr, -i, to stay one's self on patior, -1; to suffer perpetiop, -T, to endure [plector] amplector, -i, to embrace queror, -i, to complain sSqu6r, -i, to follow assequor, -T, to pursue ut5r, -1, to use abutdr, -i, to use, abuse reverter, -I, to turn back fruitfis & fructiis sum perfructtis sum functus sum defunctiis sum gressus sum aggressiis sum lapsGs sum dllai)sus sum locutds sum allocutQs sum mortuiis sum— P.Part.m6rit(lru8 nisiis & nixtis sum passus sum perpesstis sum amplexQs sum questus sum secutus sum assecutus sum usus sum abusus sum rSverti, active — Part, rgversus With stems in sc [apiscSr, -i, to reach after adipiscSr, -i, to obtain defetiscSr, -i, to be worn out expergiscor, -i, to awake irascor, -T, to grow angry [mmiscor, / recollecf] comminiscdr, -i, to devise reminiscor, ~i, to remember nanciscdr, -i, to get nascor, -i, to be born obllviscor, -i, to forget paciscor, -i, to strike a bargain pascor, -1, to feed proficiscdr, -i, to set out, start ulciscdr, -i, to avenge vesc6r, -i, tofeedupon^ eat aptus sum] adeptus sum defessus sum experrecttis sum (iratus sum) — iratus, angry commentus sum wanting nactus & nanctiis sum natiis sum — Put. Part, nasciturus oblitiis sum pactus sum pastGs sum profectiis sum ultiis sum wanting [t6S, lee.] — 129 VERBS or the FOURTH CONJUGATION. 397. The Fourth Conjugation includes all verbs with vowel- Stems in i. Their Perfect and Supine are formed by adding respec- tively VI, turn, according to the rule already given {344). Or, in other words, in the Fonrth Conjugation the Regular Forms of the Principal Parts are these: Fres. Ind. & Pres. Inf Perfect. Supine. -io -ire -ivi -itGm audio audire, to hear audivl auditiim 398. The following Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation vary from the usual mode of formation: farcio, -ire, to stuff rgfercio, -ire, to cram fulcio, -ire, to support haurio, -ire, to di^aw exhaurio, -ire, to exlmust saepio, -ire, to hedge in salio, -ire, to leap dissHio, -ire, to hurst asunder sancio, -ire, to sanction sarcio, -ire, to mend sentio, -ire, to feelj perceive sSpelio, -ir§, to bury vSnio, -irS, to come invenio, -ire, to find out vincio, -ire devincio, -ire amicio, -ire, to clothe pario, -ere, io bring forth (3d Conjugation' aperio, -ire, to open rSpMo, -ire, to find Wanting Perfect and Supine: feriS, -irS, to strike, beat and Desideratives ferocio, -ire, to be unruly in uriO, as: superbio, -ir^, to be proud gsiirio, -ire, to want to eat [159, 160.] 399. Deponent Verbs. assentidr, -iri, to assent assensiis sum metidr, -iri, to measure mensGs sum to bind farsi farttim r^fersi rSferttiiu fulsi fulttim hausi hausttiin exhausi exhaustQm saepsi saepttlm salfii saltQm dissiliSi wanting sanxi sanctGm, sancitttm sarsi sartum sen si sensum sgpelivi sepultum veni ventQm inveni inventQm vinxi vinctftm devinxi devinctum wanting amictuin ugation) apgrui apertiiin r6p§rGi rgpertum 130 — ordi5r, -iri, to begin experi6r, -iri, to try^ exercise opperior, -iri, to await orior, -iri, to rise, appear j orior oreris \ orimiir orimini Imperf. Subj. orirer or orerer Put. Part. oriturQs, -a, -um adorior, -iri, to attack Pres. Ind. orstLs sum expertus sum oppertiis sum ortiis sum Gerundive, oriundus, -a, -um adortus sum The Compounds of orior follow the conjugation of the simple verb, except adoriri, to rise up at, attack, which follows the Fourth Conju- gation throughout. t^^*''- ^^**-] Irregular Conjugation. 400. A few verbs are irregular in the Conjugation of the Present and the forms derived from it. These are: sum, I am, and its Compounds. The conjugation of sum has already been given {303) ; its Com- pounds are conjugated in the same way except posse, to he able. 4:01. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine, possum poss6, to be able potiii Indicative. pos' sum, I can po' tes, thou canst p6' test, he can pos' su mus, we can po te' stis, you can pos' sunt, they can Subjunctive. Present. pos' Sim, I may be able pos' SIS, thou may est be able pos' sit, he may be able pos si' mus, we may be able pos sT' tis, you may be able pos' sint, they may be able Imperfect. p6' te ram, I could, was able pos' sem, I might be able p6' te ras, thou couldst p6' te rat, he could p6 te ra' mils, we could p6 tg ra' tis, you could po' te rant, they could pos' ses, thou mightest be able pos' set, he might be able pos s6' mus, we might be able pos s6' tis, you might be able pos' sent, they might be able — 131 — Indicative. Subjunctive. Future. p6' tS ro, / shall he able (wanting) p6' te ris, tliou wilt he ahle po' te rit, he will he ahle p6 te' ri miis, we shall he able p6 te' ri tis, you will he ahle p6' tS runt, they will he ahle Perfect. p5' tu 1, I have been able po tu' g rim, I may have been ahle p6 tu i' sti p6 tu' S ris p6' tu it p6 tu' e rit po tu' finus * p6 tu 6 ri miis p6 tu i' sti8 po tu e ri tis po tu S' runt p6 tu' g rint Pluperfect po fii' § ram, I had been ahle po tu is' s6m, I might have been able po tu' 6 ras po tu is' s6s po tu' 6 rat po tu is' s6t p6 tu 6 ra' mus p6 tu is se' mus po tu e ra' tis po tu is se' tis po tu' e rant po tu is' sent Future Perfect, po tu' e ro, / shall have been ahle (wanting) po tu' e ris po tu' e rit po tti ^ ri mus po tu e ri tis po tu' e rint Infinitive. Present, pos' se, to he ahle Perfect, po tu is' sS, to have been ahle 402. The verb sum is joined with the adjective potis, ahlej making the compound (pot-sum) possum, / can^ am ahle. This is conjugated like sum, but observe: that the t of pot is assimilated before s, thus: possum instead of potsum; that the f is dropped in ful, fuSram, etc., thus: potui for potfui; that potesse and potessem are contracted into posse, possem. Participle, Imperative, and Gerund are wanting; potens, mighty ^ is simply an adjective. C^^^. ^^^A — 132 — 403. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine. f6ro ferrS, to hear ttili lattbn Active. Indioatiyb. Subjunctive. Present. fS'rO, I hear W ram, I may hear fers f^' ras fert fe' rat fe' rl mils f6 ra' mtis fer' tis f6 ra' tis f^' runt fS' rant Imperfect. fgre'bam, I was hearing fer' rgm, I should hear f6 re' bas fer' res fg re' bat fer' ret fe re ba' mGs fer re' nitls fe re ba' tis fer re' tis fg re' bant fer' rent Future. fe'ram, I shall hear ,- .-. ^^ ( si^i \ f^'res l^Ms, \ gjg fg'ret -^'-"^^ (sit r^^f ^; fe re' mfis ,-..,- ( si' miis ( /^^^^ fgre'tis Ifiix^'v^, S gj,,.3 Uo5.ar f6' rent "^^' "^ ( sint / Perfect, tu' li, Ihore or have home tu' le rim, I may have home tu li' sti tu' le ris tu' lit tu' 16 rit tu' li mtis tu 16 ri mils tu 11' stis tu 16 ri tis tu le' runt tu' 16 rint Pluperfect, tu' 16 ram, / had home tu lis' s6m, I should have home tu' 16 ras tu lis' ses tu' 16 rat tu lis' s6t tu 16 ra' mtis tu lis se' mtis tu 16 ra' tis tu lis se' tis til' 16 rant tu lis' sent 133 — Subjunctive. (wanting) Pres. Sing, Fut. '' Pres. Perf. Put. Indicative. Future Perfect, tu' IS r5, I shall have borne W le ris tu' le rit tu IS ri mils tu le ri tis tu' IS rint Imperative. fgr, bear thou Plur. fer' to, thou shalt bear fer' to, he shall bear Inpinitivb. fer' rS, to bear tu lis' sS, to have borne la tti' rfis, -a, -um es' s6, &c., to be about to bear pARTICIPIiES. Pres. f6' rens, fS ren' tis, bearing Put. la tu' riSs, la tti' r^, la tu' rtiin, about to bear Gerund. Supine. fer' tS, hear ye fer to' te, ye shall bear fB run' to, they shall bear Gen. f6 ren' di, of bearing Dat. fg ren' do, for bearing Ace. f(g ren' dum, bearing s:r}'»»- Abl. fg ren' do, by bearing Passive. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. fS'rto, /am 6orne fe' rftr, /ma?/ 6e 6orne fer' ris fe ra' ris fer' tQr ^ fe ra' tQr fg' ri miir fe ra' mtir f^ ri' mi ni m ra' mini fe run' tur fg ran' ttir Imperfect. f5 re' bar, I was borne fer' rer, I might be borne f6 re ba' ris fer re' ris fe re ba' tQr fer re' ttir fS re ba' mtir fer re' mtir fS re ba' mi ni fer re' mi ni fS re ban' tQr fer ren' ttir — 134 — Indicative. Subjunctive. Ftttore. fg' r5,r, I shall he borne (wanting) fe re' ris fe re' tiir fg re' miir fe re' mi ni fe ren' tur Perfect, la' tus, -§r, -tlm sum, / was or have been borne la' tus, -a, -um Sim, I may have been borne Pluperfect, la' ttis, -a, -flm gram, I had been borne la' tfis, -3., -iiin essem, / might have been borne Future Perfect, la' tils, -a, -iim erO, / shall have been borne Impebative. Singular. Plural, fer' re, be thou borne fe ri' mi m, be ye borne fer' tSr, thou shall be borne fer' tor, he shall be borne fe run' tor, they shall be borne Infinitive. fer' ri, to be borne la' ttis, -a, -iim es' s§, &c., to have been borne la' turn i' ri, to be about to be borne Pabticiples. Perfect. la' tus, la' tS, la' tum, borne Gerundive. f6 ren' dQs, f^ ren' da, fS ren' dtlm, to be borne Care should be taken not to confound the two verbs: ferre, to bear, and ferire, to beat Indio. SUBJ. Indio. SuBJ. Ikdic. Pres. Put Pros Perf. Put. 404, Compounds of fero are conjugated like the simple verb: adfero adferre, to afford atttili adlafciim aufero auferre, to carry away abstuli ablatum confero conferre, to bring together contiili coUatiim differo difFerrS, to defer distiili dilatum eflEero efferre, to carry out extuli eiatiim infSrS inferre, to carry into intuli illatum praefero praeferre, to prefer praetiili praelatum rgf^ro rgferrg, to bring back r^ttili, rettuii relatiim [173. 174.] 135 — 405. Pres. Ind. & Pres. Inf. Perfect volo velle, to he willing volui nolo nolle, to be unwilling nolui malo malle, to be more willing malui Indicative. Present. lam willing J unwilling , more willing v6' lo no' lo malo VIS nOn vTs ma' vis vult non vult ma' vult v6' lu mus no' lii mus ma' lii miis vul' tis non vui' tis ma vul' tis vo' lunt * no' lunt ma' lunt Imperfect. Twas loilling^ unwilling^ more willing v6 le' bSm v6 le' bas v6 le' bat vo le ba' mils vo le ba' tis vo le' bant no le' bam no le' bas no le' bat no le ba' mtis no le ba' tis no le' bant ma le' bam ma le' bas ma le' bat ma leba' mus ma le ba' tis ma le' bant Future. I shall be willing^ univiUing, more willing vo' lam no' ISm ma' \&m vo' les no' les ma' les vo' let no' let ma' let vo le' mtis no le' miis ma le' mus vo le' tis no le' tis ma le' tis vo' lent no' lent ma' lent Perfect. Iivas or have been willing^ unwilling^ more willing vo'liii no'ltii ma' lii i vo lii i' sti no lii 1' sti ma lii i' sti vo'luit no' lii it ma' lii it vo lii' i miis no lii' i miis ma lii' i miis vo lii i' stis no lu i' stis ma lii i' stis vo lii e' runt no lii e' runt ma lii e' runt — 136 — Indicativb. Pluperfect. / had been willing, unwilling , more willing v6 lii' e ram no IQ' e rS-m ma Itt' e ram v6 lu' e ras no Iti' e ras ma lu' S ras v6 lu' € rat no Iti' g rat ma lu' S rat v6 Iti e ra' mus no lu e ra' mus ma Iti 6 ra' mtis v6 Itl e ra' tis no lii § ra' tis ma Iti e ra' tis v6 lu' e rant no lu' e rant ma lu' e rant Future Perfect. / shall have been willing j unwilling^ more willing v6 Iti' e r3 no IQ' e rO ma Iti' § r6 v6 lii' S ris no lu' e ris ma IQ' e ris v6 lu' e rXt no IG' 5 rit ma Iti' S rit v6 Ifi e ri mils nO lu e ri mtis ma Iti 6 ri mtis v6 lu e ri tis no lu g ri tis ma Ifi e ri tis v6 lu' e rint no lu' e rint ma lu' e rint Subjunctive. Present. / may be willing , unwilling, more willing v6' lim no' lim ma' lim vg' lis no' lis ma' lis v6' lit no' lit ma' lit ve li' mtis no li' mtis ma li' mtis v6 li' tis no li' tis ma li' tis v6' lint n6' lint ma' lint Imperfect. / should be willing, unwilling ^ more willing vel' iSm nol' lem mal' lem vel' les nol' les mal' les vel' Igt nol' let mal' let vel le' mtis nol le'mQs mal le' mtis vel le' tis nol le' tis mal le' tis vel' lent nol' lent mal' lent Perfect. I may have been willing, unwilling, more willing v6 Iti' 6 rim no Iti' e rim ma lu' e rim v6 Iti' e ris no Iti' 6 ris ma lii' € ris v6 Iti' g rit no Iti' e rit ma Iti' 6 rit v6 Iti 5 ri mtis no Iti 6 ri mtis ma Iti S ri mtis v6 Iti S ri tis no Iti 6 ri tis ma Iti 6 ri tis v5 Iti' S rint no Iti' 6 rint ma Iti' € rint — 137 — Subjunctive. Pluperfect. / should have been willing ^ unwilling ^ more willing v6 m is' sSm no lu is' sem ma IQis' sem v6 lu is' ses no Iti is' ses ma lii is' ses v5 111 is' set no IQ is' set ma lu is' set vo lu is se' mils no lii is se' mils ma lii is sS' mQs v6 m is se' tis no lii is se' tis ma Iti is se' tis v5 IQ is' sent no m is' sent Imperative. ma lu is' sent wanting Pres. S. Put. '^ be unwilling^ &c. no' ll PI. no ll' te wanting noli' to '' nolitO'tg no ll' to no liin' to iNFiNrrivE. Preg. vel' le, nol' Ig, mal'16, to be toilling^ &c. Perf. vo Iti is' sS, no lii is' se, ma Iti is' s6, to have been willing^ &c. Participles. PreB. vo' lens, willing no' lens, unwilling Geruwd. Gen. v6 len' di no len' di Dat. vo len' dO 406. Prei. Ind. & Pres. lUf. €0, irg, to go Indicative. Perfect, ivi wanting wanting [175, 176,] Supine, itiim 6' o, I go is it rmus V tis g' unt i' bam, / was going i'bas i'bat i ba' mus 1 ba' tis I' bant Present. Imperfect. SUBJUNCTTVB. €' am, I may go €' as €'at 5 a' mus 6 a' tis e' ant r rgm, I should go V res I'rgt i' r6' mus I re' tis r rent — 138 — Indicative. I shall go i'bo V bis i'bit V bi muB V bi tis i' bunt Future. Subjunctive. I may be about to go ItQ -ae, rtis, -iiin -a Sim sis sit sl'mus si' tis sint — Perfect. I went or have gone V vi (i' i) 1 vi' stl (i i' sti) 1' vit (i' it) i' VI mils (i' i miis) i vi' stis (i i' stis) i v6' runt (i e' runt) / had gone V v6 ram (i' 6 ram) i' ve ras, (i' ^ ras) 1' ve rat, (i' e rat) i v6 ra' mfis (i 6 ra' mus) i v6 ra' tis (i e ra' tis) i' v6 rant (i e rant) / shad have gone V v6 ro (i' 6 ro) i' v6 ris (i' 6 ris) r v6 rit, (i' 6 rit) i v6 ri mus (i g ri 1 ve ri tis (i 6 ri tis) i' v6 rint (I' 6 rint) Singular. Pres. I, go Put. i' to, thou shall go V to, he shall go I may have gone V v6 rim (i' e rim) i' ve ris (i' 6 ris) i' ve rit (i' 6 rit) i v6 ri mus {i 6 ri mus) i v6 ri tis (i g ri tis) i' ve rint (i' erint) Pluperfect. / should have gone 1 vis' sem (Is' sto) 1 vis' s6s (Is' ses) 1 vis' set (Is' set) 1 vis 86' mus (is s6' mtis) I vis se' tis (Is s6' tis) I vis' sent (Is' sent) Future Perfect. (wanting) Impeeative. Plural. V t6, go ye I to' t6, ye shall go e un' to, they shall go Infinitive. PrcB. i' r6, to go Perf. 1 vis' s6 (Is' sS) , to have gone Put. i tti' rCis, ~a, -tim es' sg, &c-, to be about to go — 139 — Participles. Pres. i' ens, Gen. e un' tis, going Put. i tu' riis, -a, -um, being about to go Gkeund. Supine. Gen. 5 un' di, of going Dat. e un' do, for going Ace. g un' dum, going V turn ) . Abl. e un' do, by going V tu ) ^^^^ ^^^^ 407. The Compounds of eo are conjugated in the same way. But usually they drop the v of the Perfect as: r6dii for redlvT, &c., and contract the i i of the Perfect Infinitive and of the Pluperfect Subjunctive into i, as: redisse for redl(v)iss6, &c., e. g.: abeo, -Tre, to go away praetereo, -Ire, to pass by ineo, -ire, to go into, begin redeS, -ire, to return intereo, -irS, to perish subeo, -ire, to come or go under obeo, -ire, to meet transeo, -ire, to pass over 408. Tlie Compounds veneo, / am for sale^ and pereo, I perish^ serve as Passives to vendo, / sell^ and perdo, / ruin. The Compound ambio, I go about j seek, is regular of the Fourth Conjugation. 409. queo quire, to be able quivi quitum nequeo nequire, not to be able nequivi nequitum are conjugated like Ire, to go (406); they are, however, usual only in the Present Indicative and Subjunctive. 410. Pres. Ind.& Pres. Inf. Perfect. Supine, edo, -ere, to eat edi esum (regular of the 3d conjugation, 373) has also some contracted forms, similar to those of the corresponding tenses of esse, to be, but always with e long before s, viz.: Present Indicative. Imperfect Subjunctive. ederem essem, / should eat edis es, thou eatest ederes esses, thou wouldst eat edit est, he eats ederet esset, he would eat 6der6mus essemiis, we should eat gditis estis, you eat edgretis essetis, you would eat ederent essent, they would eat Imperative. Singular. Plural. Prei. ede es, eat thou 6dite este, eat ye Fut. gdito esto, thou shalt eat gdltote estote, ye sliall eat edito esto, he shall eat — 140 — Infinitive. gdgrS ess€, to eat Pasbivb. gditur esttlr, is eaten — ^deretur essetGr, should he eaten ill. Pres. Ind & Pres. Inf. Perfect. fio, figri, to become factiis sum Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. fi' o, / become fi' am, I may become fis fi'as fit fiat ti' mils fi a' mus fi'tis n a' tis fi'unt fi' ant Imperfect. fie' bam, I became fi' e r6m, I should become n e' bas n' g res fi e' bat fl' 6 r6t f 1 e ba' mils fi 6 re' mus fi e ba' tis fi e rS' tis fi e' bant fi' 6 rent Future. fi' am, I shall become (wanting) fi'es fi'St fi e' mtis fi e' tis fi'ent Perfect. / became or have become I may have become factiis, -a, -Qm sum, &c. factiis, -a, -lim sim, &c. Pluperfect. / had become I should have become factiis, -a, -Qm eram, &c. factiis, -a, -tim ess^m, &c. Future Perfect. / shall have become factiis, -a, -tim 6ro, &c. (wanting) Imperative. PreB. Sing, fi, become thou Plur. fi' t§, become ye Port Sing. Nom. li Ace. Plur. Nom. ii Ace. — 141 — Intinitivb. fi' 5 ri, to become factHs, -a, -una ess6 fac' tGm, -am, -dm es' s6 v ^ r x. ^ , . - ^ X f «x r ^o Tia'y^ become fac' ti, -ae, -a es' sg fac' tos, -as, -a es' s6 Put. factum irl, ^o be about to become Pabticiples. PreB. factQs,-a,-tiin, become; Gerundive. taciendus,-a,-iiin, to be made 412. The verb fio is conjugated in the Present, Imperfect, and Future according to the Fourth Conjugation, but takes an S in the Infinitive and Subjunctive Imperfect, viz.: fieri, fiergm. In these forms the 1 is short, but elsewhere it is long, even before another vowel. It is originally an intransitive verb meaning to become^ to happen^ but is also treated as Passive to faciO, / make. Examples are : nihil fit, nothing happens consul fit, he is made consul dlv6s factiis est, he has become rich nihil factiim est, nothing has happened 413, The Compounds of facio with Prepositions change & into I, and form the Passive regularly, as: interficio, / kill interficior, / am killed But when compounded with words other than prepositions, faciO retains its a, and uses fiO as its Passive, as: mansu6facio, / tame mansuSf io, / become tame liqugfaciO, I make liquid liqugfio, I melt The accent remains the same as in the simple verbs, thus: mansuefa'cis, thou tamest. [^79. iso] Defective Verbs. 414. Defective Verbs want certain parts. 415, coei)% I have begun memmi, I remember odi, I hate are in use only in the Perfect and the tenses derived from it. To coepi, / have begim, incTpiO, / begin, serves as a Present. m6mini, I remember, and OdT, I hate, are present in sense; hence in the Plu- perfect and Future Perfect they have the sense of the Imperfect and Future, novi, / know (Perf. of nosco, / learn to know), and con- sue vl, / am wont (Perf of consuescO, / accustom myself), are also present in sense. — 142 Ferf: Pluperf. Perf. Pluperf. Indicattv^e. I have begun / remember I hate coe' pi m6' ml rii o'di coe pi' sti me mi iii' sti cli' sti coe' pit me' mi nit O'dit coe' pi mils me mi' ni mGs 0' di mtis coe pi' stis me mi ni' stis di' stis coe pe' runt me mi ne' runt o de' runt coe' pe ram, &c. me mi' ne ram, &c. o'deram, &c. coe' p6 ro, &c. me mi' ne ro, &c. o' de ro, &c. Subjunctive. coe' pe rim, &c. me mi' ne rim. &c. o'dSrim, &c. coe pis' sem, &e. me mi nis' sem, &c. Odis'sem,&c. (wanting) Impeeattve. me men 'to m6 men tO' te Perf. Put. Perf. Fut. Infinitive, coe pis' sS me mi nis' se coep til' rus es' se (wanting) Paeticiples. coep' tiis, -S, -iim (wanting) coep til' rus, -a, -iim (wanting) (wanting) o dis' se o su' rtis es' (o'siis, -a, -iim) o su' riis, -a, -iim Passive, coep' tiis, -a, -Qm sum, / have begun (used with the Pass. Infinit.) 0' siis, -a, -iim sum, I hate 416, aj5, / say^ say yes, farl, to speak Urm — inquam, / say, quoth I — a' jo Pees. Subj. Imp. Ind. aje'bam a' is a'jas a j6' bas a' It a' jat aje'bat aje ba' mus ajeba'tis a' junt a' jant a j6' bant Peep. Ind. a' it Pabticiple. a'jens^ affirmative — 143 Pres. Ind. in' quam Pees. Subj. in' quis in' qui as in' quit in' qui at in' qui mus in' qui tis in qui a' tis in' qui unt in' qui ant Imp. Ind. in qui e' bam Fur. Ind. in qui 6' bas m' qui 6s in qui S' bat in' qui fit in qui 6 ba' mus in qui S ba' tis in qui 6' bant Pebp. Ind. Impebat. in' qu6 in qui' sti in' qui t§ in' quit in' qui to in qui' stis inquam, say^ is used only in direct quotations, as the English quoth. Besides the Infinitive far!, to speak^ mark: Pres. fatur, he speaks Imperat. far 6, speak thou Put. fabor, / shall speak Gerund, fandi, of speaking fabitur, he will speak fando, for speaking Perf. ^tvi^ ^\m\ I have spoken^ Slq,. Supine. idXxi^ to speak Participle, (fantis, fanti) infans, speechless Gerundive, fandus, -3-, -um, to he spoken of 417. a' v6 sal' v5 sal v6' bis, hail thou ! va' 16 ) fare- a v6' te sal v6' t§ hail ye! va le' t6 J well a'gg a'gitg come a' pa g6, 6eflf one c6' do cet' te give 418. To these may be added: quae' so, I beseech fo' r^m, I should he quae' su mus, we beseech fo' res, thou shouldst he fo' rSt, he should he fo' rent, they should he fo' r6, to he about to be [181, 18Z] — 144 — Impersonal Verbs. 419. Many Verbs appear only in the third per- son singular and in the Infinitive to express an action or condition without reference to any actor. These are called Impersonal Verbs. 420. The following Verbs signifying personal conditions are absolutely impersonal: Perfect. dgcQit dSdgcuit libiilt or libitttm est ITcGit or licitiiin est lieQit mis6ritiim ) . misertum i oportGit pigGit or pigittini est paenitiiit pudilit or puditiiin est pertaesiiin est 421. The Impersonais dScSt, d6dgc6t, libgt, licSt can have a subject, but only a neuter pronoun or adjective. libgt, lic6t and liquet govern the Dative, as mihi lic6t, it is lawful for me; mihi lib6t, it pleases me. All the other verbs mentioned in 420 govern the Accusative, the persons being expressed as follows: Present. Infinitive. d6cet, it becomes dgcere dedgcet, it is unbecoming dedecerS libet, it pleases libere lic6t, it is lawful, allowed licerg liqufit, it is clear llquerg misSrSt, it excites pity mis^rerg ^ 6port€t, it is needful Sportere pig6t, it grieves pigerg paenitgt, it causes sorrow paenitere pudgt, it shames puderg taedet, it wearies taedere Indicative. paenitgt me, I repent paenitgt te paenitgt gum paenitgt nos paenitgt vos paenitgt Sos / was repenting paenitebat mS, &c. / shall repent paenitebit mS, &c. Subjunctive. Present. paenitgat me, / may repent paenitSat te paenitgat eiim paenit^at nos paenitgat vos paenitSat eos Imperfect. / should i^epent paeniterfit me, &c. Future. (wanting) -> 145 — Indicativb. Subjunctive. Perfect. / (have) repented I may have repented paenituit me, &c. paenituerit me, &c. Pluperfect. / had repented , I should have repented paenituerat me, &c. paenituisset me, &c. Future Perfect. / shall have repented paenituerit me, &c. (wanting) 422. Verbs describing phenomena of nature are almost in- variably impersonal in virtue of their meaning: pluit, it rains fulgurat I .^ j.^j^^^^^ ningit, it tnows fulmlnat grandinat, it hails Iticescit, it becomes light tonat, it thunders vesperascit, evening comes on 423. Verbs impersonally used: * accidit \ interest, it concerns, it matters "* ., i it happens ^Z^l' " *'^^/*'« ev6nit r patet, it is plain contingit ) placet, it pleases constat, it is evident, agreed praestat, it is better expedit, it is useful rgfert, it concerns, it matters convenit, it is fit restat, it remains delectat, it delights vacat, there is leisure The Passive of intransitive Verbs is often used impersonally, thus: vivitur, people live pugnatur, there is fighting SIC vivitur, such is life * itur, some one goes [183. 184.] Adverbs. 424. Adverbs are words qualifying verbs and ad- jectives, as also other adverbs. In respect to form, they are Primitive, i. e. such as cannot be traced to. simpler forms, or Derivative. 425. The majority of Derivative Adverbs are formed from adjectives in the following manner: Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions (ending in (is, and er) form the adverb by changing the genitive ending i into e. Examples are: 146 Nominative. Genitive. Adverb. lentils, sloiv lent! lente, slowly, leisurely rectus, right recti recte, rightly, correctly llbgr, free lib^ri llbere, freely pulchSr, fine pulchri pulchre, finely Nominative. Genitive. c616r, fast " celeris ISlix, happy felicis fortis, brave fortis libens, willing libentis patiens, patient patientis dillgens, careful diligentis elggans, elegant elegantis sellers, skillful Bollertis bonus, good, makes bSn6, well; malus, had, makes male, badly, 426. Adjectives of the Third Declension form their adverbs in ter, changing the genitive ending is into iter; but those in ns and rs change the genitive ending is into er: Adverb. cSleriter, fast feliciter, happily fortiter, bravely libenter, ivillingly patienter, patiently diligenter, carefully eleganter, elegantly sollerter, skillfully [97. 98.] 427. Some Adverbs from Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions have both forms, as: firmus, strong firme, firmiter, strongly human us, human humane, hiimaniter, humanhf largus, large large, largiter, largely opulent us, rich opulenter only, richly violentus, violent vi61enter ** , violently 428. A few Adverbs differ in meaning from their adjectives, as: sanS, certainly from sanus, sound valdg, very from validus, strong 429. The Neuter Accusative of some Adjectives of the 3d declension is used as an adverb, as: facilg, easily impunS, with impunity difficile, with difficulty r^cens, recently 430. Certain Cases of Adjectives, Nouns and Pronouns are often used as Adverbs: rar5, rarely continue, forthwith tuto, safely falsO, falsely cito, quickly, soon fortuito, by chance consulto, purposely gratuito, gratuitously — 147 -. own accord manifesto, clearly mSritO, deservedly immerito, undeservedly nScessariO, necessarily perp6tuo, perpetually subito, sudderily certo, in fact certe, assuredly crebrO, frequently quo, whither fortg, by chance noctu, by night Some Phrases or Clauses have grown into Adverbs, as: quodammodo, in a certain man- quotannis, every year [ner videlicet = vid6r6 lie6t ) . scTlicot = scire lic6t 5 nudius tertius = nunc diPs ter- tiiis, the day before yesterday sScretO, secretly s6ro, late v6ro, in truth v6re, truly liilc, this way spontg, of one' gratis, gratis ceterum, for the rest nimis, nimium, too much primiim, first tantiim, only 4SI. ant6a, before interga, meanwhile proptgrea, therefoj-e liodle (= hoc die), fo-day raagnoperS, particularly obvTam, toivards 432. Adverbs in Tm are formed from Supines, as: certatim, emulously sensim, little by little nomiiiatim, expressly (*arptim, by pieces privatim, in private cursim, speedily etatim, steadily passim, hei^e and there raptim, hastily 433, Similar Adverbs (in atim, itim) are formed from Nouns, as: i>Tadatim, step by sfpp vicisslm, by turns trlbiitim, by tribes vTritTm, man by man 434, A number of Adverbs come from Nouns by changing -the Genitive-ending into Itiis: antiquitus, of old radicitus, by the roots (iTvinitus, divinehj funditfis, from the foundation eaelitus, from heaven pgnitus, thoroughly 435. In respect to Meaning. Adverbs may be divi-' ded into several classes: Adverbs of Place and Motion, Adverbs of Time and Succession, Adverbs of Manner and Quality. — 148 436. Adverbs of Place are those which answer to the question where? iibi? whither? quo? whence? unde? ubi where? ibi, there hic, here illic, there quo, whither? eo, thither unde, whence inde, thence hinc, hence alicubi, somewhere ubique, everywhere qua? hy what way? nusquam, nowhere hue, hither illuc, thither istinc, thence illinc, ^/len obviam, toward alTbi, elsewhere l.jris, outside proeiil, /ar retro, hackivard foras, ou^ undique, /rom aZZ ^ sides desuper, from above The following are also used as Prepositions: circk^ aroundj about intra, ins i^^e pone, post, &(?7iin(2 contra, opposite supra, above prope, near extra, outside infra, below coram, personally 437, Adverbs of Time are those which answer to the question when? quando ? how long? quamdiu ? how often? quotiens ? quando ? when? aiiquando, once interdum, sometimes interim, meanwhile interea, in the meantime illico, on the spot Sim 111, at the same time jam, already tandem, at last demum, not until alias, at other times nunc, noio hodig, to-day modo, just now nCiper, lately pridem, long since quondam, once antea, before tunc, at that time tum, then prldig, the day before praet6r6a, besides lierl, yesterday nudius tertius, the day befoi^e yesterday postrldig, the day after eras, to-morroio perendie, the day after to-mor- unquam, ever [row nunquam, never semper, always plerumque, commonly propediem, one of these days posthac, hereafter postea, afterwards mox, soon mane, early in the morning Interdiu, by day vesperi, in the evening noctu, by night delude, afterwards siibindg, presently deinceps, in turn abhinc, hereafter ante, before, also used as a Preposition. — 149 — quamdm? how long? tamdiu, so long aliquamdiu, some time dudum, a short time ago quotiens? how often? totiens, so often aliquotiens, some times iteriim, a second time rarsiis, again denuo, anew short time usque, right on parumper ) paulispgr K tantisp^r, so long saepe, often quotidiS, every day quotaniiis, every year s6mel, once bis, twice, and all the other Numeral Adverbs, 241. 438, Adverbs of manner are those which answer to the question how? quomodo? To this class belong all Adverbs derived from Adjectives, 42S. Besides these regular Adverbs of manner mark the following: how quomodo 1 quemadmodum ! lit, iiti, as ita ) adeo, so, to that degree quam, how, how much tarn, so, so much ^P^5^ I otherwise secus ) satis, enough satius, rather valds 1 admSdum j ^'^^^ 'quantopere, how greatly tantopere, so greatly nirais, nimium, too much praecipuS, especially frustra, in vain t em ere, at random vix, hardly modo, only ideo \ propterea >- thereft)re idcirco ) it6m, just so, also porro, moreover^ then ferg, fermg, almost saltem, at least paeng, nearly fortasse, perhaps palam, publicly repente, suddenly -iw ^, > to wit scilicet ( paulatim, by degrees penitus, wholly plane, quite omnino, at all nae ) . iitiqug \^i(^riyrate sang, certainly nimirum, to be sure f"» Ino hand ) haudquaquam ) . n€quaquam 1 n6-quid6m, not even neutiquam, not at all immo, on the conti^ary ^^! \why quare ) propg, near ) , clam, secretly \ ^'^° P'^^P no means — 150 — 439, The following Adverbs are called Correlatives, because they answer to each other. Interrogatiye. Demonstrative. I. Of Place: Relative. ubi? where? ibi, there ubi, where qua? which way? hac, this way qua, which way und6? whence? inde, thence hinc, hence illinc, thence istinc, thence undg, whence quo? whither? 60, thither hue, hither illuc, thither istuc, thither II. 0/ !nme; quo, whither quando? when? turn, ^/len tunc, at that time cum, it7/ien quStiens? how often? t6tiens, so often III. Of Manner: quQtiens, as o/]5e?i as quomodo? how? ita, sic, 50, <7ius ut, uti, as quam? how much? tarn, so much quam, as {185. 186,] Comparison of Adverbs. 440. Adverbs derived from adjectives are gener- ally compared like their primitives. Their com- parative is like the neuter comparative of the ad- jective; the superlative is formed from the super- lative of the adjective by changing us into e. Positive. Comparative. Superlative, clarg, brightly clarius, more brightly clarissim6, most brightly facilS, easily facllius, more easily facillime, most easily dlligentSr, carefvJly diligentius, more care- diligentissim^, most fully carefully patient^r, patiently patientius, more pa- patientissime, most tiently patiently 151 — - 4:41, The following are Irregxilar: bene, well male, badly multum, much non multum, little magnopere, greatly did, /or a long time saepg, often props, near melius, better pejus, worse plus, more minus, lesa magis, more diutiLis, longer saepuis, oftener propius, nearer optimg, best pessimg, worst plurlmum, most minime, least maximg, most diutissimg, very long saepissTme, oftenest proxime, nearest 44:2, The following are Defective: detSrius, worse d6terrim6, worst ocius, more quickly Ocissimg, most quickly merito, deservedly nuper, lately satis, enough sScus, otherwise potiiis, rather prius, sooner satius, better sequius, less potissimum, most of all primum, primo, j^rs^ mSritissimo, most deservedly nuperrimg, very lately [97. 98.\ Prepositions. 443, The Latin Prepositions are regularly used with some special case of a noun or pronoun, either the Accusative or Ablative. 444, The following are used with the Accusative: ad, tOj atj toward 6b, forj on account of adversus, adversum, against, p§n6s, in the power of toward ante, before apud, at, with, near circa, circum, around circitSr, about, near CIS, citra, on this side of contra, against, opposite to erga, toward, unto extra, without, beyond infra, under, beneath inter, between, among intra, within juxta, near^ beside ^ pSr, through, by, during pone, behind post, after, behind praeter, past, beside, except propg, near propter, on account of, close by secundum, after, next to, accord- ing to, along supra, above trans, across, over, beyond ultra, beyond, on the further side of, past versus, toward ^^^^ ^2, 237. 23S.} 152 — 445. The following are used with the Ablative: a ) ab V from^ away from abs) absque, without^ hut for clam, without the knowledge of coram, in presence of cum, with d5, from, downfrom,of==ahout 6, ex, froniy out of prae, for, before, in compari- son with pro, for, instead of sine, without ten us, as far as, up to 446. Prepositions with the Accusative and Ablative, but strictly with a difference of meaning: in, into, in; sub, under; subter, beneath; super, above. in and sflb, whea followed by the Accusative, indicate motion to, when by the Ablative rest in, a place. [93. 94, 95. 96. 187. 188. 239, 240,] Conjunctions. 447. Conjunctions connect words and sentences. According to their use, they are divided into Co- ordinating and Subordinating Conjunctions. Co-ordinating Conjunctions. 448. Co-ordinating Conjunctions are those that join together sentences of equal order or rank. 449. CopulatlYe. 6t \ atqnep^^ ac J et . . et, both . . and cum. .turn, both, .and especially modo . . modo ) > now . . now nunc . . nunc ( turn . . turn, then . . then tarn . , quam, both . . and non solum. . sed etiam non modo . . sed etiam non tantum . . sed 6tiam quoque ) V V >• and not n6qu6 | n6qu6..n6que] ^w « y neither, .nor nSc . . nee j neque..-que, on the one hand not . . and on the other St..n6que, on the one hand.. and on the other hand not > not only . . but also — 153 — 450. Disjimctiye. aut \ -ve [ aut.. aut ) ^.^j,^*, x^-. vel . . vel i sive . . siv6, whether . . or sive J 451. Adrersative. autem . sed v6rum V but vero at J attamen, but yet atqui, but for all that tamen, v evert heless ceteriim, for the rest at vSrO, but in truth verura enim v6ro, but in truth verumtamen, hut yet 452. Causal. nam, namqu6, /or 6nim, ^t6nim, for 453. niative. itaque | igitur V therefore ergo ) eo J k1(m") V o?i ^/^a^ account idcirco ; proinde, accordingly propterga, therefore quarg quam ob rem quapropter \ ^'^herefore quocirca J [99. 100. 189. 190. 295-SOO. Subordinating Conjunctions. 454. Subordinating Conjunctions are those which join a subordinate sentence to that on which it de- pends. 455. Temporal. postquam, after that, after cum, when ^y , f™ [ while, until ubi, when donSc ) T?l^*= A as soon as quoad t/jj to simulatque ) quamdiu, as long as lit primum [ the first moment antequam ) ^.^^ ^^^, ^^^^^^ iS '' ' " [257, »58,} cum primura f that prmsquam ) — 154 — 456, Causal. '^'"'^X because quod ) cum, as, since qu6niam quando quandoquTd^m siquidSm smce^ in as much as [259. 260, \ 457. SI, if nisi, unless si nOn, if not dummodo \ dum V if only J provided modo ) Conditional. sT modo, if only sin, if not, but if quodsi, but if dummodo n6 \ dum ne I provided only not modo ne } [26i, 262. \ 458. ets! \ tametsi [ etiamsi > althougli quamquam j 459. ut, that, in order that n6, that not, lest nSvS (neu), and (that) not Concessire. licet quamv cum ut Is [ though, suppose, r whereas Final. quo (= ut eo), t?i 07^der that quominus, that not 460. ut, so that Consecutive. ut non quin b so that not [253-256.] a.v, lihe as quemadmodum . . ita 462. -ne \ num ( utrum n^^^^^iher an J a ) Comparative. tanquam quasi ut si ac si proinde ac si as if Interrogative. nonne, whether not annon i necnS ' ^ or not [109, no.} — 155 — Interjections. 463. An Interjection is not in the proper sense a part of speech, since it is not in granunatical con- struction with a sentence, but is thrown in as a direct intimation of feeling or of will. 4:64. The Interjections most commonly used are: Of painful feeling or suffering: Tiei, heii, dh^ alas! 0, oh I vae, alas^ woe! Of surprise or astonishment: 6cc6, 6n, behold! hem, oho! o, oh! Of calling attention: heus, ho! o, lo! ohe, holloa! prO, hollo! WORD-FORMATION. 465. There are two modes of forming words, viz.: Derivation, or the formation of words by deriva- tive endings (suffixes), and Composition, or the com- bination of two words expressing distinct ideas so as to form one word expressing one idea. 466. With reference to derivation^ words are distinguished as primitive or stem- words, and derivative; with reference to com- position^ as simple and compound. The derived and compounded words greatly outnumber the so-called stem-words. Derivation. 467. All words which may be grouped into one family so as to associate their meaning are said to have a common ground-form or Root. Thus: aciio, -ere, to whet acus, -us, a needle acutus, -a, -um, sharp acer, -ris, -re, sharp acuaaen, -Tnis, acuteness acerbtis, -S, -um, sharp acies, -ei, an edge acldus, -&, -um, sour may all be retraced to the ROOT AC. — 156 — 468, The Stem must be distinguished from the Root. The stem is that part of the word which remains after taking away the Inflections, as: acii-Sre, to whet, stemacii.. Again, the root is that part of the word which remains after taking away the Suffix; thus the verb-stem S»cii belongs to the root AC. 469, As a rule, Derivatives are formed by means of Sufiftxes, or significant endings which are added to the stem-word to define or modify its meaning. Derivation of Verbs. 470, Primitive Verbs. Most verbs of the Third Conjugation, the Irregular Verbs and a few vowel-stems, namely: dar6, star6, flgre, nare, n6re, rSri, are to be regarded as Primitives. Verbs derived from Verbs. 471, Frequentatives end in are or itare, and denote a for- cible or repeated action; they are derived either from Supines in sum or turn, as: dico, / say dictQm dictare, to dictate habeo, I have habitum habitare, to have frequently curro, / run cursum cursare, to run about or from the Present of the 1st, 2d, and 3d Conjugations, as: clamo, / cry clamare clamitare, to cry out aloud lateo, / am hid latere latitare, to lie hid ago, / do agere agitare, to drive 472. Inceptives (Inchoatives) denote the beginning of an action. They are formed from vowel-stems (1st, 2d, and 4th Conju- gations) by adding sc, and from consonant-stems (3d Conjugation) by adding isc. The great majority of Inchoatives in asco and esco come from Substantives and Adjectives, as: puerasco, -ere, from pu6r, to attain the age of boyhood silvescS, -erg, from-silva, to grow wild mitesco, -ere, from mitis, to become mild 473s Desideratives denote desire or tendency. They are formed by changing uriis of the Future Participle into iirio, and are of the 4th Conjugation. Only a few are in common use: esurio, -irg, to be hungry, from edo, esurus m6riturio, -ire, to wish to die, from morior, raoriturus. — 157 — 4:74. Diminutives denoting a feeble or jpetty action end in illare, and are of the First Conjugation, as: cantillare, to chirp scrlbillare, to scribble. Verbs derived from Substantives and Adjectives. 475. Verbs from Substantives and Adjectives are commonly called Denominatives. They belong to the First, Second, and Fourth Conjugations. Verbs from Substantives signify either to supply with that which the Substantive denotes, or to use or apply it Verbs from Adjectives usually signify, either as intransitives, to be in or to pass into the condition denoted by the Adjective^ov else, as transitives, to reduce something to that state; for examples see below. 476. Active Verbs of the First Conjugation (transitive) : signiim - signare, to mark vulnus - vulnerarS, to wound curvus - curvarS, to bend nudus - nCidare, to strip macula - maciilare, to spot saniis - sanare, to heal nOmen - nominarg, to name aptus - aptar€, to fit vox - vocare, to call liber - liberare, to free 477. Active Verbs of the Second Conjugation (intransitive) : flos - florerS, to bloom albiis - albere, to be white frons - frondere, to be in leaf calvus - calvere, to be bald lux - ICicere, to shine flavus - flavere, to be yellow 478. Active Verbs of the Fourtb Conjugation (either intransitive or transitive): finis - finire, to finish mollis ~ moUire, to soften poena - punire, to punish stabilis - stabilire, to establish vestis - vestire, to clothe lenis - lenire, to assuage sitis - sitire, to be thirsty saevtls - saevTrS, to rage tussis - tussire, to cough siiperbus-superbire, to be proud servus - servire, to serve ferox -• ferocire, to be furious 479. Deponent Verbs of the First Conjugation, signifying con- dition, employment: dominus - dSmmari, to be master auceps - auciipari, to catch birds famulus - famulari, to serve convlva - convivarT, to banquet aemulus - aemulari, to emulate comes- com it ari, to accompany fur - furari, to steal aqua - aquari, to fetch water — 158 — Derivation of Substantives. Substantives derived from Substantives. 480, Diminutives generally end in: ulus, uia., Glum; culiis, cGla, ciiliim, and regularly take the gender-ending of their Primitives: nidiis, a nest nldulus, a little nest riviis, a brook rivulus, a streamlet mensa, a table mensula, a little table saxum, a rock saxulum, a little rock fratSr, a brother fraterciiliis, a little brother pass6r, a sparrow passerciilus, a little sparrow arbor, a tree arbuscula, a small tree mtlniis, a gift munuseulura, a little gift 481, After a vowel, oliis, oia, olQm are used. Some nouns form Diminutives in ellus, ella, elliiinj rarely illiis, illS, illiim. films, a son filTolus, a little son gladius, a sword gladiolus, a small sword filia, a daughter filiola, a little daughter atrium, a hall §.tri61um, a small hall libgr, a book libellus, a little book tabiila, a table tabella, a tablet lapis, a stone lapillus, a Utile stone signum, a mark sTgillum, a seal 482, The Suffix armm designates the place where any thing is kept, as: columbarium, dove-cot from columba herbarium, herbarium *^ herba granarium, a granary *' granum pomarium, an orchard ^* pomum semmariiira, a seed-plot *^ sSmen 483, The Suffix etum used with names of trees and plants, designates the place where they grow in abundance: fruticetum, a copse from frutex myrtetum, a myrtle grove " myrtus quercetum, a forest of oaks " quercus vinetum, a vineyard " viniim — 159 — 484, The Suffix flS annexed to names of animals designates their stall or fold: bovilS, stall for cattle from bos gquilS, a stable for horses *' gquus 5vil6, a sheepfold *' ovis caprllS, a stall for goats ^' capSr 485, The Suffix ina indicates especially the state, condition^ or occupation of a person; sometimes also the place where an occupation is carried on: mgdiclna, the medical art from m^dTcus sutrina, a shoemaker's shop " sutor tonstrlna, a barber's shop ^' tonsor 486, The Suffix iiim added to names of persons forms Ab- stracts signifying character, ranl% &c., and Collectives, as: servitTum, servitude from serviis sacerdotium, priesthood '' sacerdOs ministSriLim, ministry '• minister exsilium, banishment ^' exsul 487, Patronymics, denoting parentage, generally end in: Ides, ides, iMes, ^des (Masculine); is, eis, ias (Feminine): Priamides, son of Priam from Priamus AtYid&s, son of Atreus ** Atreus ThestiM^s, son of Thestius *' Thestius Aen&Mes, son of Aeneas '' Aeneas Tantalis, daughter of Tantalus ^* Tantalus ^^Y^\% daughter of Nereus ** NSreus Thestias, daughter of Thestius '^ Thestius Substantives derived from Adjectives. 488, From Adjectives are formed various Abstract Nouns with the Suffixes: ia, (i)tia, ities, (T)tas, (i)tud8, nionia. gratia, favor from gratus malitia, badness ^* malus segnitia, segnitigs, sloth '^ segnis cSleritas, swiftness ** celer libertas, liberty ** lib6r solitudo, solitude ** solus acrimOnia, sharpness " ac6r 160 — Substantives derived from Verbs. 489, Derivatives in 6r, Qm and eia from verb-stems signify, in general, the act or state expressed by the verb: amor, love from amarS timor, fear * ' timere furor, rage * ' fiirerg gaudium, joy * ^ gauderg odium, hatred * * 6diss6 querela, a complaint * * quSri cautela, a caution * * caverg tutela, protection ' ' tiitarl 490, Derivatives in tor and sor from Supines denote the personal agent: monitor, a monitor from moneo, -Itflm lector, a reader ** 16g6, lectttm audit(5r, a hearer " audio, -itflm messor, a reaper ** mgto, messQm cursor, a runner " curro, cursfim 491, A few Derivatives in t6r are formed in imitation of these, from Substantives, as: viator, a traveler^ from via; janit5r, a doorkeeper^ fromjanua. 492, The corresponding feminine ending is trix^ but is less common than the mascuhne: adjutor, adjutrix, an assistant from adjilvarg fautor, fautrix, a promoter ** fav6r§ praeceptor, praeceptrix, a ^eac/ier *^ praeeipere victor, victrix, a conqueror ^^ vincerS 493, The Suffixes ti5, tus and sGs (gen. us), tura and sura form abstract nouns from Supines and denote the act itself: actio, an action from ago - actum inventio, an invention motiis, a motion curs us, a running consensus, consensio, agreement armatCira, equipment conjectQra, a conjecture pictura, a painting cons Lira, a judging invenio - inventtini movCo - motum curro - cursum consentio - consensGm armo - armatflm conjicio - conjectuni pingo - pictiim censeo - censfim ~ 161 — Of these only a few become Concrete nouns: accusatiS, a hill of indictment from accCiso - accusatfim commentatio, a treatise " comraentdr, - atdiii oratio, a speech " 5ro - oratttm possessiones, an estate ** possidfio - possesstim venatio, game ** venOr - vSnattim 494. Derivatives Jn mSn, mentum, filiim, buliim, cultlni denote an instrument for performing the act expressed by the verb or a place for its performance: 16vam6n, alleviation agmSn, a train fl(im6n, a river volQm^n, a roll alTmentura, nourishment jaculum, a javelin p^biiliim, fodder vSnabuliim, a hunting spear stabulum, a stable cublculiim, a bedroom 495. Derivatives in crfim and trt&m denote instrument or locality: fulcrum, a prop sgpulcrum, a grave aratriim, a plow claustriim, a bar rostrum, a beak lavacrum, a bath Derivation of Adjectives. Adjectives derived from Verbs. 496. The Suffixes bundiis and eundiis have the general meaning of the Present Participle; in many the meaning is some- what strengthened. mirabundus, wondering from mirarl from 16var6 u ag6r6 u flii6r6 u volver6 a al6r6 u jacularl u' pascere u v6narl u stare u ciibarg d tri&m denol from fulclre u 86p61Ir5 u ararg u claudCrg u rod6r6 i(. lavarS vgrecundus, bashful " v6reri v6n6rabundu8, revering " v6n6rarl furibundus, raging ** fur^rS jncundus, pleasing " juvar6 vagabundiis, vagrant *^ vagarl — 162 — 497. The Suffix tdiis denotes the quality or state expressed by the verb: turbidus, troubled from turbarg validus, strong from valerC calidiis, warm ** calerg rapidus, rapid " rapSrS 498. The Suffixes Ills and bills denote capability^ generally in a passive sense: docilis, docile from docerg amabilis, amiable from amarA facilis, easy to do '' fac6r§ mobilis, moveable '^ mov^rg 499. The Suffixes ax and tiliis denote inclination, generally a faulty one: audax, daring from auderg crediilus, credulous from cred6r6 fallax, fallacious *' fall6re garriilus, chattering '* garrM Adjectives derived from Substantives. From Common Nouns. 500. The Suffix eiis expresses the material of which^ny thing is made: aureus, golden from aurum ferrSus, iron from ferriim argenteiis, silver " argentum lign6us, wooden *' lignum 501. The Suffixes: itls, icus, Iciiis, Ms, alls, aris, nus, Iviis, ensis, arliis denote belonging to: oratorius, of an orator from orator bellicus, warlike *' bellum latgricius, of brick " later virTlis, manly *' vir navalis, naval *^ navis mllitaris, military *' miles paternus, paternal ^^ pater aestlviis, belonging to summer *' aestas forensis, belonging to the forum *^ forum gregarius, belonging to a flock ^* grex 502. The Suffixes ostis and entQs denote fulness: pSriculosiis, full of danger from pgrTcalfim fructuosus, abounding in fruit ** fructiis turbulentus, full of trouble '' turba somnulentus, sleepy ^* somniis 503. The Suffixes atQs, itiis, utus denote provided with: ftlatus, winged from ala barbatus, bearded from barba pellltus, clad in skins " pellis cornQtus, horned ** cornii — 163 — 504. The Suffixes anils and iiiQs denote belonging to or coming from: urbanus, belonging to the city from urbs montanus, belonging to the mountain *' mons k^mlrm^^ produced by the ass ^^ asinus equinus, belonging to horses ** equus From Proper Names: 505. Adjectives with the Suffixes ianus, and more rarely anus and iniis are formed from names of persons: Caesarianiis, belonging to Caesar from Caesar Siillani, Sulla's veterans *' Sulla Verrlnus, belonging to Verres " Verres 506. The Suffixes eds and iciis are used with Greek names: Pythagorgiis, Pythagorean from Pythagoras Socraticus, Socratic ^* Socrates 507o Patrial or Gentile Adjectives (derived from the names of places or peoples) generally end in anus, inus, ensis, as (Gren. atis), and are also used substantively: Romanus, a Roman from Roma Amerlnus, ofAmeria *' AmSria Cannensis, of Cannae ** Cannae Arplnas (-atis), of Arpinum *' Arplniim 508. Greek names of places form Patrials in itis and aetis; as: Corinthius, of Corinth^ from Corinthiis; Smyrnaeus, of Smyrna^ from Smyrna. 509. From many names of peoples^ Adjectives are formed in Iciis and sometimes ius: Galllciis, Gallic from Gallus Thracius, Thracian from Thrax Persicus, Persian '^ Persa Syrius, Syrian *' Syria Adjectives derived from Adjectives. 510. From Adjectives are formed Diminutives in ulus, oliis, ellus and cuius in the same manner as from nouns, cuius is sometimes added to Comparatives: parvidus, very small from parviis aureSlus, gilded *' aureus pulchellus, beautiful little " pulcher pauperciilus, poorly " pauper majusculus, somewhat larger *' maj6r 164 — Adjectives derived from Adverbs. 511, A few Adjectives are formed from Adverbs: crastinus, of to-morrow from eras diutinus, lasting ' ' diu pristinus, former ' ^ prius matutlnus, belonging to the morning ' ' mane rgpentinus, sudden * ^ repents hesternus, of yesterday ' ' heri hodiernus, of to-day ' ' hodie diarniis, daily ' ' dill noeturnus, belonging to night * * noctQ Composition. 512. Every Compound may be regarded as con- sisting of two parts. The second part of the com- position expresses the principal idea (Principal term) and the first a Modification thereof. The principal term may be a Verb, an Adjective, or a Substantive. Compound Verbs. 513, The second part of a compound verb is always a Verb; also the first part may be a Verb^ but this only takes place when the second part is facio or fio: assugfacere, to accustom calefacere, to warm commonefacere, to remind patefacere, to open from assuescere & facere *' calere '' '' ^* commonere** ^' '' paterg '' '' 514, The first part of a compound verb may be a Noun, as; animadvertere, to notice from animus & vert ere manumittere, to set free " manus '^ mittere nsucapere, to acquire by use ^' usiis '* cap6r6 515, The first part of a compound verb may be an Adverb: benefacerg, to do good from b6n6 & fS,cSrS maledlcere, to curse '' mal8 *' dicere bgnedicere, to bless ** b6n6 '^ ** satisfacere, to satisfy '' satis *^ facerg sataggrg, to have one's hands full ** satis ^' agerS 165 516, The majority of Compound Verba are made with separ- able or inseparable Prepositions having the value of an adverb, as: avolare, to fly away adjicere, to throw to antepOnere, to set before circumdare, to surround colligere, to bring together decederg, to go down exponere, to set out iiiTrg, to go into interesse, to be between obstare, to stand opposed perleger^, to read through postponSrg, to put below praevid6re, to foresee praeterirg, to pass by propon6r6, to place before sQblre, to come under subterfugerS, to flee secretly amblre, to go around discedere, to depart reficere, to make again secernerg, to separate a, ab away ad tOj towards ants before cireum around com, c6n together de down 6, ex out in in, into inter between 6b toward, against p6r through post after, inferior prae before praeter past, beyond pro before Biib under subter underneath, secretly amb around dis asunder, apart r6 back, again 83 apart 517, In composition with Prepositions, the vowels a and S of the simple verb are changed into i, and the diphthong ae into i; au generally becomes o or uj before two consonants a becomes e, but e is retained: facere, to make conficere, to accomplish Smere, to buy rSdimgre, to redeem quaerere, to seek conquirere, to search out plauder^, to clap explodere, to hiss off claudere, to shut concludSre, to close up f^cgrg, to make confectiis, accomplished pellere, to drive compellerg, to force For Irregularities compare the Indeoo of Verbs (pag. 277) with reference from each to the paragraph where its conjugation is described. 518, Prepositions in Composition often undergo a change of their final consonant which is called Assimilation. The Rules of this assimilation may be seen in the following: — 166 — 519. a, ab, abs. a before m and v, and in afui: amitter^, avellerg, afiii, afiigram; ab before vowels and j, b, b, d, 1, n, r, s: abire, abundarg, abbreviare, abnuSre, abborrere, abjurarg; as before p: asportare, aspernarl; au before f: aufugere, auferre; abs before c, t: abscedere, abstinerg, abstraher6. 520. ad. ad before vowels, j, h, b, d, f, m, n, q, v: adamarg, adferre, adqulrere, advolare, adjuvare, adnuntiarg; ac before c (not so good before q): accire, adquirere (acquirer^); ag & ad before g: aggerere & adger6r6, aggredl & adgrSdi; a & ad before gn, sp, sc, st: agnoscere, adgnoscere; aspicerg, adspic6re; asplrar^; ad & al before 1: adlevare, allevare; adloqui, alloqui; ap before p: appargre, appellare, appon6r6, applicare; ad & ar before r: adripere & arripere; adrldere & arridere; ad & as before s: adsignare & assignare; adserere & asserer6; at before t: attendere, attribiier^, attinggre, attrahere. 521. ante becomes anti in: antistare, anticipare. 522. circiim may drop its final m before 60, ire: circumeo, circueo, commonly circiiitus, circtiitio. 523. com (= ciim). com before b, p, m: combiberg, comparare, committSre; con before c, d, f, g, j, n, q, s, t, v: concludere, condere, congredi, conjungerg, continerg; con & col before 1: conlabi & coUabT; conlocare & collocarS; cor before r: corrigere, corripgre, eorrOdere, corrumperS; CO before vowels and h (except comedo): coire, cohaerere, cogere (= c5agere), c56m6r6; CO before gn, and in a few words before n: cognoscO, conecto, coniveo, conltor, oonubium. 524. e, ex. ex before vowels and h, c, p, q, s, t: exTre, exciperS, exhtbSre, exsist6r6; Exception epOt^rS; e before b, d, g, j, 1, m, n, r, v: eligSrg, ejicere, evaderS, erumperg, ebib^rg, edlc§r§; ef before f: elTerrg, efficerg, effiiggr^, ef!6d6r6; — 167 — 525. 5n. in before vowels and h, c, d, f, g (but not before gn), j, n, q, s, t, V: mire, inhlbSre, ingerere, inquirere, inficSre, invehere; in, sometimes il before 1; in & ir before r: inlidere & illiderg; inrumpere & irrump6r6, irru6r6; ini before m, b, p: immittgre, imbuere, imponere, impSrarg; i before gn: ignorare, ignoscerS. 526. 6b. ob before vowels, j, h, b, d, 1, m, n, r, s, t, v: oboedire, objicere, oblivisci, obreperg, obstare, obting6r6; oc before c; of before f; og before g; op before p: occurrere, offerrg, oggerere, opponerg, opprimgre; b is dropped in omittere, 6p«^rir6, ostend^rg (= obs-tendere). 527. pgp. per unchanged, except before 1, as: pellegerg = perlegere; pellic6r6 = perlic6r6. In derivatives of jiirarS, the r is dropped, as: pej6rar6 = perjurar^. 528. sttb. sub before vowels, h, j, b, d, 1, n, s, t, v: siibiggre, subjungere, subtraherg, subvert6r6, subhastare; sue before c; suf before f; sug- before g: succedSre, succumbere, sufFocare, sufficere, sugg6r6r6; sum & sub before m; sup before p; sur & sub before r: summittere & submitter^; supponere; surripgre & subrTperS; sus (= subs) occurs in: susciperg, suscitare, suspenderg, sustmere, sustentare, sust uli; su before sp: suspicere, suspIrarS, suspectare. 529. trans. trans before vowels and b, c, f, g, p, r, t, v: transaggre, transfugere, tr anspongre, tr ansgredl, transvShgrg ; tran before s, and always before sc: transilire, transcribere, transcendSre, trans6r6re,transu6re; trans and often tra before j, d, 1, m, n: tradere, trajicere, transmitter^ & tramitter^, tradtlc§r6; — 168 — Compound Substantives. 530. Compound Substantives are made up: 1. Of a substantive and a following verbal stem; the vowel connecting the two parts is i, as: agricola, a farmer from ager & colere armiger, an armor-bearer *' arma '^ gererS artifex, an artist *^ ars ** facerg parricida, a parricide '^ pater " caedere 2. Of two substantives or a substantive and an adjective: solstitium, solstice from sol & statio ruplcapra, a miZcZ ^oa^ '* rupSs '' capra legislator, a law-giver '^ lex *' lator jusjurandum, an oa^/i *' jus '' jurandum aequinoctium, equinox '^ aequus '' nox 3. Of a substantive and a preceding particle j as: incuria, want of care from in & ciira pro verb! urn, a j^'i^overb ^^ pro ^' verbiim superficies, a surface " super ** facigs n6mo, no one ** n5 *^ homo Compound Adjectives. 531. Compound Adjectives are made up: 1. Of iivo nouns (including under this term adjective and sub- stantive), as: ignicolor, fire-colored from ignis & color misericors, tender-hearted ** miser '^ cor magnanimus, great-hearted ** magnus ^' animus alipes, wing-footed ** ala ** pes 2. Of a preposition with a substantive. In this combination the prepositions a, de, ex, in, se have negative power: concors, harmonious from con & cor amens ) gey^seless ** a ^^ mens demons) ** d6 ^^ mens iners, unskilled ^^ in ^^ ars sScurus, free from care ** sS ^' cura 3. Of a preposition with an adjective. The prepositions used in this way are: per, prae, very; siib, someivhat; in, not: perdifficilis, very difficult from per & difficilis praepotens, very powerful *' prae ^^ potens subrusticus, someivhat clownish ^' sub ^* rusticiis indignus, unworthy " in '* dignus 169 — Part Third. SYNTAX. The Sentence. 532. Syntax treats of the Agreement, Government, and Disposition of words in sentences. Sentences are of three kinds: Assertions, or Statements, as: consuetudo est altera na- tura; custom is second nature. Questions, as: quid est levius pluma?^ what is lighter than a feather? Commands (demands, wishes), as: divide et irapera; di- vide and rule. 533, The Assertive Sentence, as it is called, is the main type of all sentences, and the other two will be treated as varia- tions of it. Subject and Predicate. - 534. Every simple sentence is composed of two parts: Subject and Predicate. The Subject signifies that about which the assertion is made; the Predicate signifies that which is asserted of the Subject. In the sentence: aurum splendet gold glitters aurum is the subject; splendet the predicate. 535. The Subject of the sentence is in the Nominative Case, or so considered. — 170 -^ The Subject must be either a Noun, or some word or phrase stand- ing for a noun, but it may be contained in the termination of the verb itself: arbor floret tlie tree is blossoming hie laetatur, ille maeret this one rejoices^ that one is sad errare humanum est to err is human veni, vidi, vici / came, I saw, I conquered. 530, The Predicate must be either a Verb (Verbal Predicate), or an Adjective or what stands for an ad- jective with the verb esse (A(^'ective Predicate), or a Substantive with the verb esse (Substantive Predicate). The Verbal Predicate agrees in Person and Number with its subject. The Adjective Predicate (Adjective, Adjective Pronoun, Participle) agrees in Gender, Number, and Case with its subject. The Substantive Predicate agrees in Case with its subject. ego val6o, si vos valStis lam well if you ai^e well arbor est procgra the tree is tall usus est tyrannus custom is a tyrant. 537, When the predicate is a substantive with different termi- nations for the gender, such as: patron us patrona a protector dominus domina a master , mistress victor victrix a conqueror magister magistra a teacher rex regina a Jcing, queen it agrees with its subject also in number and gender, usus est optimus magister experience is the best teacher vita rustica parsimoniae magi- a country life is the teacher of Btra est frugality. 538, When referring to a subject of the neuter gender, a pre- dicate substantive with different terminations for the gender is always in the masculine gender. tempus est vitae magister time is the teacher of life. 539, When the predicate substantive is of the common gender, the adjective qualifying it takes the gender of the subject bona conscientia est tutissima a good conscience is the safest comes hominum companion of men. ^ in — 540. Like esse, to be, several other verbs take two Nominatives, one of the Subject and the other of the Predicate. These are: fieri, to become, be made creari, to be created evadere, to turn out coronari, to be crowned exsistere, to become dici, to be said, called manere, to remain vocari \ . . 77-1 .,_ _ ' 11- - > to 6e called videri, to seem appellari ) apparere to appear putari I ^^ j,^ ^^^^ ^ considered nasci, to be born naberi ) mori, to die cr6di, to be believed JLidicari, to be considered existimari, to be regarded rosa pulcherrimus flos habstur the rose is considered the most beautiful flower. 541. The Predicate of two or more Subjects is put in the Plural Number. Romiilus et Remus urbem Ro- Romulus and Remus founded mam condidSrunt the city of Rome. 542. Two or more singular nouns taken conjointly as a single idea may have a singular verb. Sometimes the verb agrees with the nearest nominative, and is understood to the rest. ratio et oratio societatis huma- reason and speech are the bond nae vinciilum est of human society naves et praesidium excessit the fleet and garrison departed- 543. A collective noun may take a plural verb, as: pars urbes petierunt finitimas, a part made for the neigboring towns. 544. In regard to the Gender of an Adjective Pre- dicate referring to two or more Subjects mark the following: AVhen the subjects are of the same gender, the adjective predi- cate is of that gender; as: mater et soror mortuae sunt mother and sister are dead. When the genders are different, the adjective predicate takes the masculine gender if the subjects are things with life, and the neuter if they are things without life; as: pater et mater mortiii sunt father and mother are dead divitiae et honOres incerta sunt riches and honors are uncertain. — 1T2 — When things with life and things without life are combined, the predicate adjective takes either the gender of the things with life, or is neuter, as: rex regiaque classis prefect! the king and the hinges fleet sunt set out natura inimica sunt libera civitas a free state and a king are et rex natural enemies. 545. When the Subjects are of Different Persons, the verb will be in the first person rather than the second, and in the second rather than the third. In Latin the speaker generally mentions himself first, ego et tu vicissitudinem forttinae you and I have experienced the expert! sumus vicissitude of fortune. [201. 202.] Attribute and Apposition. 546. The most usual Attribute of a Substantive is an Adjective (including under this term the Adjective Pronouns and Participles); it agrees with its Sub- stantive in Number, Gender, and Case. Gender. Number. a white flower ilos albiis flores albi a dark cloud nub6s opacft nubes opacae a golden vessel vas auretim vasS. aureSL Case. Gen. floris albi of a white flower ^* nCibis opacae of a dark cloud ** vasXs aurgi of a golden vessel 547. The Common Attribute of two or more Substantives of different gender is either repeated or agrees with the nearest. agri omnes et maria 1 omnes agri omniaque maria ( ^„ ^^^^^, ^^^ „^ ^^^ agri et maria omnia I omnes (et) agri et maria I 548. One Substantive placed after another to ex- plain it, is by Apposition put in the same Case, and, when practicable, in the same Gender and Number. — 1T3 — Socrates, sapientissimus vir Socrates^ the wisest of men philosophia, vitae magistra philosojphy^ the teacher of life Athenae, omnium doctrinarum Athens^ the inventor of all inventrlcea learning. 54:9. Nouns in Apposition are sometimes used to express the iime^ condition^ etc. of the action. Hercules juvenis leonem inter- Hercules^ when a young man, fecit slew a lion. 550, In like manner the Latin Adjective is used appositively where the English idiom employs an adverb. Adjectives thus used are those expressive of joy^ knowledge and their opposites, of order and position^ oitirae and season^ etc., as: libens, with pleasure solus, alone ultimus, last v61en8, willing (ly) totus, wholly medius, in the middle nolens, unwilling (ly) primus ) ^ . frequens, frequent (ly) invltiis, against one's will prior ) * sciens, knowing (ly) nemo saltat sobrTus, no one dances when sober; Socrates primus hoc docuit, Socrates was the first who taught this. [203. 204,] Agreement of Pronouns. 551. A Relative or Demonstrative Pronoun agrees with its antecedent in Gender, Numbw and Person, but the Case depends on the clause in which it stands. animal, quod sanguTnem habet, an animal which has blood can- sine corde esse non potest not be without a heart. When the Relative refers to a sentence, id. qu5d is commonly used. gloria invidiam vicisti, id quod you have overcome envy with est difficillimum glory ^ which is most difficult. With antecedents of different gender the pronoun conforms in gender to the rule for adjectives. (See 544.) pu6H et mulieres, qui capti the boys and women who had erant. . . been taken prisoners. . . With antecedents of different persons, the pronoun prefers the first person to the seconji, and the second to the third. (See 545.) ego et tu, qui eodem anno nati you and I who were born in sumus ... the same year . . , 552. Sometimes a Relative or Demonstrative Pronoun agrees with a word in apposition or with a predicate rather than with its antecedent: ama justam gloriam, qui est love real glory which is the fructus verae virtutis fruit of true virtue rerum caput hoc erat, hie fous this was the head of things^ this the source. 553. is, he, and idem, the same^ are the Antecedents of Re- latives: [^^^^^ _ . ( the same who '■ same as r. .{^''f'' .^ .{the. (is) qui < such as laem qui -< ^j^^ ( such that ( but is, when Antecedent, is often suppressed, especially when it would stand in the same case as the Relative: quern dii diligunt adulescens (he) whom the gods love dies moritur , young. 554. An Adjective or Apposition belonging in sense to the Ante- cedent, sometimes appears in the relative clause in agreement with the relative. Themistocles de servis suis Themistocles sent the most quern habuit fidelissimum ad faithful of the slaves which Xerxem misit he had to Xerxes omnes gentes regibus paruerunt, all nations obeyed kings^ a kind quod genus imperii. . . of government which. . . 555. qui dicltur, qui vocatur, or quern dicunt, quern vocant are used in the sense of so-called. vestra, quae dicitur vita, mors est, your so-called life is death, 556, The Relative often stands at the beginning of a sentence where in English a demonstrative is generally used. quae cum ita sint aiid since these things are so. 557, The Relative is never omitted in Latin, as it often is in English. is sum, qui semper fui lam the same man I always was. - 175 — The Order of Words. 558. The Latin language allows greater freedom in the order of words than the English. The following practical rules will be found of value: In general, put the Subject first, and the Verb last. The Subject is followed by the words which modify it. The Verb is preceded by the words which depend upon it. Subject. Dionysius, Adjuncts of the Subject, tyrannus, Syracusis expulsus Adjuncts of the Predicate. Corinthi pueros Predicate. docebat. Dionysius, the tyranty after he had been driven from Syracusej taught boys at Corinth. 559. An Adjective or dependent genitive follows the word to which it belongs; iiomen bonum instar unguenti a good name is like sweeUsmel- fragrantis ling ointment metus mortis musica depellitur fear of death is dispelled by music. 560. When a Substantive is modified by an adjective and a genitive, the usual order is: Adjective — Genitive — Substantive. magna frumenti vis plenty of corn, 561. A Numeral adjective or one Essential to the meaning of the phrase, goes before its noun: omnes homines decet it becomes all men malum vas non frangitur a useless pitcher does not get broken. 562. A Demonstrative pronoun precedes the noun; Relatives or Interrogatives stand first in their sentence or clause; Adverbs are commonly put next to the word they qualify. haec te victoria perdet this victory will ruiyi you qui sitiunt, silentio bibunt they who are thirsty drink in silence quis custodiet ipsos custodes? who is to look after the keepers? male parta male dilabuntur evil gotten, evil spent — 116 — 563. Prepositions regularly precede their nouns except tgnus and versiis; but monosyllabic prepositions are often placed between the adjective and substantive; as: magna cum cura, with great care. 564:. Conjunctions generally stand at the beginning of their sentence or clause. The Conjunctions autem, hut; enim, for; v6ro, hut; igitur, then^ follow one or more words in their clause, quidem, indeed; quoque, also^ come after the emphatic word, ne . . quidem include the em- phatic word or words. 565. Words of kindred or opposite meaning are generally placed near each other for the sake of emphasis or contrast: manus manum lavat one hand washes the other. [202.] Construction of Cases. GENITIVE CASE. With Substantives. 566. The Genitive is especially the Case of a Sub- stantive that is added to another Substantive in order to limit or define the meaning. 1. If the qualified noun signifies some action or condition of which, if it were expressed by a verb, the noun in the Genitive would be the Subject, the case is called the Subjective (jenitive, as: amor Dei, the love of God (— God loves). 2. If the Grenitive would be the Object of the action expressed by the other noun in verb-form, we call it an Objective Genitive, as: amor Dei, love of (toward) God (= we love God). 3. The Genitive of the Personal Pronouns is commonly Objective; exceptions are nostrum and vestrum which are used as partitive Genitives (see below 6). Mark the following examples: studium nostri sympathy for us multi nostrum many of us meiior pars nostri the better part of us major pars nostrum the greater part of us. 4. The Possessive Pronoun is generally used as the Subjective Geni- tive, as: amicus mens, a friend of mine. Additional Attributes are put in the Genitive: tua ipsius soror, your own sister. — Ill — 5. The Grenitive is used to denote Quality, but only when the quality is modified by an Adjective; it is joined to a Substantive either attributively or jpredicatively^ as: vir maxlmi consilii a man of very great prudence TerentTus magni ingenii est Terence is a man of great talent. The Genitive of Quality, though less common than the Ablative, is always usod when Number, Measure, Time or Space are denoted. Paits of the body are in the Ablative only (see 616). exsilium decem annorum an exile often years Caesar fuit excelsa statura Caesar was of tall stature. 6. The Partitive Genitive expressing the relation of a Whole to its Parts is used: With Substantives of Quantity ^ Number^ Weighty as: medimnum tritici a bushel of wheat; With Pronouns^ Numerals^ Comparatives and Superlatives, as: quis vestrum? wliichofyou? regum ultimus, the last of the prior horum, the former of these kings Witfi Neuter Adjectives and Pronouns used as Nouns, but only in the Nominative or Accusative. Such are: tantum, so much qaantiim, as much aliquantum, somewhat multilm, much plus, more plurimiim, most pauliim, little minus, less minimum, least hoc, this id, illiid, istud, that nihil, nothing quod, which quid, what Idem, the same nihil novi, nothing new idem consilii, the same (of) advice quid novi? ivhat news? quid causae? what reason? The Genitive after these Adjectives and Pronouns may be a neuter adjective of the Second Declension, but not of the Third: aliquid boni, something good nihil melius, nothing better. With the Adverbs of Quantity^ Place ^ Extent: ^ilB, enough mA, where ^l^''' \ to this degree parum, too little nusquam, nowhere eo i nimis, too Tuuch affatim, plenty niinis lucis, too much light; hue arrogantiae, to this degree of insolence; ubi terrarum or gentium? where in the world? - 178 — 7. The Grenitive of Specification has the force of an Apposition, especially with vox, luord; nOinen, name; verbiim, word, as: vox voluptatis, the word ^ ^pleasure'' arbor abietis, a fir-tree; nomen regis, the title of king. 8. The Genitive is used with the Ablatives causa and gratia, for the sake of; also with ergo, on account of; insiar, like, causa, gratia, ergo commonly follow the Genitive. Mark the expressions: mea, tua, sua causa (not gratia) for my^ thy, his sake, honoris gratia, for honor's sake, instar montis equus, a horse like a mountain. 9. Frequently aedgs and templum, temple^ and sometimes other nouns are omitted, when no mistake can arise: ad Yestae ventum erat, they had arrived at the temple of Vesta. [221, 222,] With Adjectives. 567. Many Adjectives are followed by a Genitive to complete their meaning. The most common are: 1. Adjectives denoting Desire^ Kiioivledge, Recollection^ Parti- cipation^ Mastery., Fullness and their Opposites: ciipidus, eager., desii^ous expers, without share in stiidiosiis,, devoted to compos, capable, master of perltus, skillful in impos, not in possession of inscius J impotens, unable or powerless nesclus y ignorant to control ignarus ) pleniis, /iiZZ memor, mindful particeps, sharing., partaker of immeiir^r, unmindful endowed with 2. Participial Adjectives denoting permanent qualities (mostly ending in ns), as: dlligens, careful, lover of patiens, capable of enduring amans, fynd of impatiens, that cannot hear particeps consilii a sharer in the plan compos mentis in possession of one's mind cu[)idus gloriae eager for glory amans sui virtus virtue fond of itself 3. propriiis, own, and comniQnis, common, take the Genitive when the idea of property or peculiarity prevails. populi Romani est propria libertas, liberty is characteristic of the Roman people. t^^^- '^^^•l — 179 — With Verbs. 568, Verbs of Reminding, Remembering^ Forgetting take the Genitive. admQnere j meminissg) commonerS > to remind reminisci >• to rememher commonefacere ) rScordari ) oblivisci, to forget Verbs of Reminding, with the Accusative of the Persorty are fol- lowed by the Genitive of the Person or Thing to which the attention is called, te veteris amicitiae admoneo, I remind you of our old friendship. Verbs of Remembering and Forgettujg take the Genitive if a Person^ and either the Genitive or Accusative, if a Thing is remembered or forgotten, memini vivorum lam mindful of the living animus meminit praeteritOrum the mind remembers the past oblivisci nihil soles nisi injurias you are wont to forget nothing except injuries. When the Object is expressed by a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective, it is with all these verbs in the Accusative, as: hoc te admongo I warn you of this. mgmini, / remember, when referring to a contemporary, always takes the Accusative, memineram Catonem I remembered Cato. 569, Verbs of Valuing are joined with the Genitive, when the Value is expressed in a General or Indefinite Manner. Such Verbs are: aestimare, to value habSrg, to hold piitare, to reckon penderS, to weigh ducgrg, to take facere, to make, put ess6, to be (worth) The following are Genitives of general value: magni, much quanti, how much parvi, little pltirimi, maximi, most tanti, so much minimi, least pluris, more nihili, naught minorls, less flocci, a lock of wool, a straw — 180 — The Complete Phrases are, then, as follows: parvi pendere or aestimare, to esteem lightly magni ess6, to be of great account pluris ess6, to he of more account., to he worth more nihili dtlcSrS, to think nothing of magni aestimare or habere, to value highly pluris aestimare, to esteem of more value pliirimi aestimare, to value very highly minimi facere, to make of very little account flocci f acgre, to care not a straw for divitiae a me minimi putantur, riches are very little prized by me; operam tuam magni aestimo, your help I value highly. 570. Verbs of Accusing^ Convicting^ Condemning and Acquitting, with the Accusative of the Person, take the Genitive of the Charge. mcusarg ( , convmcere ) insimularg j ' ^ damnarS ) to condemn, find arguSrS j condemnare ) guilty arcess^rS ) ^^ summon absolverg, to acquit r6um fac6re ) honestam familiam sceleris ar- you accuse an honorable family giiis of crime aliquem levitatis convinc6re to convict one of levity. The Crime may be expressed by the Ablative with d6: accusare aliquem de vi, de re- to accuse one of assault, of ex- petundis, de veneficio tortion, of poisoning or by the Genitive with nomine or erimine, as: nomine conjurationis eondem- they were condemned on the nati sunt charge of conspiracy. Verbs of Condemning and Acquitting may also take the Ablative of the charge and the punishment, and always take the Ablative of fine; multare, to mulct, punish, is always construed with the Ablative, damnare capitis or capite to condemn to death Camillus decem milibus damna- Camillus was fined 10,000 tus est Manlius virtutem filii morte Manlius punished the valor of multavit his son with death. [22o, 226,) — 181 — . 571. The Subjective Genitive may be used as a Pre- dicate with the verbs esse and fieri to denote that to which something belongs or to which something is peculiar. In English the words part^ property^ duty, office, business, characteristic, are commonly supplied. Instead of the Grenitive of Personal Pronouns the Neuters of the Possessives: meurn, tuum, etc., are used. haec domus est Caesaris this house is Caesar^s temeritas est florentis aetatis, rashness is the characteristic prudentia senectiitis of youth, prudence of old age mentiri nou est meum to lie is not my way. 572. With the Impersonal interest (and sometimes also with refert), it concerns, interests, it is the interest of, it is of importance for, the Genitive is used to denote the Person or Thing concerned. The Genitive seems to be governed by causa understood; hence instead of the Genitive of the personal pronoun the Ablative singular feminine of the Possessives mea, tiia, sua, nostra, vestra is used with these verbs, as: mea interest, / am concerned; with omnium, however, nostrum and vestrCim must be used: omnium nostrum interest, it concerns all of us. refert seldom occurs with the Genitive, occasionally with mea, tua, etc., and most frequently without either such pronoun or a Genitive, as: nihil refert, no matter; quid refert, what matter? The thing which is of interest or importance is expressed: By a Neuter Pronoun, as: hoc vehementer interest reipublicae, this is of very much importance to the state; By an Infinitive, as: interest omnium recte facere, to do right is the interest of all; By an Accusative with the Infinitive, as: multum mea interest te diligentem esse, it is of great importance to me that you be diligent; By an Interrogative Sentence, as: multum mea interest utrum dili- gens sis necne, it is of great importance to me whether you are diligent or not ~ 182 — 573. The Degree of importance is expressed by: Adverbs: magnop6re, magis, maximg, pariira, etc. Neuter Adjectives: multiim, plus, plurimum, minus, etc. Genitives of Value: magni, pluris, parvl, tantl, etc. The Thing with reference to which one is interested is expressed by the Accusative with ad: magni ad honOrem nostrum interest, it is of great consequence to our honor. l^^'^- ^^^'l ACCUSATIVE CASE. Direct Object. 574. Active Transitive Verbs take the Accusative Case. The Object of a transitive verb in the active voice becomes Subject in the passive. boni cives amant patriam good citizens love their country patria a bonis civibus amatur their country is loved by good citizens. 575. Many verbs are intransitive in English which are both transitive and intransitive in Latin. Such are: dolerS, to grieve (for) rider e, to laugh (at) horrSrS, to shudder (at) sitlrS, to thirst (for). 576. Some intransitive verbs may take an accusative of kindred meaning, as: vitam jucundam vivere to live a pleasant life longam viam ire to go a long way. 577. Many Intransitive Verbs, especially verbs of motion, when compounded with prepositions, become transitive, and accordingly take an Accusativec The commonest of them are Compounds of: circum, per, praeter, trans. circumstare, to stand around praetSrire, to pass by permeare, to flow through transire, to cross triginta tyranni circumstet5runt the 30 tyrants stood around So- Socratem crates. i»07. aos.] 183 — Two Accusatives. Same Person. 578. Verbs of Naming, Making, Taking, Choosing, Showing admit two Accusatives of the same person or thing. facerS J efficere >- to make reddere ) ,,w ^ ^\ to elect eligerS ) designare, to appoint se praebgre ) to show, offer se praestare f one's self appellare ^ nommare ( vocare ( dicere > arbitrari existimare habere piitare judicare, to judge to name or call to regard, con- sider, thinky pronounce Neronem senatus hostem judi- cavit the senate declared Nero an enemy. Many other verbs, besides their proper Accusative, take a second, denoting purpose, time, character. Such are: dare, to give habere, to have Atlienienses Miltiadem sibi im- peratorem sumpserunt relinquere, to leave sumerS, to take the Athenians took Miltiades as their commander, [209. 210.] Two Accusatives. Person and Thing. 579. docere, edocere, to teach; celare, to conceal from, take two Accusatives, one of the person, and the other of the thing. Dionysius Epaminondam musi- cam docuit non te celavi sermonem Bionysius taught Epaminon- das music I did not conceal from you the conversation. The Passive of docere or edocere with the Nominative of the person and the Accusative of the thing is almost never used, but is replaced by discerg aliquid ab aliquo. Special uses worthy of note are as follows: edocere aliquem de aliqua re, to inform some one of something; celare aliquem de aliqua re, to keep some one ignorant of something. — 184 — 580. Verbs signifying to ask, to demand, to request^ to inquire take two Accusatives, one of the person, and the other of the thing. The commonest of them are: poscere ) ^ _ orare ) to ask, roi?ar6 \ , i,- ... . I to ask, . - . f ^ \ . f ^ - ^ I to ask, flagitare ^ ^^^^^'^ rogare \- entreat, mterrogare V -^ ^^^^^ postulare ) petere ) beseech quaerere ) ^ posce deos veniam ask favor of the gods me sententiam rogavit he asked me my opinion. But to this there are many Exceptions. We may also say: poscere or flagitare aliquid ab aliquo. We always say: postulare or petere aliquid ab aliquo; quaerere aliquid ab, ex, or de aliquo. 581. The verbs orare, rogare, to ask, request, and rogarS, interrogare, to ask, inquire, admit a double accusative only when the thing is expressed by the neuter of a pronoun or adjective, as: hoc te rogo, this I inquire of you. Otherwise we say: interrogare aliquem de aliqua re, to ask some one about something. 582. A noun as second accusative appears with the verb rogare only in the official phrase: sententiam rogare aliquem, to ask one for his opinion or vote, [211. 212.] Accusative vrith Impersonal Verbs. 583. The Accusative is used after the Impersonals: fallitme ^ it escapes my ^ecM, it becomes fugitme ^ notice, is un^ ^^^^^^^t^ it is unbecoming praeterit m6 ; known to me me fugit ad te scribere / forgot to write to you oratorem irasci dedecet it is unbecoming in an orator to be angry. An Infinitive or a Neuter Prononn or Adjective, rarely a Substantive, may be used as the Subject of d^cet and dedecet: mulierem decet flere it becomes a woman to weep parvum parva decent small things become the small neglegentia neminem decet carelessness becomes no one. — 185 — 584:. Certain Impersonal Verbs take the Person who feels in the Accusative, and the Exciting Cause in the Genitive, or if a verb, in the Infinitive; viz.: miseret, it excites pity piidet, it shames paenitet, it causes sorrow taedet ) .^ '.«..',.. . ^ - .[it wearies, tires. piget, it disgusts J grieves pertaesum eat) ' The Persons are expressed as follows: miseret me, I pity paenitet me, lam sorry j repent miseret te, thou pitiest piget me, / am grieved at, dis- miseret eiim, Tie jplties gustedwith misergt nos, we pity pudet me, I am ashamed miseret vos, you pity taedet me ) lamweary, misSret eos, they pity me pertaesum est ) tired me stultitiae meae pudet I am ashamed of my folly non me paenitet vixisse / am not sorry for having lived. Idiomatic Uses. 585. The Accusative is used in Exclamations, either with or without an Interjection. Oj miseras hominum mentes ! Oh, the wretched minds of men! 586. A Neuter Adjective or Pronoun is used adverbially in the Accusative, as: aliquid, somewhat; niliil, not at all; multum, niuchj etc. The Accusative is also found in a tew adverbial phrases^ as: maximam partem, mostly; id genus, of this kind; id temporis, at this time: nihil moveor / am not at all moved forum id temporis omni turha the forum was at this time free vacuum erat from all tumult {213, 214.} DATIVE CASE. With Verbs. 587. The Dative is the Case of the Indirect Object, denoting that for which^ to the benefit or loss of luhich any thing is or is done. It may be used with transi- tive and intransitive Verbs; dativus commodi et in- comrnodi: Dative of Advantage and Disadvantage. scribo vobis hunc librum, I write this hooTc for you; tibi seris, tibi metis, you sow for yourself you reap for yourself 186 — 58S. A large number of Transitive Verbs take along with the Accusative a Dative as an Indirect Object. The English expresses the Dative Relation by to or for; but where the verb implies removal, the Latin Dative frequently answers to the English Objective with from; for =in defence of is pr5. errantibus viam monstremus let us show the way to the erring dolor Bomnum mihi adimit grief takes away my sleep from pro patria mori to die for one's country. [me 589. Many Intransitive Verbs signifying to benefit or injure, please or displease, command or obey, favor or resist, trust or distrust, also indulge, believe, persuade, envy, threaten, spare, and the like, take the Dative. Examples are; prodessg, to do good n6c6r6, to do harm blandirl, to soothe fav5rg, to favor resisterS, to offer resistance plac6r6, to please displicgrg, to displease imperarg, to command oboedire, parSrg, to obey fid6r6, to trust diffiderg, to distrust irascl, to be angry with indulggre, to give upy to favor arbor resistit ventis cr6d$r6, to believe suadgre, to advise, recommend minari, imminerg, to threaten bSnedicerS, to bless nubgrS, to marry persuadere, to persuade^ con- mederi, to heal [vince supplicarg, to beg maledlcerg, to curse parcSrg, to spare stiidere, to devote one's self obtrectarS, to decry in vide r 6, to envy the tree offers resistance to the winds the upright man envies no one I will spare no pains. probus invidet nemini non parcam operae Among the most notable Exceptions are: J^Tf ! I to help, assist ^^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^' ^^^^^^^ adjuvarS j aequar6, to be equal jub6rg, to order vetare, to forbid which govern the AoonsatiTe. — 187 — 590. Passives are properly made only from transitive verbs. Intransitive Verbs w^hich govern a Dative have an Impersonal Passive with the same Case, in the following manner: Active. b5nus invidet ngmini, a good man envies no one Passive. miM Invidetur, / am envied tibi invidetur, thou art envied ei invidetur, he is envied nobis invidetur, we are envied vobis invidetur, you are envied lis invidetur, they are envied a bono invidetur neminl, no one is envied by a good man, 591. Some Verbs take the Dative or Accusative according to their signification: cavere alicui, to care for some one cavSre aliquem, to beware of some one cavSrg ab aliquo, to be on one^s guard consiilere alicui, to consult the interest of some one consulere aliquSm, to consult some one metuere aliquem, to fear some one metiiere alicuT, to fear for some one prOvidere aliquid, to foresee something providere alicui rei, to provide for something moderarl aliquTd, to manage something moderari alicui rei, to set bounds to a matter temperare aliquid, to rule something temperare aliciiT, to spare some one temperare ab aliqua re, to abstain from something. 592. The Dative is used with many Verbs com- poimded with the Prepositions: ad, ante, con, in, inter, 6b, post, prae, siib, super. Examples are: afferre, to bring tOj to render adimere, to take aivay interjicere, to throw in interessg, to be present praecurrere, to precede injicerS, to strike into imponere, to place on opponere, to oppose suppongre, to put under virtus omnibus rebus anteit virtue goes before all things onera quibusdam animalibus im- we put burdens on some anl. ponimus . mals. [2i5, 210,] — 188 — 593. Certain Verbs of giving and putting may take either a Dative with an Accusative, or an Accusative with an Ablative, as: dono tibi librum, I present you a book; dono te libro, I pi^esent you with a book; circumdat urbi murum, he puts a wall around the city; circumdat urbem muro, he surrounds the city with a ivall So with adspergere, to sprinkle^ and iriduere, to put on. 594. The Dative is used with esse to denote the Possessor, the thing possessed being the subject. When so used it is commonly translated by to have; mihi nomSn est, means my name is or / am called; the proper name is put either in the Nominative or the Dative, as: est mihi domi pater / have a father at home puero nomen est Carolus (Carolo) the boy's name is Charles. 595. Certain Verbs take the Dative to denote the purpose or end, and often at the same time another Dative of the person for whom or to whom. Such are: esse, to be mittere, to send habere, to hold nw^ . i to become, accipere, to receive vertere, to interpret, \ turn out venire, to come turn (against) dare, to put relinquere, to leave diicere, to count exemplo est formica the ant is an example malo est hominibus avaritia avarice is an evil to men dono dare to give as a present. 596. The Dative is used with the Gerundive to de- note the person on whom a necessity rests, as: adhibenda est nobis diligentia we must use diligence nobis omnibus moriendum est we all must die. 597. Yerbs in the Passive Voice are sometimes followed by a Dative of the Agent — instead of a, ab with the Ablative. res mihi tota provisa est / have had the whole matter provided for carmxna mihi scripta sunt nulla / have no poems written, [217. ;9jf«.3 Ji — 189 — With Adjectives, 598. Many Adjectives and Adverbs are followed by the Dative denoting that to which the quality is directed. The most common are those signifying: useful, fltj pleasant, like, near, easy, inclined, necessary, and their Opposites. acceptus, acceptable jucundus, agreeable amicus, friendly injCicundus, disagreeable inimicus, unfriendly, opposed molestus, troublesome aptus, apt, suitable necessarlus, necessary car us, dear odiosus, hateful communis, common par, equal, a match for dulcis, agreeable dispar, unlilce faeilis, easy salutaris, beneficial difficilis, difficult similis, like gratus, pleasing dissTmilis, unlike ingratus, unpleasant turpis, disgraceful gravis, burdensome utilis, useful canis similis lupo est a dog is similar to a wolf flamma fumo est proxima fire is next akin to smoke. Many Adjectives whicli belong to this class become Substantives and as such take the Genitive; e. g. : amicus, a friend aequalis, a contemporary inimicus, an enemy vicinus, a neighbor familiaris, an (intimate) friend necessarlus, a relation 599, Adjectives of Inclination may take the Accusative with erga (when friendly feelings are spoken of) or with in, adversus (for friendly and unfriendly feelings) ; those signifying useful, suitable take oftener the Accusative with ad to denote the i\img for whicli, but regularly the Dative of Persons; as: severus in filiiim, severe towards his son; homo ad nuUam rem utilis, a good-for-nothing fellow, 000, The Adjectives propior, proximiis (sometimes), and the Adverbs propius, proxime (commonly) take the Accusative. After similis, like, the Genitive is used to denote exact resemblance; as: mei, tui, nostri similis, my, your, our like, and vSri similis, likely. 601, A few derivative Substantives take the Dative after the ana- logy of their Primitives, as: justitia est obtemperantia legibus, justice is obedience to the laws. — 190 — Ethical Datiye. 602. The Dative of a Personal Pronoun is sometimes introduced for liveliness of expression: Ethical Dative. fur mihi est, he is a thief in my opinion; quid tibi vis? what do you want? 1219, 220,] ABLATIVE CASE. Ablative of Cause. 603. The Ablative is used to express the Cause. The Ablative of Cause designates that by which, by reason of which, because of which, in accordance with which sometiiirig is or is done. Accordingly it is used with passive verbs and such active verbs and adjectives as imply a passive meaning. In the passive construction, however, the Person or Living Agent by whom any thing is done is put in the Ablative with a, ab. Dei providentia mundus admini- the world is governed by God^s stratur providence a Deo mundus administratur the tvorld is governed by God Concordia res parvae crescunt by concor^d small affairs groio milites praelio fessi erant the soldiers were weary with the battle. 604. The Ablative of Cause is of very frequent occurrence, and is used both with Verbs and Adjectives like the following: dolere, to grieve gloriari, to boast maererg, to mourn laborare, to suffer f^^^^reUo rejoice, delight fperbns proud laetarl ) laetus, pleased — aeger, ill delectari, to be delighted anxius, anxious agricola gaudet equis, the husbandman delights in hoi^ses; Miltiades aeger erat vulneribus, Miltiades was ill from his wounds; aliis malis laboras, you suffer with other ills. This includes such Ablatives as: jussu, by order; rogatii, at the request, etc. On causa and gratia, for the sake of, see S66. 8. Akin to the Causal Ablative is the Ablative with verbs expressing origin, as: humilibus parentibus ortus sprung from low parents. — 191 — Ablative of Means or Instrument. 605. The Ablative is used to denote the Means or Instrument by which anything is effected. Pyrrhus lapide interfectus est Pyrrhus was killed by a stone benevolentiam civium blanditia to win the good will of one's colligere turpe est fellow-citizens by flattery is disgraceful 606. The Person, considered as Means or Instrument^ is ex- pressed by per with the accusative, or by opera with a genitive or possessive : Caesar certior factus est per Caesar was informed by (means legatos of) ambassadors. 607. griidlre, institilere, to instruct; as: aliquem artibus eru- dire, to instruct some one in the arts; and afficere, to treat, in such expressions as: aliquem honorlbus afficere, to honor some one; ali- quem molestia afficere, to trouble some one — are worthy of note. Ablative of Limitation. 608. That in respect to which or in accordance with which anything is or is done is denoted by the Abla- tive of Limitation. Out of this usage grow a number of Particular Phrases: grandis natu, old m6a sententia, mea opinione, major natu, older according to my opinion maximus natu, o?(^es^ jUdicio, testimoniO alicujus, minor natu, younger according to the judgment, minimus natu, youngest testimony, of some one reges nomine magis quam im- kings in name rather than in perio authority. [229, 230.] Ablative of Comparison. 609. The Ablative of Comparison may be used with the Comparative, instead of quam, than, with the Nominative or Accusative. films melior est quam pater » ^^^ ^^^ .^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^ .^ ^^^^^^ ffiius melior est patre ) scio filTum meliorem esse patre I know that the son is better than his father. — 192 — 610, The Ablative, instead of quam with the same case as the thing compared, must be regularly used in Relative Sentences: amicitia, qua nihil melius hab5- friendship than which we have mus . . nothing better . . qu^m is often omitted after plus, ampllus, more; minus, less; longuis, farther^ and the like, without influence upon the construc- tion. But the Ablative may also be used when the word with quam would be in the Nominative or Accusative. ex Romanis minus trecenti per- of the Romans less than 300 iSrunt perished tecum plus annum vixit he lived with you more than a year plus quam ducenti interfecti sunt % plus ducenti interfecti sunt >■ more than 200 were hilled. plus ducentis interfecti sunt ^ 611. Certain Ablatives, as opmione, exspectationg, sp6, solito, preceding a comparative are used instead of a Clause, as: opinione celerms, sooner than is expected; dicto citius, quicker than the word was spoken; serius spe, later than was hoped; amnis solito citatior, the river running faster than usual. 612, The Ablative is used with comparatives and words im- plying comparison to denote the Degree of Difference. This use is especially frequent with the Ablatives: multo, m.uch altero tanto, twice as much paulo, a little nihilo, by nothing j no aliquanto, some more quo..eo i the the tanto, so much quant o. .tanto ) quanto, how much minor uno mense younger by one month multo praestat virtus divitiis virtue is much better than riches. Ablative of Manner. 613. The Ablative of Manner answers the question How? It is used with the preposition cum when it has no Adjective; with or without cum when it has an Adjective. Words signifying manner themselves, such as: modus, ratio, mos, ritiis, and likewise animus, mens, consilium, never take cum. I 193 — cum voluptate aliquem audire aliquid facere magno studio, or magno cum studio aliquid aequo animo ferre (never aequo cum ammo) to "hear some one with pleasure to do something with great zeal to bear something with an even mind. 614, The following Ablatives are used without an Adjective or Preposition: silentio, in silence ordine, in an orderly manner casu, by chance via et ratione, methodically voluntate, voluntarily dolo, frauds, fraudulently jtirg, rightfully injuria, unjustly VI, violently vl et armis, by force of arms pedibus, a-foot navibus, by ship Ablative of Qualitjo 615. The Ablative with an Adjective or an equiva- lent is used to denote Quality, 616. External qualities are put by preference in the Ablative; measure, number, time and space are put in the Genitive only. serpens ingenti magnitudine, a serpent of huge size; Britanni sunt capillo promisso, the Britons have long hanging lock8> Ablative of Price. 617. As a rule, Price is put in the Ablative. The Ablative of Price is used with: 6mer6 ) redimere >- to buy mereari ) vendere, to sell (pass. vSnirg) licere, to be for sale patrlam auro vendidit equus mihi talento stetit • to let aestimare, to value locarg i coUocare J conducere, to hire essS, stare, constarS, to cost he sold his country for gold the horse cost me a talent. 618. General Value or Cost is expressed by the following Ablatives: magno, at a high price parvo, at a low price nihilo, for nothing hortos istos emamus magno, si parvo non possumus plurimo, at a very high price minimo, at a very low price let us buy those gardens at a high price, if we cannot have them cheap. — 194 — 619. Comparative Value or Cost (see 569) is expressed by these GenitiyeB: tanti, so much quanti, how much tantldSm, at the same price plurls, dearer; minoris, cheaper^^i mercatores non tantidem ven- merchants do not sell at the" dunt quanti emerunt same price at which theyi . bought quanti cenas? what do you pay for yourr dinner? Mark the following Particular Phrases: bSn6 fimSre, to buy cheap bene vendere, to sdl dear malS 6m6r6, to buy dear mal6 vendere, to sell at a loss. [231. 232,1] Ablative of Separation, Plenty, Want. 620. Verbs signifying to remove, abstain, set free take the Ablative with or without the Prepositions ex, de, ab; but with Persons a Preposition, usually ab, must be used. Examples are: depellerS 16co, to drive from a place abstinerg injuria, to abstain from wrong-doing abstmerg manus ab alienis, to keep one's hands from other people's property Cjie^rg 6 civitate, to drive from the state Crumpere e saxis, to burst from the rocks abhorrSrS ab aliqua re, to differ from something deterrerg ab injuria, to deter from wrong-doing liberare a curls, to release from cares decederg (de) vita, to depart from life Hannibal ex Italia deced^re Hannibal was forced to with- coactus est draw from Italy Alexander vix a se manus ab- Alexander hardly kept hi& stinuit hands from himself multos fortQna liberat paena, fortune rids many of punish* metu neminem menty none of fear Themist6clem Athenienses e the Athenians banished The- civitate expulerunt mistocles from the state. — 195 — 021, Verbs compounded with se and dis take nearly always a or ab; such are: discemere ) ^^ ^^g^,j, distmguere ) differre discrgpare dissentire distarg ■to differ, disagree crede mihi, mores distant a car- mine nostro s6cerner61 sejungere > to separate sgparare ) likewise: allenare, to alienate abhorrere, to he averse believe me, my conduct far differs from my song. Mark the Particular Phrase: interdicere alicui aqua €t igni, to forbid one the use of fire and water, to banish one. 622. Verbs of Plenty and Want, of Filling and De- priving take the Ablative. »abundare, to abound, have abun- dance cargre, to be or do without, to lack eggre, indigSre, to need vacare, to be void of, to be free from explerg implerS complere replere orbare to Jill satiarS, to glut non egeo medicina admonitio acerbitate car6re de- ^ bet America abundat lacubus et flu- minibus privare spoliare nadare [ to deprive 1 to plunder, to strip I do not need medicine an admonition should be with- out bitterness America abounds in lakes and rivers. egeo and indlgeo are often followed by the Genitive. 623, Adjectives of Plenty and Waiit regularly take the Genitive (see 567, 1. ), but some of them follow the analogy of the cor- responding verbs and take the Ablative, Among the latter are: nudus, naked onustus, laden orbus, deprived of inanis [ liber, free vacuus ! asellus onustus auro urbs nuda praesidio -void refertus, stuffed praeditus, endoived a donkey laden with gold a city naked of defense. [238, 234.] -— 196 — 624. opus est, there is need^ it is needful, neces- sary , takes the Dative of the Person who is in want, and the Ablative of the Thing wanted (Impersonal Construction); but the Thing wanted may be the Subject and opus est (sunt) the Predicate (Personal Construction). The Impersonal Construction must regularly be used in Negative Sentences, and the Personal with Neuter Adjectives and Pronouns; 6pu8 is always indeclinable. opus mihi est libro I want a hoolc liber raihi opus est a hook is what I want opus mihi est libris / want books libri mihi opus sunt books are what I want nihil opus est duce there is no need of a leader multa opus sunt there is need of many things. Ablatiye in Special Constructions. 625. The Ablative is used with the Adjectives: dignus, worthy frfitiis, trusting, relying indignus, unworthy contentus, satisfied also with dignSr, / deem worthy. alienus, strange, foreign, takes the Ablative with or without a, d.b. vir patre dignissimus a man most worthy of his father me dignor honore / deem myself worthy of honor homo sum, humani nihil a me lam a man, and nothing relat- alienum puto ing to man I deem foreign to me* 626. The Ablative is used with the Deponent Verbs: ut6r, -i, to use potior, -iri, to make one's selj ' fruor, ^i, to enjoy master of fungdr, -1, to discharge vescOr, -i, to feed and their Compounds: abut6r, -i, to abuse defungSr, -i, to discharge perfrudr, -i, to enjoy fully perfungor, -i, to fulfil utar vestra benignitate, I will avail myself of your kindness; vescimur bestlis, we live upon animals. — 19T — p6ti5r sometimes takes the Grenitive; always in the phrase: potlri reriim, to get control of affairs. 627. nitor, I stay myself rest upon, takes the AWative with or without in. in Pompeji vita nititur salus ci- the welfare of the state depends vitatis on Pompey's life. 628. fido and confido, I trusty take the Ablative when the object is a Thing J and the Dative when the object is a Person, diffido, / distrust^ commonly takes the Dative. See 589. nemo potest fortunae stabilitate no one can trust to the stability confidere of fortune huic legioni Caesar maxime con- this legion Caesar especially fidebat trusted. [235. 236.] Time, Space, Place. USE OF PKEPOSITIONS. Prepositions construed with the Accusative: ante, apiid, ad, adversiis, circiim, circa, citra, cis, erga, contra, inter, extra, infra, intra, juxta, 5b, penes, (pone), post & praeter, prdpe, propter, per, secundtim, supra, versus, ultra, trans. 629. ad, with many varieties of application, generally means to. It denotes: direction toward a jjlace or person, as: ad urbem, to town; venio ad te, / come to you; nearness with reference to place, time or quantity, as: urbs sita ad mare, a town situated near the sea; ad vesperam, towards evening; ad ducentos, nearly 200; time, answering the question till when? as: ad summam senec- tutem, until extreme old age. It also denotes a fixed time, as: ad horam, at the hour; aim or pm^pose = in respect of, as: res ad bellum utfles, things useful for war; accord or agreement = according to, as: ad voluntatem ali- cnjus loqui, to speak according to some one's will — 198 — Particular Phrases are: ad verbum, word for word nihil ad banc rem, nothing in comparison with this thing ad unum omnes, all to the last man. 630, apud, at^ chiefly used of persons, denotes: nearness or presence^ as: apud Caesarem, at Caesar^ s house; apud judices, before, in presence of, the judges; apud Can- nas, near Cannae; situation or estimation among^ regard by, as: apud veteres, among the ancients; apud me nihil valet hominum opinio, tvith me the opinion of the multitude has no weight, apud is also used with the Names o^ Authors instead of in with the name of their works, as: apud Plinium legimus, we read in Pliny (in his works), 631, ante, before^ means preceding in space or time, as: ante portas, before the gates; ante noctem, before night 632, adversGs, more rarely adversum, indicates: direction toward ^ place or person, and combines the meanings of both against and toward, as: castra ad versus urbem ponere, to pitch the camp over against the city; adversus aliquem pugnare, to fight with (against) some one; pietas adversus pa- rentes, duty to(ward) parents, 633, CIS and citra, on this side, are used in reference to place opposed to trans, as: citra Rubiconem, on this side of the Rubicon. 634, circa and circtim are equivalent to both around and about with reference to place, as: circum haec loca, hereabout; homines circum se habent, they have people with them, circa is also used of time, as: circa eandem horam, about the same hour. Particular Phrase : circum amicos mittere, to send around to one's friends, 635, circiter, near, about, is used of time only, as: circiter meridiem, about noon, but is more commonly an Adverb. 636, contra is equivalent to against in both its meanings: opposite to, as: contra Italiam, over against Italy; in opposition to, as: contra naturam viv6re, to live against nature. F 199 6*57. erg-a, toward^ always implies friendl}^ feelings, as: divina bouitas erga homines, God's goodness toward men, 638. extra means without — out of^ sometimes beyond or ex- cept^ as: extra urbem, without the city; extra modum, beyond measure; extra ducem reliqui rapaces sunt, except the leader the rest are robbers, 639. intra denotes within in regard to both jplace and time^ as: intra urbem, within the city; intra decem annos, within or during to years, intra with an Ordinal Number means before the expiration of, as: intra deeimum diem urbem cepit, before the expiration of the 10th day he took the city. 640. inter is equivalent to both between and among, as: inter Padum et Alpes, between the Po and the Alps; Croesus inter re- ges opulentissimus, Croesus, the wealthiest among kings. It is also used to denote time, as : inter cenam, during dinner; inter lu- dendum, while playing. With the personal pronouns, as: inter nos, vos, eos, se, it is employed in a reciprocal sense, answering to the English one another, each other, as: Ciceronis puSri amant inter se, Cicero's boys love one another. 641. infra, below, means: lower in place, as: infra caelum, under the sky; lower in rank or esteem, as: eum infra omnes puto, / think him beneath all men; later in time, as: Homfirus non infra Lycurgum fuit, Homer was not later than Lycurgus; smaller than, as: magnitudine infra elephantum, in size ^smaller than an elephant 642. juxta, hard by, beside, as: juxta murum castra posiiit, he pitched the camp hard by the wall. 643. ob sometimes means before, as: ob oculos versari, to be before the eyes. Generally it means by reason of, on account of^ as: ob eam causam, for that reason. 644. penes denotes in the possession or power of, as : summum imperium penes Agamemnonem erat, the chief command was in the hands of Agamemnon. — 200 ~ 645* per, through, is used in a great variety of applications, as: denoting place, from end to end, as: per urbem ire, to go through the city; denoting duration as: per noctem, during the night; denoting the agent or means, as: per amicum servatus sum, by (means of) my friend I was saved; denoting the maimer in which a thing is done, as: per littSras, by letter; per potestatem, by authority; per iram, from or in anger; per vim, by violence; denoting the object invoked m^ forms of swearing, as: per deos immor tales jurare, to swear by the immortal gods. Particular Phrases: per me licet, you may for all I care; per aetatem, on account of his age; per valetudinem, on account of ill health, 646. post, after, denotes: behind in place, as: post equitem sedet atra cura, behind the rider sits black care; later in time, as: post tenebras lux, after darkness comes light 647. praeter primarily means along, as: praeter litus, along shore; yet it is more commonly equivalent to except or be- sides, as: praeter te amicum neminem habeo, except you I have no friend; praeter auctoritatem etiam vires habet, besides au* thority he has also strength. Particular Phrases: praeter spem, contrary to hope; praeter modum, immoderate- ly; praeter cetSros, more than the rest. 648. pr6pe, near, near by, as: prope urbem, near the city. 649. propter is equivalent to propS, near, as: propter Si- ciliam insulae Yulcaniae sunt, near Sicily are the Vulcanian islands; but most frequently it is on account of, implying motive or reason, as: propter modestiam tuam te diligo, / love you on account of your modesty, 650. seeundiiin (derived from sSqui, to follow) means: along, as: secundum mare iter facere, to make a journey along the sea shore; next to, immediately after, as: secundum cenam, imme- diately after dinner; according to, as: secundum nattiram vivSre, to live according to nature. I 201 651. supra, above (opposite to infra) denotes: higher in place, as: supra lunam, above the moon; more than, supeinor to, as: supra duos menses, mofe than two months; supra vires, above one^s strength, 652. traus, beyond, across, on the other side, is used with verbs expressing motion, as: multae aves ante liiemem trans mare migrant, many birds migrate across the sea before ivinter; also \yith verbs expressing rest, as: eo ipso tempore trans mare fui, at that very time I was beyond the sea. 653. versus, towards, -ward, follows an accusative which is usually governed by M or in, as: ad Oceanum versus proficisci, to set out totvards the ocean. With domus and names of towns versus alone is used, as: Komam versus, Eomeward; domuni versus, homeward. 654. ultra signifies beyond, on the further side.SiS: ultra Atlantem montem, beyond mount Atlas. It is also used to denote measure, as: ultra septa transilire, to go beyond bounds. [91. 92. 237, 238.] Prepositions construed with the Ablative. a, 5,b, abs, cum, de, cor am, pro, ex, e, tenus, sin6, prae. 655. a (ab, abs), from, is used in a variety of applications; it denotes: the point of time or space at which the action, state, etc. are regarded as setting out, or beginning, as: a prima aetate, from an early age; ab urbe profectus est, he departed from the city; that from which anything proceeds or by which anything is - produced, as: calor est a sole, t7ie heat is from the sun; ab hoste interfectus est, he was killed by an enemy; that from which anything is guarded, with such verbs as de- fendere, tiieri, etc., as: urbem defendere ab hostibus, to defeiul the city against the enemy; ihdX with reference to which anything is or is done, equivalent to with respect to, as: imparati sumus a militibus, as to soldiers we are not ready. Before vowels and h, it is 3,b; before consonants, a or 3,b; abs before te, but we say also a te, never ab t6. 656. absque, without^ is rarely us^d, — 202 — 657, de primarily means down from or away from^ as: de caelo, down from heaven; de vita decedere, to depart from life. It is also used in a ^partitive sense in such expressions as: unus de plebe, one of the people. When denoting time, it is as early as, even at, as: de nocte, even at night] de mense Decembri, as early as December. Most commonly, however, it is concerning, about or on, as: de gestis Alexandri, on the exploits of Alexander. liber de amicitia, a book on friendship. Sometimes it is equivalent to secundum, according to, as: de consilio meo, according to my advice; and frequently it denotes the manner of action, as: denuo (de novo), de integro, afresh; de improvlso, unexpectedly; de in- dustrla, purposely; qua de causa, quibus de causis, for which reason or reasons. 658, coram, in the presence of before, as: coram amico, in the presence of a friend. When used as an adverb, coram mesius personally, as: coram adesse, to be present in person. 659, cum, with, expresses association or accompanying circumstances, as: cum allquo ire, to go tvith some one; esse cum telo, to go armed; confligere cum hoste, to fight with the enemy. cum with the Ablative of a Personal Pronoun is always appended to it, as: tecum loquitur, he talks with you; and commonly also with the Relative: quocum, quibuscum (likewise cum quo, cum quibus); quicum is used for the Ablative of both numbers and all genders. 660, e, ex, out of from, denotes: the place, answering to the question whence? as: aliquem ex regno pellere, to drive some one out of the kingdom; e longinquo videre, to see from afar; ex equo pugnare, to fight on horseback; the point of time from which, as: ex illo die, from that day; the cause out of which anything proceeds, as: ex nihilo nihil fit, of nothing nothing comes; aeger ex vulnere, sick from a wound; ex quo, ivhence or for which reason. In a great many cases e (ex) has the signification in accordance with, as: ex ejus sententia, according to his opinion; or it denotes the manner of an action, as: ex animo laudare, to praise heartily; ex improvlso, unexpectedly. In such phrases as: unus e multis, one of many, it is used in a partitive sense. Mark the Particular Phrases: ex tua re, to your advantage; e republica, for the good, of the state. gefore consonants it is ej before vowels and consonants, ex. — 203 — 661. pro means: before or in front off preceding in space, as: pro castris aciem instruere, to array the army for battle before the camp; for = in defence of in behalf of as: pro patria mori, to die for one's country; for = instead of as: pro consule, in place of consul; in accordance with or in proportion tOy as: pro portione, in proportion; pro virlli parte, to the best of one's ability. 662. prae is before = in front of only in combination with agerg and ferre, as: prae se ferre, to carry before one's self I e. to show. Most commonly it means: in comparison with, in contrast withy as: prae me beatus es, in comparison with me you are happy; it is also frequently used in the sense of on account of im- plying an obstacle, as: prae lacrimis scribSre non possum, I cannot write on account of tears. 663. tenus, as far as, follows its noun, as: Tauro tenus, as far as Taurus; hoc tenus, hitherto, 664. sine, withouty opposed to cum, has a negative power, hence we say: sine ulla spe, without any hope. [93. 94, 239. 240,] Prepositions construed with the Accusative & Ablative. stib, stiper, subter, in. 665. stib and in, when followed by the Accusative, indicate motion towards, when by the Ablative, rest in, a place* 666. siib with the Accusative means: under ^ close to, as: sub montem succedSre, to come close to the hill; about, shortly before, of time, as: sub noctem, towards night; sub lucem, near daylight; 667. sub with the Ablative is always: under, as: sub terra habitare, to live under ground; sub divo, in the open air; sub monte, at the foot of a hill. 668. super has the Ablative only when used in the sense of de. concerning, as: hac super re, concerning this thing. With the Accusative it is over, above, answering to the questions whither? and where? as: super aliquem sedSre, to sit above some one. Particular Phrases: vulnus super vulnus, wound upon wound; super ceuam, during dinner. — 204 — 669. subtCr, beneath^ takes the Aoowative answering to the questions whither? and rcherc? as: subter togam, under the toga. 670. In, with the Accusative denotes entrance with regard to place, as: in urbem venit, he came into town; it also indicates the object toward which an action is directed, either with a friendly or hostile intention, as: amor in patrem, love for one's father; oratio in CatilTnam, a speech against Catiline, With words denoting time it is equivalent to for, expressing a predetermination of that time, as: in diem viv6re, to live for Vie day; in perpetilum, forever; in dies, from day to day, Mark the Adverbial Expressions: hunc in modum, in this way; mirum in modum, in a tvonderful manner; in vicem, alternately or instead of 671. In with the Ablative, denotes presence in place, time or circumstances, as: in urbe habito, / live in town; est mihi in animo, I have it in mind; in scribendo, while writing. When a Number or Quantity is indicated, it is equivalent to among, as: numerari in bonis civlbus, to be counted among the good citizens. 195. 96. 1S7. ISS, 239, 240, \ TIME. 672. Time when is expressed by the Ablative of words denoting time, such as: tempos, time saecilliim, a century aetas, an age vfir, spring punctum tempOris, a moment aestas, summer hora, an hour auctumuus, autumn dies, a day hiems, winter mensis, a month vesp6r, evening annils, a year nox, night Hannibalis milites vere conve- HannibaFs soldiers assembled nCre in spring. 673. Words not explicitly expressing time, such as: bellum, p^, piiSritia, usually take in with the Ablative, but they are without !n, if accompanied by an Ac^ective or Genitive. So we say: in bello, in war times bello PersTco, at the time of the in pace, in time of peace Persian loar in pueritia, in boyhood prima pueritia, in earhj boyhood in adulescentia, in youth bello Anti6chi, during the war in senectate, in old age with Antiochus, — 205 — Particular Phrases. ^.^^^. . I at the beginning temporibus ) .^ ^j^^ ^ .^^^ principio ) aetate J '^ adventu, at the arrival ludis, during the games iiscessu, at the departure bis die, twice a day [ tempore, at the right time hora nona, at 9 o'clock 674. Time how long is put in the Accusative. Appius caecus multos annos fiiit, Appius was blind many years. The Preposition p6r may be used to denote from beginning to id, as: est mecum per totum diem, he is with me the livelong day. Time how long since may be expressed by an ordinal number in the Accusative, as: Mithridates jam annum tertium Mithridates has reigned going et vicesimum regnat on S3 years. Time how long before the present moment is expressed by ^bhinc with the Accusative, as: abhinc sex menses, six months ago, 675. Distance of time how long before or after is ex- pressed by the Ablative with ante or post following: paucis diebus ante, a few days before paucis diebus post, a few days afterward. The Accusative can also be employed, but then the Preposition precedes, thus: ante, post paucos dies. Either Case and the cardinal as well as the ordinal numbers may be used, when the Preposition is placed between the Numeral and the Substantive. Hence the English phrase three years after may be - expressed as follows: tribus annis post post tres annos tertio anno post post teitium annum tribus post annis tres post annos tertio post anno tertium post annum qu^m and a verb may be added to antS and post in all the forms above specified, as: tribus annis postquam venSrat ■^ post tres annos quam ven^rat I three years after he tertio anno postquam venSrat [ had come. iH^. post annum tertium quam venSrat ) — 206 — 676. Time within which is expressed by the Ablative or by intra with the Accusative : Agamemnon vix decem annis Agamemnon in ten years (intra decem annos) unam hardly took one city, cepit urbem 677. Time for how long is expressed by in with the Accusative, as: Phaeton currum paternum in Phaeton asTced his father's char- diem rogavit riot for a day. 678. The Question how old? is answered in different ways: By natiis (horn) with the Accugative, as: puer decem annos natns est, the hoy is ten years old; By tlie (renitive of Quality: Hamilcar secum duxit filium Hanniba- iem annorum novem, Hamilcar took with him his son Hannihal 9 years of age; By agere, to pass, with annus and an ordinal number, as: quar-^ turn annum ago et octogesimum, lam ss years old. Older and younger are expressed by m^jdr and. mlnSr with following Ablative, as: major quinque et triginta annis, older than 35 years. {243, 244.y SPACE. 679. Extent of Space is put in the Accusative, as: fossa pedes trecentos longa est, the ditch is 300 feet long^ 6 feet sex pedes alta deep, 680. Measures of lengthy depth, etc., are often expressed by the Genitive of Quality, as: vallum pedum duodScim fieri he ordered a rampart to he jussit made of IS feet (in height), 681. Distance Aoi(; /ar is put in the Accusative or Ablative, as: a recta conscientia transversum we ought not to swerve a naiVs unguem non oportet discedere breadth from a right con- science copiae Ariovisti a Eomanis mi- the troops of Ariovistus were libus quattuor et viginti afue- twenty four miles from the runt • Romans, [24i. 242.] , I— 201 — PLACE. 682. To express relations of Place, Frepositions are necessary, viz.: in with the Ablative to denote the place wJiere, as: in urbe, in town; in or ad with the Accusative to denote the place to which, as: in Europam, to Europe; ad urbem, to town; ex with the Ablative to denote the place jrom whichj as: ex Britan- nia, from Great Britain. 683. But the Prepositions are not used with the names of Towns and small Islands. In answer to the question whither? names of towns and small islands are put in the Accusative Case, as: Romam venit, he came to Rome. In answer to the question whence? the names of towns and small islands are put in the Ablative Case, as: Roma cessit, he retired from Rome, In answer to the question where? the names of towns and small islands, if of the first or second declension and in the singular, are put in the Genitive Case, as: Romae mansit, he remained at Rome. But if the names are of the plural number or belong to the third declension, they are put in the Ablative Case, as: Babylone mortuus est, he died at Babylon. (For the place where there was formerly a special Case, the Locative, ending in i which is preserved in Carthagini, at Carthage; ruri, in the country j etc.) 684. urbs or oppidum without an Attribute is placed before the proper name, and the preposition in or ex is always em- ployed, as: in urbem Cirtam to the city of Cirta . ex oppido Gergovia from the town of Gergovia in urbe Roma in the city of Rome. 685. urbs or oppidum loith an Attribute is placed after the proper name, commonly with in or ex. But in answer to the question where? the Ablative may be used with or without in, even though the proper name be in the Genitive. Aulide, ex oppido Boeotlae from Aulis, a town of Boeotia Thalam, in oppidum magnum to Thala^ a great town Albae, (in) urbe munlta . at Alba, a fortified city. — 208 — 686. The following words are used like names of towns, without a preposition: rus, into the country domum, home rur6, from the country domo, from home hiimo, from the ground run, in the country domi, at home hiiml, on the ground domi militiaeque, at home and in the field belli domiquS, in war and in peace foras, to the doors; forls, out-of-doors^ abroad, A Crenitive or Possessive may be used with dointis in this con- struction, but when it is modified in any other way, a preposition is generally employed, as: domi meae, at my house; domum Caesaris, to Gaesai^'s house; in domum vetSrem e nova, to the old house from the new. 687. The Ablative is used without a preposition to denote the place where : With nouns when qualified by the Adjective totfis, or cunctus: Demosthenes disertissimus tota Demosthenes was the most elo- Graecia fuit . quent man in all Greece; With 16c o, I6cis when qualified by Adjectives: hoc loco, multis locis in this j)lace, in many places. 688. The way by which is put in the Ablative: terra marique by sea and by land Appia via profectus est he set out by the Appian way. 689. The Ppeposition Tn is generally joined with the Ablative after Verbs of Placing, as: ponere, to place statiierS | ^^ . demerg6r6, to plunge collocare, iopui constitueref imprimerej to stamp consid^r^f to settle d^figere, to plant mscrlh^rej to write upon Plato rationem in capite posuit Plato has put reason in the head Lucretia cultrum in corde defi- Lucretia plants a knife in her git heart 690. Again, after Verbs of Assembling and kindred signi- fications the Preposition in is followed by the Accusative. Such are: advenirg, to arrive congregarl, to assemble cogere, to assemble convenire, to meet nuntiare, to bring word conjurati in curiam convenerunt the conspirators met in the senate house. Il9t, 192. 241, 242.] I I — 209 — Special Uses of Substantives. S91, In place of the Abstract expressions: in pueritia, in adulescentia, in senectute, in stating the age at which a person per- formed any action, the Latin employs the Concretes pu6r, adii- lescens, senex; ab infante, a parvulo, from childhood. 692. When official titles are used to indicate time, the con- crete nouns consul, praetor, &c., are used instead of consiilatiis, praetura, &c. as: L. Pisone, A Gabinio consulibus, in the consulship of L. Fiso and A. Gabinius. 693. Again, Abstract nouns are sometimes used instead of Concretes, as: nobilitas for nobiles, noblemen posteritas ** posted, descendants vicinitas ^^ vicini, neighbors. 694. In Latin, Abstract nouns when referring to several objects or denoting repetition at different times admit of plural use^ as: adventus imperatorum, the arrival of the generals; interitCis exercitiium, the destruction of the armies. 695. Some Abstract nouns take such a modified sense as to admit of pZura/ use, as: fortitudines, gallant actions; irae, quarrels. 696. Symmetrical parts of the human body are usually in the plural, as: cervices, the neck; pectora, the breast; also words denot- ing phenomena of nature, as: nives, snow; grandines, hail; pluviae, rain. 697 .r Other Plural expressions to be noted are: ligna, (logs of) wood carnes, pieces of meat SLera.^ articles of bronze vinsiy kinds of wine. 698. The Singular, in a Collective sense, is sometimes used for the plural, as: _ pedes, infantry faba, beans miles, the soldiery porcus, pork eques, cavalry gallina, fowl hostis, the enemy vestis, clothing. 699. A Proper name may ba applied to two or more members of the same family, or to persons of the same character, and so becomes strictly common as: Horatii, the Horatii; Nerones, Neros (tyrants). 700. The Substantive nemS is often used with other Substan- tives so as to become equivalent to the Adjective nulliis, as: nemo civis, no citizen. It wants the genitive and ablative. The oblique casea of nihil are supplied by the respective cases of niUla res. — 210 — Special Uses of Adjectives. 701. Adjectives are often used as Substantives. In the Plural masculine adjectives denote persons^ neuter adjectives things, pauperes, the poor humana, human affairs divites, the rich omnia, all things omnes, all men vSra, truth. 702. The Neuter Singular may denote either a single object or a quality y as: hbnestum, an honorable act bonum, a good malum, an evil pulchrum, beauty 703. Adjectives are often used in Latin where the English has the Possessive^ or a noun with a preposition^ as: domus regia, a hinges palace ■ pugna Cannensis, the fight at Cannae iter campestre, a journey across country aligna domus, another man^s house Miltiades Atheniensis, Miltiades of Athens. 704. The first part, last part, middle part of any place or time are generally expressed in Latin by the Adjectives primus, mediiis, ultimus, infimus, Imiis, summus, reliquus, as: media nox, tJie middle of the night; summa arbor, the top of the tree; suprgmi montes, the summits of the mountains. 705. The Comparative sometimes has the force of too, un-^ usually, somewhat, and the Superlative of very, as: brevior, rather short; audacior, too bold; amicus carissimus, a very dear friend] Cato, homo doctissimus, Cato, a very learned man. 706. The force of the Comparative is increased by multo, much, far; Aliquant o, some more, considerably; etiam, even, still, as: multo melior, much better; etiam doctior, still more learned. 707. The Superlative is strengthened by longe, by far; multo, much; vel, even; uniis omnium, one above all others; quam, quantus potuit, as. .asj)ossible; as: multo maxima pars, by far the largest part; quam maximae copiae , forces as large as possible; sophistes vel maximus, the very greatest sophist, 708. When two qualities of the same object are compared, both adjectives (or adverbs) are in the Comparative, as: est doctior quam sapientior, he is more learned than wise. Where magis quam i» used, both Adjectives are in the Positive: amicus tuus disertus ma- gis est quam sapiens, your friend is eloquent rather than wise. I — 211 709. The Comparative is to be used in reference to only two objects; the Superlative when comparing more than two objects, as: uter fratrum natu major est? Which of the two brothers is the older? Quaerltur ex duobus uter dignior, ex pluribus quis dignissimus; the question is: Of two, which is the worthier; of more, which is the woi^thiest ! Special Uses of Pronouns. 710. Personal and Possessive Pronouns of the First and Se- cond Persons are not expressed in Latin except for distinction or emphasis, as: amamus parentes, we love our j)arents. 711. As a rule, the Reflexive Pronoun siiT, sibi, se and its Possessive suiis, are used when reference is made to the Subject of the sentence; as: Caesar se ad sues recepit, Caesar betook hiinself to his men. The Possessive suus may also be used with reference to any noun in the same sentence on which emphasis is thrown, as: Socratem cives sui interfecS- Socrates was put to death by runt his own fellow -citizens puer columbam cepit in nido the boy caught the dove in its sue nest. On the other hand, the Determinatives ejus, eorum, earum are used as Possessives of the third person, when 7io emphasis appears, or when reference is made to a noun in another sentence, as: Deum agnoscis ex operibus ejus you recognize God by his works multi cives interfecti, eorum- many citizens were slain, and que bona publicata sunt their property confiscated. To express reciprocal action inter se is regularly used, as: araant inter se, they love one another. 712, hie, this^ refers to that which is nearer the speaker (De- monstrative of the First Person); iste, that (of yours) to the person ad- dressed (Demonstrative of the Second Person); ille, that, to that which is remote (Demonstrative of the Third Person). liic very frequently means that which is about to be mentioned^ as: his condicionlbus, on the following terms; iste especially refers to one's opponent (in court, etc.) and fre- quently implies contempt, as: Mars alter, ut isti volunt, a second Mars, as those fellows say; ille is often used of that which is .well known, notorious, as: praeclarum iilud Solonis, that famous saying of Solon. It is also used in the sense of the following. — 212 — 713, Often hie and ille are to be rendered the latter and the former (hic, the one last mentioned, the nearer; ille, the one men- tioned earlier, the remoter)^ thus: * melius de quibusdam acerbi ini- hitter enemies deserve better of mici merentur quam ii amici, some people than those qui suaves videntur ; illi friends who seem obliging; saepe verum dicunt, hi nun- the former often tell the quam. truth^ the latter never. But the order is often reversed so that hic refers to the object first mentioned (usually the more important), and ille to the one mentioned last. melior est certa pax quam spe- better is certain peace than rata victoria; haec in tua, hoped-for victory; the former ilia in deorum manu est is in your hands, the latter in the hands of the gods. 714, is, that, is either the regular Antecedent of the Relative or refers to an Object just mentioned. is sapiens est, qui se ad casus he is a wise man who accom* accommodet omiies modates h imself to all c ircum^ stances mihi obviam venit tuns puer; is I was met by your servant; he mihi litteras abs te reddidit delivered to me a letter front^ you. 715, When a quality is ascribed with emphasis to an object already named, is with a copulative or adversative particle is used, thus; 5t is, atque is, isque, and he too, and that too neque is, et is non, and he not, and that not unam rem explicabo, eamque one point I shall explain, and maximam that, too, a very important one. 716, No demonstrative pronoun is employed in Latin in phrases where that or those in English is used in place of a noun which would have to be repeated: Terentii fabulis plus delector I find more delight in the plays quam Plauti of Terence than in those of Plautus. 717, idem is often equivalent to an adverb or an adverbial phrase (also, likewise, yet, atihe same time), as: Quidquid honestum est, idem est utile. Whatever is honorable is at the same time useful — 213 — 718, ipse, self^ is used with any of tlie other pronouns or a noun for the sake of emphasis, often expressed in English hjjust, mere J very, as: triginta erant dies ipsi, it was just 30 days. When added to any reflexive pronoun, ipse agrees either with such pronoun or with the subject of the sentence, according as either is emphatic; as: piger ipse sibi obstat, the lazy man stands in his own way; nosce te ipsuni ! know thyself! 719, For the agreement of Relatives see 551, foil. The Antecedent, and the Adjective or Apposition of the ante- cedent are often incorporated into the Relative clause, as: in quem primum egressi sunt locum Troja vocaturj the first place they landed at was called Troy. 720, The Interrogative quis? is used substantively and ad- jectively; qui? mostly adjectively. Thus we say: quis rex? which king? inquiring for the individual; but qui homo? what man? in- quiring for the character. 721, The Indefinite Pronouns are used to indicate that some person or thing is meant, without indicating what one, 722, aiiquis means some one or other, as: fecit hoc aliquis tui similis, some one or other like you did this] aliquid consuetudini dandum est, something must be allowed to custom. 723, quis (fainter than aliquis) is used chiefly after Relatives and the following Conjunctions: si, if; nisi, if not; ne, lest; niim, whether; ciiiu, when. aliquis after si and the rest is emphatic. ne quid nimis! nothing in excess! ne qua significatio fiat, that no sign may be made. 724, quisqu3/in (subst.) and uUQs (adj.) mean any one at all, and are chiefly used in negative, interrogative, and conditional sen- tences, also after sine, without; vix, scarcely, quam, than. neque ex castris Catilinae quis- nor had any one departed from quam omnium discesserat the camp of Catiline legati sine uUa spe pacis domum the ambassadors returned home redigrunt without any hope of peace legati non sine aliqua spe pacis the ambassadors returned home, domum redierunt not without som^ hope of peace. — 214 — 72if. quidSm, means one, a, a certain one; in the plural it is equivalent to some, sundry, as: qui dam rhetor antiquus, a certaiTi ancient rhetorician; certi quidam homines, some reliable persons. 726. unusquisqiiS means every single one; quivis & qui- libSt, any one you like; quisque, each one; omnes, all together. . 727. The Distributive quisque is used: After the reflexive pronoun, siii, sibi, se, and its possessive suus, as: sua culque voluptas, each man has his hobby; With Superlatives and Ordinals, as: optimum quid que rarissi- mum est, the best is the rarest, or every good thing is rare, or th& better a thing ^ the rarer it is; quinto quoque anno, every fifth year, 728. Sliiis is simply another; alter, is the other of two, or the second; cSteri, all the rest or others. 729. The expressions alius . . alius, alt€r . . alter may be used in a reciprocal sense: pueri alter alterum amant, the boys love each other, ^litis repeated in difi'erent propositions is translated one — another; aliud agitur, aliud simulatur, one thing, is done, another pretended, alii . . SlliT, is some, .others; alteri. .alteri, one party .. another party, aliils with another case of the same word may be translated by two separate propositions commencing with one-another respectively; as: aliud alii natura iter ostendit,^ nature shows one path to one man, another path to another man. [243. 246.1 Syntax of the Verb. Use of Tenses. 730. There are Six Tenses in Latin, viz.: Of Continued Action. the Present, as: scribo, I am writing; the Imperfect, used chiefly for description or repeated action, as: scrlbebam, I was writing; the Future, as: scribam, I shall write. Of Completed Action: the Perfect, either definite or historical, as: scrips!, I have ivritten (definite), or: /'M;ro^e (historical); the Pluperfect, as: scripsgram, I had written; the Future Perfect, as: scripsero, I shall have written. I — 215 — 731. The Present is used of what is going on now, at the present time, and of what is true at all times, as: loqueris adhuc, cum omnes ta- you are still speaJcing while all cent are silent fortes forttina adjiivat fortune helps the brave. 732. The Present is often substituted for the Historical Perfect in lively narration, as: triginta rectores reipublicae SO rulers of the Athenian corrim Atheniensis constituuntur, qui monwealth are appointed^ who fiunt tyranni become tyrants. 733. The Present is used in Latin to express a past action or state which is continued so as to be present also, especially with jam, now; jamdiu, now for along time; jam pridem, now long sincCj as: tot annos bella gero for so many years I have waged and am still waging war, 734. The Present is regularly used with dum, while, though the time referred to is past, as: haec dum aguntur, Caesari nun- while this is going on^ word tiatum est was brought to Caesar. 735. The Imperfect denotes an action continuing in the past, but not then accomplished. It is employed to describe manners, customs and situations. scribebam epistulam, cum am!- I was luriting a letter when my cus adesset friend came ante oppidum planities patebat before the town extended a plain Pausanias epulabatur more Per- Pausanias was wont to banquet sarum in the Persian style. 736. The Future represents an action that is yet to come. In subordinate clauses it is used with much greater exactness in Latin than in English: sanabimur, si volemus we shall be healed if we wish. The Future sometimes has the force of an Imperative: in sudOre vultus tui comedes pa- in the sweat of thy face thou nem tuum ' shalt eat thy bread. — 216 737. The Perfect has two distinct uses: I. As the Perfect Definite it denotes an action an now completed, and is rendered by the English Per- fect with have. triste est nomeu carendi, quia sad is the phrase ^^ do without* subjicitur haec vis : habuit, because this meaning is at non habet tributed to it: he has had^ he has no longer. II. As the Historical Perfect it denotes an action as completed in past time, but leaves it, in other respects, wholly indeterminate. Caesar armis rem gerere con- Caesar resolved to use armec stituit, exercitum finibus Ita- force; he advanced with hi liae admovit,Kubiconem trans- army to the frontiers of Italy ^ lit, Romam et aerarium occu- passed the Rubicon^ took pos* pavit, Pompgjum cedentem session of Borne and tlu perseciitus est, eumque in treasury y pursued Pompey campis Pharsalicis devicit. and defeated him in the plait of Pharsalus The following Conjunctions: postquam ).^^^ iibi \ postgaquam 1 ubl primum f ^^ ^^^^ ^ ^^ . las soon as l^^?J\^ , ( ut primum S simulatqu6 ) are usually followed by the Historical Perfect: milites postquam victoriam when the soldiers had won the adepti sunt, nihil reliqui vie- victory^ they left nothing to tis fecSre the vanquished. 738. The Pluperfect is used of an action that was^ completed before another was begun; as: consul copias, quas pro castris the consul led back the forces coUocaverat, reduxit which he had stationed before the camp. 739. The Future Perfect denotes an action as com- pleted in the future; it is used with much greater exactness in Latin than in English, as: ut sementem fecSris, ita metes; as you soWy so shall you reap. \ — 21Y — 740. In the statement of an action repeated before another, with such particles as: cum, iibi, whenever; simiilac, as soon as; si, when; and Relatives, as: quotiens, as often as, the Perfect and Pluperfect In- dicative are used — the Perfect referring to Present Time, the Plu- perfect to Fast. quotiens cecidit, surgit, as often as he falls j he rises, quotiens ceciderat, surgebat, as often as he fell, he rose. In like manner, in letters the Perfect, or Imperfect may be used for the present and the Pluperfect for past tenses, as in the phrase: nihil erat quod scrib6rem, I have nothing to write. 741. The Periphrastic Conjugations are formed by combining the tenses of ess6 with the Future Participle (Active), and with the Ge- rundive (Passive). The Active Periphrastic Conjugation denotes either intention or being on the point of doing something, as: scriptarus sum, I purpose to write, or am about to write. The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation expresses necessity or pro- priety, as: parentis amandi sunt, parents must be loved, deserve or ought to be loved. The Person by whom is put in the Dative, as: parentes libgrls amandi sunt, parents ought to be loved by their children. bellum scripturus sum, quod po- I purpose to write the history of pulus Romanus cum Jugurtha thewarwhichtJie Roman people gessit carried on with Jugurtha. [247, 248.] Sequence of Tenses. 742. When two sentences are so related to each other, that the one defines and explains the other, or that the one is dependent on the other, they are connected in the way of Subordination, as: crepant aedificia, priusquam cadant, houses creak before they fall; crepant aedificia is the Principal Clause, priusquam cadant is the Dependent Clause. The Subjunctive is largely used in Subordinate Sentences, and will be treated at length in that connection. 218 743, In those Dependent Clauses which require the Subjunctive the choice of the tenses of the Dependent Clause is determined by the tense of the Pi^lncipal Clause according to the following GENEBAL RULES. I. Tenses, in regard to their connection, are divided into two classes: Principal, including the Present^ both Futures and the Perfect Definite; Historical, including the Imperfect^ the Historical Perfect and the Pluperfect II. Principal Tenses are followed by the Present Subjunctive for contemporary action, and by the Perfect Subjunctive for antecedent action. III. Historical Tenses are followed by the Imperfect Subjunctive for contemporary action, and by the Pluperfect Subjunctive for antecedent action. Principal Clause. Dependent Clause. Present. cognosce, lam finding out Future. cognoscam, / shall find out Put. Perf. cognovSro, / shall have foundout [shallknow) Perf. Defin. cognovi, / have found out (I know) cognoscebam, Itvasfind- r ing out I quid facias, what you are do- ing quid fecgris, ivhat you have done, what you have been doing y what you did Imperf. Pluperf. quid facSres, doing what you loere cognoy ^rsimj I had Jound\ quid fecisses, what you had out (I knew) Hist. Perf. Caesar cognovit, Caesar found out I done, had been doing quid facgrent hostes, what the enemy ivas doing quid fecissent hostes, what the enemy had done. 74:4:. The Perfect Definite, though properly a Prm- cijpal tense, is more commonly treated as a Historical tense, and admits after it the Imperfect and Pluperfect: oblitus es, quod dix6rim-, you have forgotten what I said; interrogavi eum, quid fac6ret, I have asked him what he was doing; feci hoc, ut intellegdres, I have done this that you might see. i r 745. In Sentences of Result, with ut, qui, quin, the erb of the Dependent Clause has the same tense as it would have if the clause were a Principal one. Yerres Siciliam ita perdidit, ut Verves so ruined Sicily^ that ea restitui in antiquum sta- she can not he restored to her turn non possit ancient condition. 746. The Future Tenses are wanting in the Subjunctive. After a Future or Future Perfect, their place is supphed by the Present or Perfect Subjunctive; after the other tenses by the Active Peri- phrastic Subjunctive, Present or Imperfect; as: cognoscam, quid facias, I shall find out what you will be doing; cognovSro, quid fec6ris, I shall have found out what you have done; cognosce, quid factHrus sis, I am finding out what you will do; cognovgram, quid facturus esses, / had found out ivhat you would do. [249. 250.] Use of the Indicative. 747 o The Indicative is the mood of Direct Assertions or Questions^ as: necessitas non habet legem necessity recognizes no law quare vitia sua nemo confitetur? why will no man confess his quia etiam nunc in illis est faults? because he continues to indulge in them. The Indicative is sometimes used where the English idiom would suggest the Subjunctive, chiefly in expressions denoting the pro- priety , advantage or necessity of an action not performed, such as: , iongxxm est^ it would be tedious possum l/^^^^,;^^ I could utilius fuit, it would have, been poteram 1 ^ better deb6o ) ,- ,, ^ 7 i-, . ; ., , , T. v- . 11-1. c^ ought or / should par est, it would be fair debebam ) perturbationes animorum poteram / might call the disturbances of appellare morbos, sed non con- the mind ^^diseases'\ but veniet ad omnia that would not suit all the cases. The Indicative of the Periphrastic Conjugations is often so used, as; haec condicio non accipienda fuit; these terms ought not to have been accepted. — 220 — 748. The Indicative is used after General Relatives, such as: quisquis, no matter who; quotquot, no matter how many, and all forms in -cunqug, -ever, also after slv6..slv6, whether.. or j . where in English the Potential may be used, as; quidquid id est, timSo Danaos whatever it may he, I fear the at dona ferentes Danai, even when they bring presents. Independent Uses of the Subjunctive. 749. The Subjunctive represents the action of the verb as something merely entertained by the mind and dependent on other circumstances. 750. The Present and Perfect Subjunctive are used to denote an action as possible (Potential Subjunctive) ; also the second person of the Imperfect Subjunctive in the same manner, but only in the expressions: credfires, putares, you would, might have thought videres, cerngres, you would, might have seen, hie quaerat quispiam here some one may ask dixSrit quis some one may say. The regular negative in such cases is non. 751. The Subjunctive is used to denote a wish— the Present and Perfect a wish conceived as possible; the Imperfect and Pluperfect an unaccomplished one (Optative Subjunctive). When so used, the Pres- ent and Perfect are commonly, and the Imperfect and Pluperfect regularly preceded by Qtin^m, that, I wish that, would that. stet haec urbs may this city continue to stand falsus utinam vates sim I wish I may he a false prophet utinam me mortuum vidisses would you had seen me dead. The regular negative in such cases is ne. 752. The Subjunctive is used to express an exhortation or a com- mand (Hortatory or Imperative Subjunctive). Pres. First Pers. amSmus patriam, let us love our country ** Second Pers. corp5ris robore utare, use your bodily strength ^^ Third Pers. amet, let him love Perf. Second Pers. ( ne transieris IbSrum, do not cross the Ebro {negative only) ( hoc ne fec6ris, thou shalt not do that The regular negative in such cases is nS. ^ 221 — 763o The Subjunctive is used in the Present and Perfect to ex- press a concession (Concessive Subjunctive), as: vendat aedes vir bonus, suppose an honest man is selling a house; sit fur, granted that he be a thief. The regular negative here is ne. 754. The Subjunctive is used in doubtful questions (Dubitative Subjunctive), as: quid hoc homine facias? what are you to do with this man? quid aggrem? what was I to do? The regular negative here is non. [251. 252,] Dependent Uses of the Subjunctive. 755. Dependent Subjunctive Clauses may be clas- sified as follows: Conjunctive Clauses introduced by Conjunctions, Relative Clauses " '' Relatives, Indirect Questions ** ** Interrogative Words. Consecutive and Final Conjunctions. 756. ut, that, governs the Subjunctive: I. When it means that, in order that (often to be translated by the Infinitive with to, in order to) to express Purpose; its Negative is ne, that not, lest esse oportet, ut vivas, non vi- you must eat to live, not live v6re, ut edas to eat cura, ne quid ei desit take care that nothing be want^ ing to him. II. When it means so that (often rendered by to, so as to) to ex- press a Result. Its Negative is lit non, so that not. tanta vis probitatis est, ut earn so great is the power of upright- in hoste etiam diligamus ness that we love it even in an enemy ita vixi, ut non frustra me na- / have so lived that I do not turn esse ^xistimem think I was born in vain. — 222 — III. When it means granted that to express a ConceBsion; its Negative is ne. ut desint vires, tamen est lau- granted that strength he want- danda voluntas ing^ yet the good will is to he praised ne sit summum malum dolor, granted that pain is not the malum certe est greatest evil^ an evil it cer- tainly is, 757. neve, and not^ nor, is used as Gontinuative after n6, as: Thrasybtilus legem tulit, ne quis Thrasyhulus proposed a law ante actarum rerum accusare- that no one should he accused tur neve multaretur of or punished for past of' fences. 75S, The most general way of expressing Purpose is by fit (negatively ne) as: esse oportet, ut vivas^ non vivere, ut edas; you must eat to live, not live to eat This is the regular construction with verbs of Willing and Wishing, of Warning and Beseeching, of Urging and Demanding, of Resolving and Endeavoring, of Forcing and Permitting; such as: consulo, euro, prospicio, providgo, video; contendo, laboro, nitor, operam do, id ago. id specto, nihil anti- quius habeo, quam; opto, postulo, flagito, oro, rogo, peto, precor, obsecro; mando, edico, impero, praecipio; impello, incito, moveo, adduce; hortor, moneo, suadeo, persuadeo; concede, permitto; facio, perficio, adipiscor, assequor, consSquor, impgtro. volo, ut mihi respondeas, / wish you to answer me oro et hortor te, ut in munere I entreat and admonish you to diligentissimus sis he very careful in your office ne noceas, dum vis prodesse vi- see to it that you do not do harm deto while you wish to do good. 759, A clause of Result introduced by fit, so that (negatively fit non) is used: After such words as tarn, talis, tantus, Tta, sic, adSo ; After verbs denoting it happens, it remains, it follows^ and the like; (accidit, contingit, evenit, sequitur, restat, &c.) After quam with a Comparative: ^ 223 — Atticus ta vixit, ut AtheniensI- Aiiicus so lived that he was bus carissimus esset very dear to the Athenians accidit, ut plena esset luna it chanced to he full moon urbs munitior erat, quam ut the town was too strong to he primo impetu capi posset taken in the first attack, 760. "Hie phrase tantiim abest, ut. . ut; it is so far (from being the case) deserves special notice: tantum abest ab eo, ut malum so far is death from heing an sit mors, ut verear, ne homini evil that I fear man has no sit nihil bonum aliud other Messing, 761. After metiio, timeo, vgrSor, I fear, metus est, pSri- ctiluin est, there is fear, danger^, ne must be rendered by that or lest, and fit by that not, as: Milo metuebat, ne a servis indi- 3filo feared that he would he cargtur hetrayed hy his servants timeo, ut sustineas labores / fear that you will not hold out under your toils. 762. The prefix ail- in aliquis and similar Compounds is re- jected after Relatives and the following Conjunctions: si, if; nisi, if not; ne, lest; num, whether; ciim, vjhen. Hence we say in Final Clauses: nS quis, that no one n6 quando, that never ne quid, that nothing ne quisquam, that no one at all necubi, that nowhere ne quidquam, that nothing at all [253. 254.] 763. The Ablative quo (= ut eo, that thereby), in order that, so that, with the Subjunctive is used as a Conjunction in clauses of Purpose, especially with Com- paratives, as: ager aratur, quo meliores fruc- the field is plowed that it may tus edere possit yield hetter fruit. 764. quommiis (= ut eo mmiis, that thereby the less), that not, with the Subjunctive is used with verbs of Hindering, such as: impedlre, to hinder obstarS, to he in the way deteirSrg, to frighten off obsistere, to oppose prohibere, to keep from recusare, to refuse — 224 — |nors non deterret sapientem, death does not deter a wise man quominus in omne tempus rei from consulting the interest publicae consulat of the state the whole time. aetas non imp6dit, quominus age does not hinder our retain* agri colendi studia teneamus ing interest in agriculture. Instead of quomtntis, we may use ne, and when the principal clause is negative, quin: Regulus ne sententiam diceret Begulus refused to pronounce recusavit an opinion 765. quin (= qui, how^ and ne, not), that not, with the Subjunctive is used only after negative clauses or such questions as expect a negative answer. It is equivalent to qui nOii) qudd non, hut, as: nemo est, qnin hoc videat there is no one hut sees this; to Gt n5n, hut, as not^ as: nemo est tam fortis, quin rei no one is so hrave as not to he novitate perturbetur confounded hy the newness of a thing. 766, quin is used in the sense of that not or that after Negatiye ExpressioiiB implying doubt, omission and the like; such are: non dubito, / do not doubt non est dubium, there is no doubt quis dubitet? who can doubt? non multum abest, there is not much wanting nihil abest, there is nothing wanting nihil praetermltto ) j^^^^ „^^^. nihil mtermitto ) temperare mihi non possum, I cannot restrain myself vix me contineo, I hardly refrain from retineri non possum, / cannot be restrained facere non possum quin, / cannot help fieri non potest quin, it cannot happen but that quis dubitetj quin in virttlte di- who can doubt that wealth con- vitiae sint? sists in virtue? non multum afuit, quin interfic§- / was not far from being rer Tcilled, [255, 256,] — 226 — Concessive and Comparative Conjunctions. 767, Concessive Conjunctions express a Concession, with the general signification although^ granting that. These are: etsi, 6tiamsi, tametsi, quamquam, although quamvis (quantum vTs), however muchj however lic6t, ut, cum, thoughy suppose, whereas. 768, Of these, iTcSt (properly a verb) exclusively, and quam- vis usually, take the Present or Perfect Sabjunotiye, as: licet superbus ambules pecunia, although you may strut about fortuna non mutat genua proud of your purse, fortune changes not birth vitia mentis, quamvis exigua defects of the mind, no matter sint, in majus exc6dunt how slight they be, go on in- creasing. 769, cum, whereas, since; tit, granted that; ne, granted that not (see 756, III.) take the Subjunctive. Phocion fuit perpetuo pauper, Phocion was constantly poor, cum divitissimus esse posset though he could be very rich. 770, Stiamsi takes the Indicative to denote real concessions, and the Subjunctive to denote such as are merely conceived in the mind, as: ista Veritas, etiamsijacunda non that truth, although it is not est, mihi tamen grata est agreeable , is nevertheless acceptable to me vita brevis est, etiamsi supra life is short, although it should centum annos duret last over lOO years. 771, etsJ, tametsi and quamquam regularly take the In- dicative (unless otherwise required by the connection, as: viri boni recte agunt, etsi nul- good men do right, though they lum consecuturum emolumen- see no profit about to result turn vident quamquam omnis virtus nos ad though all excellence attracts us se allicit, tamen justitia et to itself, yet justice and liber- liberalitas id maxime eflTicit ality do this most. 772, The Conjunctions of Comparison tamquam, quasi (velut si, ut si, proinde ac si), as if, take the Subjunctive. — 226 — The Tenses follow the general rule of Sequence (743)\ accord- ingly the Present and Perfect Subjunctive are sometimes used where the English idiom would suggest the Imperfect^ as: superbi saepe ita se gerunt, haughty people often behave as quasi ipsi soli sint homines if they alone were men. The Particles of Comparison: (it, sicut, quemadmodum, as, usually referring to ita, sic, so, take the Indicative: ut sementem feceris, ita metesj as you soWj so shall you reap. [255, 256.] Temporal Conjunctions. 773, As a rule, Temporal Clauses take the Indicative; they are introduced by the following Conjunctions: postquam, after that, after cum, when ^^.^^ f^. I while, until iibi, when donee) simiilac ) ^^ g^^^ ^^ quoad, up to simulatque i quamdifi, as long as utprimum Uhe first moment antequam I j^^fore that, before cum prlmum ) that (see 737) priusquam ) 774, Temporal cum, meaning when, at the time when, takes the Indicative of all the tenses, as: ager cum multos annos quievit, when a field has rested many uberiOres efferre fructus solet years, it usually produces a more abundant crop oracula Graeci consulebant, cum the Greeks consulted the oracles bella erant inituri when they were to begin war. 775, Historical cQm, meaning when, as, takes the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. Agesilaus cum ex Aegypto re- Agesilaus died as he was re- verteretur, mortuus est turning from Egypt cum Caesar Anconam occupas- when Caesar had occupied An- set, urbem reliquimus cona, we left the city. 776, diim, quoad and donSc (=quamdiri), so long as, while, take the Indicative of all the tenses; in narrative dum, while, takes the Present Indicative. {734) dum spiro, spero while there is life, there is hope quoad potuit, restitit as long as he could, he withstood haec dum aguntur, domi res while this was going on, affairs quietae erant were quiet at home. — 227 — 777, dum, quoad, don€c, untile take the Present, Perfect and Future Perfect Indicative when a, fact is to be expressed, as: hand desinam, donee perfecero / will not ceasCy until I shall have accomplished. 778, dum, qudad, untily implying purpose, doubt or futurity, take the Subjunctive: Alexander paulisper exercitum Alexander ordered the army to consistere jussit, donee consi- halt a short time^ until the deret pulvis dust should he down. 779, antSquam and priusquam, before^ have in narration the same construction as historical cum or postquam, viz. either the Subjunctive of the Imperfect and Pluperfect, or the Perfect Indica- tive, as: Achaei non ante ausi sunt bel- the Achaeans did not dare to ium capessere quam ab Roma begin the war before the am- revertissent legati bassadors had returned from Borne antequam bellum urbia nostrae before war consumed the wealth opes absumpsit, potentissima of our city it was very pow- fuit erfuL 780, In reference to Future Time, these conjunctions take the Present and Future Perfect Indicative, also the Present Subjunctive, as: tempestas minatur, antequam the storm .threatens before it surgat rises ante revertar quam luna bis im- / will return before the moon pleverit orbem Jias twice filled her orb. [257, 258.] Causal Conjunctions. 781, The foUowiiig Causal Conjunctions take the Indicative: ^^l^ i because JZ^mdem I 't'frj!T' ^^^^^* siquidem f ^^'^^ ^" quoniam jam nox est, in vestra since it is now night, go to your tecta discedite ' houses quia natura mutari non potest, because nature cannot change, idcirco verae amicitiae aeter- therefore true friendships nae sunt are everlasting. — 228 — 782. The Subjunctive is used in causal clauses when a statement is made not as a facty but as the assertion or opinion of some one else, as: Socrates accusatus est, quod Socrates was brought to trial corrumperet juventutem because (as they said) he cor- rupted youth. 783. After those verbs which express the feeling of joy^ grief, etc., as: gaudere, to rejoice; gratiam agSre, to thank; dolere, to grieve; glOriarl, to boast, quod is used to give the ground of emotion, as: quod scribis, gaudeo / ain glad that you write tibi gratias ago, quod me omni I thank you that you free me molestia liberas from all trouble. 784. qii5d, that, is also used to introduce explanatory clauses, chiefly after a Demonstrative: bene facis, quod me adjuvas you do well in assisting me quod Regulus rediit mihi mira- that Begulus returned seems bile videtur wonderful to me. 785. At the beginning of a sentence, quod is used in the sense of as to, especially in letters, as: quod de domo scribis. . , as to what you write of the house. . non qu5d, non quo, not as if, and non quin, not as if not, take the Subjunctive, as: pugiles ingemiscunt, non quod boxers groan not as if they dol6ant, sed quod omne cor- were in pain, but because all pus Intenditur the body is put to the stretch. 786. Causal ciim, as, since, takes the Suhjundive. cum vita sine amicis insidiarum since life without friends is full et metus plena sit, ratio ipsa of treachery and fear, reason monet amicitlas comparare itself advises us to contract friendships. [2S9. 2eo.] Conditional Conjunctions. 787. In a Conditional Sentence the clause containing the condition is called the Protasis, and that con- taining the conclusion the Apodosis. Protasis, si bovem non pQSsis, if you cannot drive an ox^ Apodosis. asinum agas drive a donkey. — 229 — The Protasis is regularly introduced by the conditional particle SI, i/, or one of its compounds, viz: nisi, unless sin, if not, but if si nOn, if not quodsi, but if 788. There are Three Classes of Conditional Sen- tences: I. The condition is represented as a fact: si with the Indicative in both clauses: fii Densest, aetemus est if there is a God, he is eternal, II. The condition is represented as possible or likely to be real- ized: si with Present or Perfect Subjunctive: si quis ita agat, imprudens sit if anybody were to act ihuSy he would not be wise. III. The condition is represented as contrary to fact: si with Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive: facerem, si possem / should do it if I could. 789. nist and si non are used for negative conditions; with nisi the negative belongs to the whole sentence, with si non to a particular word, as: nisi id confestim facis, te tradam unless you do this at once 1 magistratui shall deliver you to the ma- gistrate dolorem si non potero frangere, if I shall not be able to over- occultabo come sorrow^ I will conceal it, 790. The Subjunctive is used in Conditional Wishes with: dummodS \ dummodS n6 ) dum V if only, provided diim nS I prov ided only not modo ) modone ) odSrint, dum metuant let them hate if they only fear Athenienses summas laudes me- the Athenians deserve the high* rentur, dummodo ne tarn leves est praise if only they had fuissent not been so wanton. si mddd, if only^ provided that^ requires the Indicative. — 230 — Relative Clauses with the Subjunctive. 791. As a rule, the Relative Clause is in the In- dicatite when a definite fact is stated: planta, quae saepius transfer- a tree often transplanted does tur, non coalescit not thrive. 792. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses: I. to denote pnrpose or motive; qui = ut egO, ut tu, ut is, etc. missi sunt delecti cum Leonida, picked men were sent with qui Thermopylas occuparent Leonidas to take possession of Thermopylae, II. to denote the cause, on account of ivhich or the hindrance in spite of which; qui = cum 5g-6, cum tu, cum is, etc. (often with ut, utpote, as; quippe, namely). virum simplicem, qui nos nihil guileless man who hidest celet ! n othing from us I III. to denote result or to indicate a characteristic of the antecedent, sometimes in a restrictive sense, as: non is sum, qui hoc faciam lam not such a one as to do this orationes Catonis, quas quidem Cato's speeches as far as I have legerim read them. 793. The construction of the Consecutive or Characteristic Relative is especially common: a. after is, talis, ^usmodi, tantQs, tS,m with an Adjective or Adverb, solus and unus: est innocentia affectio talis animi, quae noceat nemini, innocence is such a quality of mind as to do harm to no one. h. after general expressions of existence and non-existence^ as: est qui ) there iSj there are habeo quod, / have to sunt qui ) some who reperiuntur qui, persons are nemo est qui, there is none to found who nihil est quod, there is nothing sunt qui censeant una animum cum corpore interlre, there are some who believe that the soul perishes together with the body. c. after digniis, indigniis, idoneus, aptus: jndignus es, cui fidc3 habeatur, you are unworthy of being believed. f 231 — 794. A clause joined to another by a Kelative, takes the Subjunctive, when it contains not the sentiment of the writer^ but of some other person alluded to, as: Paetus omnes libros, quos frater Faetus presented to me all the suus reliquisset, mihi donavit books that his brother had left. 795. Comparatives may be followed by qu^m iit, quam qui with the Subjunctive, corresponding to the English too. .to, as: damna majora sunt quam quae the losses ai^e too great to be aestimari possint estimated. [263. 264.] Direct Questions. 796. Questions in Latin are introduced by Inter- rogative Pronouns, Adverbs or Particles. Interrogative Pronouns, quis? quid? who? what? quisnam? quidnam? who, what pray? qui? quae? quod? which? uter? utra? iitriim? which of the two? qualis? quale? of what kind? quantus? quanta? quantum? how great? quotus? quota? quotum? what? (in number or order) quotusquisqug? quotaquaeque? quotumquodque? how few? quot? how many? Interrogative Adverbs. ub\? where? ubinam? where pray? xm^^t whence? undenam? whence pray? quo? whither? quonam? whither pray? qua? where? which way? quanam? which tvay pray? quando? when? quamdiu? how long? quotiens? how often? quousque? quomodo? I Jwio^ quam? (only before Adjectives and quemadmodLim? i * Adverbs) how? how much? cur? ) quantopere? (only before Verbs) quare? >- why? what for? how greatly? how much? quam ob rem? ) quidni? cur non? ivhy not? 797. The Interrogative Particles are: ne, num, nonne, titrum, an. Of these ne asks merely for information; it cannot stand by itself, but is joined to any emphatic word, usually the verb, which then comes first in the sentence ; it is not translated, as: omnisne pecunia deblta soliita est? is all the money owing paid? i — 232 — When a negative answer is expected, niim is used, which stands at the beginning of the sentence and is likewise not translated, as: num vespertilTo avis est? /6* the bat a bird? With non, ne forms a special interrogative particle nonnS, not; the answer expected is yes, as: nonne lectio hujus libri te de- does not the perusal of this lectat? book delight you? 798. Double or Alternative questions have the fol- lowing forms: utrum, whether . . an, or. . n6, '' . . an " . . utrum domi fuisti an in schola? domlne fuisti an in schola? domi fuisti an in schola? an ** .. have you been at home or in school? Sometimes the first part of an alternative question is omitted or implied, and Sn alone asks a question, as: an nescis regibus longas esse or perhaps do you not know manus? that kings have long arras? In Direct questions or not is annon; in Indirect necne. utrum domi fuisti annon? have you been at home or not? QUESTION AND ANSWER. 799. In answering a question the emphatic word is generally repeated, as: vidistine eum? did you see him? vidi, yes^ I did, solusne venisti? did you come alone? non solus, no^ I did not The following Responsives are also used in answer to a direct question: yes no ita, so non ita, no^ not so ? ita est, so it is minime, by no means ita v6ro est, so it is indeed minim6 vfiro, by no means in- sane, of course deed sane quidSm, yeSj indeed nihil minus, nothing less so fitiam, even so neutiquam, not at all. verO, truly^ in truth — 233 — 800. Immo, as a negative, substitutes something stronger in tlie place of a previous statement, as: causa igitur non bona est? Im- the cause j theuj is a had one? mo optima J^ay, it is an excellent one num ille tibi familiaris est? Im- is he a friend of yours? On the mo alienissimus contrary, a perfect stranger. [265, 266.] Indirect Questions. 801. The Subjunctive is used in such questions as are dependent upon some word in the former part of the sentence (Indirect Questions). The words: ubi fuisti? where have you been ? are a Direct Question, with the verb in the Indicative; in the sentence; die mihi ubi fueris, tell me where you have been, the same words are an Indirect Question, and the dependent verb is in the Subjunctive Mood, qualis sit animus ipse animus the mind itself knows not what nescit the mind is quis ego sim me rogitas? do you ask me who lam? 802. Indirect Questions have the same particles as the direct, niiiu and n6, corresponding to whether in English; si, if is used for whether after tentarg, exp^riri, to try, and exspectarS, to expect Epaminondas quaesivit salvusne Epaminondas asked whether esset clipgus his shield was safe paludem si nostri transirent the enemy were waiting (to see) hostes exspectabant whether our men would cross the swamp, 803. INDIEECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. quaere utrum verum an falsum sit \ quaere verumne an falsum sit f / ask whether it is true or quaero verum an falsum sit C false quaere verum falsumne sit J When the interrogative particle is omitted in the first member, n€ may stand in the second, but only in Indirect Questions. or not in Indirect Questions is necne, as: dii utrum sint, necne sint, quaeritur, the question is whether there are gods or not, [267, ^68,^ — 234 — The Imperative. 804. The Imperative is used to express a command^ wish, advice or exhortation. The Present Imperative denotes that an action is to be performec at once, or to be continued if actually being performed, as: si quid in te peccavi, ignosce if I have sinned against you^ forgive me justitiam cole et pietatem cultivate justice and piety. The Future Imperative is used where there is a direct reference t< future time; it corresponds to the imperative use of the Englisl Future with shall or to the Imperative let, and is properly used ii general directions, laws, statutes and wills, as: regie imperlo duo sunto, consu- there shall he two officers wit) les appellantor royal power] they shall hi called consuls. 805. The regular negative of the Imperative is ne, which : however, in classical Latin only found with the Future Imperative, as: hominem mortuum, inquit lex, thou shalt not bury a dead man in urbe ne sepelito in the city, says the law. In prohibitions instead of the Negative Imperative the following forms of the Subjunctive with ne are usually employed: the second person of the Perfect Subjunctive, as: hoc ng feceris, leave that undone; the third person of the Present Subjunctive : puer telum ne habeat, a hoy is not to have a weapon. 806. Instead of the Simple Imperative several Imperatiy Phrases are common: ciira lit, take care that ) fac ut, cause that > each with the Subjunctive. fac, do ) cura ut quam primum venias, come as soon as possible; valetudinem tuam fac ut cures, talce care of your health. cave ne, beware lest ) ^^^ ^.^^ ^j^^ Subjunctive. cav6, beware ) noli, be unwilling, with the Infinitive, cave festines, do not be in a hurry; cave existimes, do not think^ noli me tangere, do not touch me; noli putare, do not suppose* {269, 270. — 235 — The Infinitive. 807. The Infinitive is not limited to a particular number or person, as the ordinary verbal forms, but is really a Verbal Noun, The Infinitive governs the case of its verb, and is modified by adverbs and not by adjectives, as: legere librum, the reading of a hook; diligenter legere librum, the careful reading of a book. 808. The Infinitive may be used as the Subject of a verb. As such it is chiefly found with ess6 and impersonal verbs: nunquam est utile peccare to do wrong is never useful interest omnium recte facSre it is the interest of all to do right. When the verb esse, to be (or others of similar meaning, see 540) with an Adjective or Noun is used as the Subject of the sentence, such Adjective or Noun is put in the Accusative; as: senem ante tempus figri miserum est, it is miserable to grow old before the time. 809. The Infinitive is used as the Object of verbs. Such are verbs denoting: to be able^ must, dare, posse, debere, audSre to begin, continue, cease, incipere, pergere, desinSre to be accustomed, learn, know how, assuescere, discSre, scire to wish, desire, resolve^ velle, cupere, statuere. vincere scis, Hannibal, victoria uti nescis, hoiu to win victory you know, Hannibal; how to make use of victory you know not. When the verb esse, to be (or others of similar meaning, see 540) with an Adjective or Noun is used as the Object of a verb, such Adjective or Noun is put in the Nominative, as: beatus esse sine virtute nemo potest, no one can be happy without virtue. The Infinitive of the Present i^ often used for the tenses of the Indicative in lively narration, and takes the Subject in the Nomina- tive (Historical Infinitive.) pars cedere, alii insequi, neque a pai^t give way, others press signa neque ordines servare on, they hold neither to stand- ards nor ranks. .^ii, 272,-] — 236 — Accusative with the Infinitive. 810. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used like the Enghsh Objective with the Infinitive in such sen- tences as: hoc verum esse scimus, we know this to he true. In English we might also say: We know that this is true; but Latin permits only of the Infinitive Construction. 811. The Accusative with the Infinitive may be the Subject of the sentence. The Predicate is either a noun or an adjective with est, or an impersonal verb The most common phrases under this rule are: par est, it is fair justum est, it is just certum est, it is certain crgdibile est, it is credible fas est, it is right nefas est, it is forbidden fama est, the story goes opinio est, there is a report spes est, there is hope oportgt, there is need, ought apparSt, it is clear constat, it is agreed, evident cond licit, expSdit, it is useful convenit, it is fitting placet, it pleases displicet, it displeases n^cesse est, it must needs opus est, there is need me scribSre oportet, / must vjrite or / ought to write certum est lib^ros amari, it is certain that children are loved. 812. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used as the Object of verbs of Perceiving and Declaring: Verba sentiendi: sentlrg, to perceive, notice animadvertere, to see audirS, to hear vidSrS, to see accipSrg, to hear comp^rlre, to ascertain cognosc6r6, to know intelleggre, to learn cogitare, to think arbitrari, credSrS, to believe Verba dedarandi: declararg, to declare dicere, to say nggare, to deny aflSrmarS, to affirm respondSrg, to answer scrlbere, to write fateri, to confess demonstrare, to prove narrare, to tell nuntiarg, to bring woru aves vidimus constru6re nidos, we see that birds build nests; nemo negabit se esse mortalem, no one will deny that he is mortal — 23T — 813. Verba of Perceiving take the Aco. with the Pres. Participle to represent the object as actually seen^ heard, etc., as: Catonem vidi in bibliotheca sedentem, / saw Cato sitting in the library. 814. Verbs of Wishing and Desiring take a depen- dent Accusative with the Infinitive. Such are: ' volo, I wish cupiO, I desire sinO, I permit nolo, I do not wish jiibeo, Ibid patior, I suffer malo, Hike better vgtO, I forbid discipulum me habSri volo, non I wish to be taken for a learner^ doctOrem not for a teacher Caesar pontem jubet rescind! Caesar orders the bridge to be broken down. These verbs may take the simple Infinitive when the subject remains the same. Instead of the Accusative with the Infinitive, ut with the Subjunctive is frequently used with this class of verbs (758); but never with nolo, and seldom with volo and malo; jub6o and veto regularly take the Accusative with the Infinitive. 815. Verbs of Emotion, as: gaud5rg, to rejoice, gratiam ag6r6, to thank, d6l6r6, to grieve (see 783) may be considered as verbs ot saying and thinking and, as such, take an Aconsative with Infinitive, as: salvum te advenisse gaud6o, / rejoice that you have arrived safe, 816. To translate such clauses as are introduced in English by the conjunction that, and require in Latin the Accusative with the Infinitive, take no notice of that; translate the English Nominative following that by the Latin Acousative; translate the English Verb by the Latin Infinitive. 817. A Predicate Noun or Adjective and the Par- ticiples of the Compound Infinitives must agree with the Accusative- Subject; but, of course, the Supine remains unaltered. sentlo borgam frigidum esse I feel that the north-wind is cold medici causa morbi inventa cu- physicians think that when the ratiOnem esse inventam pu- cause of disease is discovered, tant the cure has been discovered. [273, 274,] — 238 — Tenses of the Infinitive. 818. After Verbs of Perceiving and Declarim (verba sentiendi et declarandi) the Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action, the Perfect Infinitive expresses antecedent action, the Future Infinitive expresses future action. Present Infinitive. I. credo eum scrib6re I believe that he is writing II. credebam eum scribgre / believed that he was writing. Perfect Infinitive. I. credo eum scripsisse / believe that he has written II. credebam eum scripsisse / believed that he had written. Future Infinitive. I. credo eum scripturum esse / believe that he will write II. credebam eum scripturum esse / believed that he would write. I. After a Principal Tense translate: the Infinitive like the Indicative of the same tense. II. After a Historical Tense translate: the Infinitive Present like the Indicative Imperfect the Infinitive Perfect *^ Indicative Pluperfect the Infinitive Future *^ Subjunctive Imperfect (should and would). 819. The Future Infinitive is often expressed by fore or fGttirii: esse lit — necessarily so when the verb has no Supine, as: credo fore ut pluat / believe it will rain credebam fore ut pluSret / believed it would rain. 820. The Personal Pronouns, which are in general used only fo tlie sake of distinction or emphasis, must be always expressed ia the Accusative with Infinitive. For the Pronouns of the third person the Keflexive se is used in reference to the subject of the Principal Clause, and the Demonstratives etim, ^^m, eos, eas when referring to another noun. nemo tam senex est qui se an- no one is so old but thinks he^ num non putet posse vivere can live another year Ennius deos esse censet, sed Ennius believes that there are eos non curare opinatur, quid gods^ but he does not think agat humanum genus they care ivhat mankind are doing. [275, 276, 'i — 239 — Nominative with the Infinitive. 821. With Passive Verbs of Perceiving and De- claring, instead of the Infinitive with the Accusative a personal construction is more common by which the Subject Accusative becomes the Subject Nominative of the leading verb: Nominative with the Infinitive. Accus. with Inf. tradunt Horaerum caecum fuisse, they say that Ho- mer was blind Nomin. with Inf. HomSrus caecus fuisse traditur, Homer is said to have been blind, 822. Especially to be noted is the construction of the Nominative with the Infinitivo after: jubgo, I order sino, I permit veto, I forbid vid^or, I seem eonsules jubentur exercltum the consuls are ordered to levy scribgre an army omnibus vidSmur recte fecisse, it seems to all that we did right quod amici causam defender!- in defending the cause of our mus friend, [277. 278.] Direct Discourse. 823. A Statement which gives the exact words of the original speaker or writer is called oratTo recta, or Direct Discourse. mquUm, quoth /, is used in direct quotations, ajo, / say, in indirect quotations, inquam always follows one or more of the words quoted. When a nominative is added to inquit, it commonly follows this verb: uva, inquit vulpes, nondum matura est, the grape is not yet ripe J says the fox [279. 28o.] Indirect Discourse. 824. An Indirect Quotation expresses a thought in= directly, as reported^ recognized or contemplated by- some one: oratTo obliqua. — 240 — Oiaiio recta. Oratio ol)liqua. Socrates dicere solebat: ''omnes Socrates dicSre solebat, omnes in eo quod sciunt satis sunt in eo quod scirent, satis eloquentes," Socrates used to esse eloquentes ; Socrates say: '^All men are eloquent used to say that all men were enough in what they under- eloquent enough in what they stand.^^ understood. 825. In Indirect Discourse the Verb of the Principal Clause is in the Infinitive and its Subject in the Accu- sative; Dependent Clauses connected with it by Rela- tives and Particles take the Subjunctive. Interrogative Sentences are put in the Subjunctive according to 801. Ariovistus ad postulata Caesaris Ariovistus gave a brief answer pauca respondit : quid sibi to Caesar's demands : what vellet? cur in suas posses- did he mean? why did he siones veniret? come into his possessions? Imperative Sentences are put in the Subjunctive ; the negative is, of course, ne. raandata remittunt, quorum haec they sent back orders of which erat summa : Caesar in Gal- the substance was as follows: Ham reverteretur, exercitus Caesar should return into dimittSret Gaul and disband his armies. 826. A Clause depending upon a Subjunctive or In- finitive takes the Subjunctive if it is regarded as an integral part of that clause. This is called Attraction of Mood. mos est Athenis laudari in con- it is custom at Athens for those cione eos, qui sint in proeliis to be publicly eulogized who interfecti have been slain in battle. 827. The Subjunctive is used in subordinate clauses to express the thought of some other person than the speaker or writer • quos vicSris, amicos tibi esse do not believe that those whom cave credas you have conquered are your friends, 828. All references to the Subject of the leading clause are re- gularly expressed by the Eeflexive sGi (stlGs) ; as: animus sentit se sua vi moveri, the mind feels that it moves by its own force. 1281. 282.\ — 241 — Participles. S29. There are two Participles in the Active Voice: the Present Participle denotes continuance^ as: scribens, writing; the Future Participle is used to express what is likely or about to happen, as: scrlpturiis, about to write, 830. There are two Participles in the Passive Voice : the Perfect Participle denotes completionj as: seriptus, written; the Gerundive (so-called Future Participle) denotes necessity or pro- priety , as: scrlbendus, to be written. 831. Deponent Verbs have four Participles: the Present Participle, as: hortans, exhorting; the Perfect Participle, as: hortatus, having exhorted; the Fut. Part. Act., as: hortaturus, being about to exhort; the Fut. Part. Pass., as: hortandiis, to be exhorted. 832. The Participles are used attributively, or in the manner of ordinary Adjectives, as: arbor florens, a blossoming tree scripta epistula, a written letter puer dormiens, a sleeping boy urbs obsessa, a besieged town. 833. The Participles are used with the utmost freedom appositively, and may have the value of a Helative, as: divitiae semper duraturae, riches which will last forever; - of while^ wheUf after, as: Plato scribens mortuus est, Plato died while writing; of if, as: mendaci homini ne verum quidem dicenti credimus, we do not believe a liar, even if he speaks the truth; of since, because, as: cantus olorlnus recte fabulosus habetur nunquam audltus, the swanks song is justly regarded as fabulous, because it has never been heard; of though, although, as : oculus se non videns alia cernit, the eye, though not seeing itself sees other things; of to, in order to (expressing a purpose), as: Scipio in Africam • trajgcit Carthaginem deleturus, Scipio crossed over into Africa to destroy Carthage. — 242 — ^ 834. The Participle with a negative, as non, nihil I is often best rendered by tvithout and a Participial Nouriy as: raulti homines vitupe- rant libros non intellectos, many men find fault with hooks without understanding them. 835. Verbs of Perceiving take the Accusative with the Present Participle, when the object is to be represented as actually seen, heard, etc.; also: facere, induc6re, to represent, introduce (see 813), as: vidi pu6ros ludentes / saw the boys playing Xenophon facit Socratem dispu- Xenophon represents Socrates tantem disputing. [195, 196, 283^286.\ Ablative Absolute. 836. A Noun or Pronoun with a Participle is used in the Ablative Case absolutely to express some accom- panying circumstance or condition of the action. The Ablative Absolute may be translated by the English iVom in a^tre Absolute which is a close equivalent; but, as a rule, the same change of form is required as in translating Participles in general (see 833). Examples are: Numa Pompillo regnante. Numa Pompilius reigning. WJien Nu- maPompilius was reigning. In the reign of Numa Pompilius. Tito imperante. In the reign of the emperor Titus. Caesare interfecto. Caesar being, having been murdered. When Caesar had been murdered. After the murder of Caesar. Another Ablative should not be placed in apposition with the abla- tive absolute. Thus we may say: puero mortiio, the boy having died; but not: Gaio puero mortuo, the boy Gaius having died; this should be expressed by: cum Gains puer mortuus esset. The ablative ab- solute with the Future Participle is also avoided by the classic authors. An Adjective, or another Noun may take the place of the Parti- ciple, as: . Xerxe rege. Xerxes being king. natura duce.iVa^iire being the leader. Under the guidance of nature. noleutibus nobis. While we are unwilling. Against our will. In spite of us. patre invito. While father is, was unwilling. A gainst father's ivill. 243 — 837. The want of a Perfect Active Participle in Latin is frequently supplied by the Ablative Ab- solute with a Perfect Passive Participle, thus: Caesar, urbe capta, rediit \ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ returned: I Having taken the city, Caesar returned. il97. 198, 287. 288.} Gerund. 838. As the Infinitive is used as a Verbal Noun in the Nominative and Accusative Cases, so the Gerund, corresponding to the English participial noun in ing^ is used in the remaining cases, viz.: Norn. scribSre est utile writing is useful Gen. ars scribendi the art of writing Oat. scribendo adfiii J was present at the writing Ace. scribere disco I learn to wr^ite ad scribendum utilis useful for writing Abl. scribendo discimus we learn by writing. 83fi K The Gerund governs the same case as the verb: ars scribendi epistulam the art of writing a letter cupidus te audiendi desirous of hearing you jnjurlas ferendo by bearing wrong. ^ ad beate vivendum for living happily parendo legibus by obeying the laws. Gerundive. 840. The Gerundive, in its adjective use, denotes 7iecessity or propriety. Its most frequent use is with esse in the Passive Periphrastic Con- jugation (see 314). The neuter of the Gerundive witli est, erat, etc., is used impersonally if what is said holds good of people in general, as: vivendum est, we or you must live. But the person by whom may also be added in the Dative, thus: mihi scribendum est, I must or should write tibi scribendum est, thou must or shouldst write ei scribendum est, he must or should write nobis scribendum est, tve must or should write vobis scribendum est, you must or should write eis scribendum est, they must or should write. — 244 — 84:1. The Gerundive is used as an Objective Predi cate to denote Purpose after verbs signifying to give takCy send J leave j as: curare, to take care accipgre, to receive dare, to give permittSre, to permit relinqugre, to leave locare, to let, lease mittgre, to send conducSre, to contract for diviti homini id aurum servan- Tie gave that gold to a rich mar dum dedit to keep, 842. The Gerundive of verbs governing the accu sative is frequently used instead of the Gerund the following manner: The Accusative is put in the same Case as the Gerund; The Gerund is then changed into the Gerundive; The Gerundive is made to agree with the Substantive in Gender, Number and Case; thus: Gerund. Gerundive. Gen. scribendi epistiilam scribendae epistiilae Dat scribendo epistulam scribendae epistulae Ace. ad scribendum epistulam ad scribendain epistulam Abi. scribendo epistulam scribenda epistula. 843. The Genitive of the Gerund or Gerundive used with nouns and adjectives, as: ars Vivendi, the art of living equitandi peritus, skillful in riding consilium urbis delendae, a civitatis regendae peritus, skill plan for destroying the city ful in governing the state. Very common are causa and gratia, on account of for tM sake of for the purpose of with the Genitive of Gerund and Gerun- dive to point out design or purpose, as: memoriae exercendae gratia, /or the sake of exercising the memory. 844. The Dative of the Gerund or Gerundive is used with adjectives of fitness and their opposites: Tltnis, -6, useful, good apttts, -&, -iim, adapted, suited inatnts, -6, useless^ unfit idonStis, -a, -iim, fit, suitable — 245 - to denote the object for which; but the more common construction of these adjectives is that of the Ac- cusative with ad, to^ thus : aqua utilis bibendo, water good for drinking^ charta inutilis ad scribendum, paper unfit to write upon. 845. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive is most frequently used after ad, to, denoting pur- pose, as: ad colendos agros, for cultivating the fields; me vocas ad scribendum, you summon me to write; propensus ad discendum, inclined to learn. 846. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive is used as Ablative of means or instrument, and most frequently after the preposition in, m, as: mens discendo alitur, the mind is nourished by learning moderatio in jocando, restraint in joking, [199, 200. 289-292.] Supine. 847. The Supines are verbal nouns of the Fourth Declension, having only the accusative and ablative* singular, as: amatum, amatu, to love. The Former Supine (in iim) is used after verbs of motion to ex- press the purpose of the motion; it has an active meaning, as: venio te rogatum / come to ask you. With the passive infinitive iri (lit. to he gone) the Supine in Gm forms the Future Infinitive Passive, amatum iri, to he about to be loved {315). The Latter Supine (in u) has a passive meaning-, it is used only with a few Adjectives denoting ease or difficulty, pleasure or dis- pleasure, right or wrong; with the nouns ^s, right, ii€fa.s, wrong, sometimes with dpiis, need, as: quid est tam jucundum audltu? what is so agreeable in hearing^ — 246 — Equivalents of the Supine. 848. The Former Supine, as an expression of purpose, is not very common, its place being supplied in various ways. Thus the sen- tence: The Carthaginians sent ambassadors to sue for peace^ may be rendered: Supine. Carthaginienses legates miserunt pacem petitum. *th "d 3^* legates miserunt ad pacem petendam. „^a ' 1 C. legates misgrunt pacis petendae *causa. causai \ Put. Part. C. legates mis6runt pacem petituros. ut w. Snbj. C. legates miserunt, ut pacem petSrent. qui w. Snbj. C. legatos miserunt, qui pacem peterent. The use of the Latter Supine is confined to a few verbs, as: dictH, to tell; facta, to do; audita, to hear; visii, to see. With facilis, dif- ficilis, jucundiis, the construction of S,d with the gerund is more common, as: res est facilis ad cognoscendum (cognitu), the thing is easy to Jcnow, [293, 294.] Co-ordinating Conjunctions. 849. The following Particles are called Copulative Conjunctions: et, -que, atque (ac), ani neque, and not gti^m, quoque, also et is simply and, the most common and general copulative, and connects independent words and clauses without any additional meaning; -que, affixed to the word it annexes, combines things that belong closely to one another; atque adds a more important to a less important member. The following may serve as an example to illustrate the various usages: dies et noctes means days and nights , simply; dies noctesque '* days and nights, q>8 o, whole; dies atque noctes ** days and (also) nights, furem fur cognoscit, et lupus thief knows thief, and wolf iupum knows wolf dum vires annique sinunt, tole- work while your strength and rate laborem years permit you intra moenia atque in sinu urbis within the walls and even in sunt hostes the heart of the city are the enemies. — 247 — Sc does not stand before a vowel or h; atqu6 either before vowels or consonants. They generally mean as, than, after adjectives and adverbs of likeness and unlikeness, as: aeque ac, as much as^ equally as; seciis He, aliter atque, otherwise than. e,t\^ixi iy\i. and farther) eveUj yet, stilly adds a new circumstance, and generally precedes the words to which it belongs; qudque, so alsoy which refers only to a single word and follows that word, im- plies a sameness in the whole, as: etiam mendlcus mendico invidet even the beggar envies the beggar otia corpus alunt, animus quo- rest strengthens the body, the que parscitur illis mind, too, is thus supported. 850. Several Subjects or Objects, standing in the same relations, either talie et throughout: polysyndeton, i. q. joined in various ways; or omit it throughout: asyndeton, i. e. unconnected', or take que only after the last member, Ihus: sumraa Me et constantia et justitla | ^ .^^ ^J^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^J^ ^^, summaflde,consania,justitia ^ stanay and justice. summa fide, constantia, justitiaque ) et is used after multi followed by another adjective, where in English and is usually omitted; as: muitae et magnae arbores, m^any large trees, 851. In the second member of a sentence and not is expressed by neque, as: dicunt, neque dubitant, they say and do not doubt Mark the following Idiomatic Expressions: and no one neque quisquam nor any one and no neque ullus nor any and nothing neque quidquam 7ior any thing and never nSque unquam nor ever 852. The following are Disjunctive Conjunctions: aut, vel, -ve, sive (seu), or. aut, or, denotes absolute exclusion or substitution, as: vinceris aut vincis, you are conquered or conquering. vel (lit. you may choose) gives a choice, often with 6tiam, even, potiiis, rather^ as: hie populus indomitus vel potius this untamable or rather savage immanis people. — 248 — -v5, which is always aflSxed to another word, is only a weaker form of vglj as: pins minusvS, more or less. sivg (seu), if you choose j indicates merely an alternative of words, as: discessus sive potius turpissima the decampment^ or rather the fuga most shameful flight. [295, 296.] 853. The following are Adversative Conjunctions: autem, sed, verum, vero, 3.t, hut atqui, hut for all that tameii, nevertheless ceterum, for the rest The weakest of them all in adversative power is autSm which is only used to connect sentences, and commonly follows the first word, spiritus promptus, caro autem the spirit is willing^ hut the infirma flesh is weak. sed has two meanings; after affirmative sentences it is equivalent to hut (yet)', after negative sentences to hut (on the contrary), homo proponit, sed Deus dispO- man proposeth, hut God dis- nit poseth non opus est verbis, sed fustibus there is no need of words, hut of knocks. verQin, lit: it is true, always takes the first place in the sen- tence; vero, lit: in truth, is generally put in the second place: verum praeterita omittamus but let us lay aside past things illud vero plane ferendum non hut this, indeed, is not at all to est he suffered. at is stronger than s5d ; and atqui, hut for all that, is even stronger again: populus me sibilat, at mihi the mob may hiss me, hut I plaudo congratulate myself rem difficilem, inquis, et in- a hard case, you say, and an explicabilem. Atqui expli- inexplicable one. And never- canda est theless it ought to he explained. tamSn, yet, nevertheless, is the usual correlative of a concessive conjunction; generally it comes first unless a particular word is to be made emphatic: nattiram expellas furca, tamen usque recurret, - you may drive out nature with a pitchfork, for all that she will ever be returning. 249 — i 854. The Causal Conjunctions are: n^iu, euim, namque, etenim, for nSjn is always put at the beginning, enim always follows the first word of the sentence; namqug and etenim are commonly put in the first place. 855. The Illative Conjunctions are: itaque, Tgitiir, ergo, therefore ideo, idcirco, on that account proinde, accordingly itaque is put at the beginning of the sentence and is used of fads; ig"itur follows one or more words in its clause, and is used of opinions; ergo, therefore^ denotes necessary consequence and is more emphatic than igitur; it is put at the beginning of the sen- tence or after an emphatic word; proinde is only employed in ex- hortations: quot homines, tot sententiae; many nien^ many minds; there" falli igitur possumus fore we may he mistaken negat haec filiam me suam esse; she says that I am not her non ergo haec mater mea est daughter, therefore she is not my mother proinde fac magno animo sis! accordingly j be of good cheer! 856. neque is used for non with the conjunctions: enim, vero, t^nien, igitur, thus: neque enim, for not neque vero, but not neque tamen, yet not neque igitur, therefore not. [297, 298,] Corresponsive Conjunctions. 857. Some Conjunctions frequently have a Corre- lative in the preceding clause, to which they cor- respond. Copulative. 6t . . 6t, both . . and nequ6 . . nec|^u5 } y^eujier nor cum . . tum, both . . and especially nee . . n6c j modo. .modo ) nequ6. .-quS, on the one hand 'V nunc . . nunc i not . . and on the other tiim..tum, then.. then 6t..n6qu6, on the one hand., tam . . quam, both . .and and on the other hand not : — 250 — n5n solum . . sSd ettam J non modo. . s6d Stiam >- not only. . but also nOn tantiim . . sed etiam ) Disjunctive. Comparative. ''^l-^^H either.. or »*v'^^ .,. .,. las..s v6l . . vel ) quern admodum . . ita i siv6 . . SI v6, whether . . or [299, soo. POETICAL FORMS. Prosody. 858. Prosody means Accent, and since Latin accent is regu lated by quantity, Prosody, in the classic sense^ has reference to the length of syllables, measured by the length of time taken up in pro- nouncing them. By modern Grammarians, Prosody is used in a wider sense to include both quantity and versification. Quantity. 859. As a general rule, each simple vowel is either long (-) or short, (w) and each syllable is considered as either long or short, ac- cording as it contains either a long or a short vowel — (Longs and Shorts by Nature). A long syllable is generally reckoned in length equal to two short ones. 860. All diphthongs and vowels formed by contraction are long: aurum, cogo (c6-ago), mSlo (magis volo), nil (nihil), junior (juvenior). Likewise e and i when corresponding to Greek ei : Aeneas, Alexandrea, Thalia, Arion. 861. A vowel before another vowel is shorty no account being taken of h, as: pius, deus, traho. Even a vowel naturally long or a diphthong becomes short before another vowel, as: d6orsum, praeopto. Exceptions: e in ei of the Piffch Declension is long when a vowel precedes, as: diei, but fidei. i in the Genitive form itis is long; it is, however, sometimes made j short in verse, but never in alius (for alilus). In fio, i is long, except when followed by er, as: ti5, fiebam;] but fieri. In the Vocative of proper names in -Igiis, -eivi», a and e are j long: ©ai, Pompei. — 251 — In words from the Greek, vowels are often long before a vowel, because long in the original, as: aer, museum, eos, Agesilaus, Amphion. 862. A syllable with a short vowel is considered as long when the short vowel is followed by two or more consonants or a double consonant either in the same or in the following syllable, as: est, essem, restare, dux. The consonants may be divided between two words, as sub sld6r6. A short syllable made long by this rule is said to be long hy Position. 863. But if the syllable ends in a short vowel, and the next syllable in the same word begins with a mute (see 6,) followed by r or 1, the syllable before the two consonants is common (anceps) — that is, it may be either long or shor^t (y) in verse, as in tenSbrae; in prose it is invariably short. 864. Every vowel sound followed by j is long; only compounds of jugum, yoke J retain the short vowel before j, as: bijugus, two-horse. 865. Forms from the same stem, whether Inflections, Deriva- tives, or Compounds retain the original quajitity of the radical syllable, even when the vowel is changed, as: amor, amicus, inimlcus, inimicitia s3>pio, sapor, sapiens, insipiens. from fido Middle Syllables. 866, Perfects and Supines of two syllables have the first syllable long even when that of the present is short, as: venT, vidi, vici. Exceptions: 1 Perfects: bibi, dedi, fidi steti, stiti, tQli, scidi. 10 Supines: datura, ratum, satnm citum, ituin, statum litum, quitum, situm, riitum. Exceptions: pax, pacis from paciscor fides rex, regis u rego fidelis sedes u sedeo perfidus v5x, voois u voco perfidia dux, dficis li duco but: n5ta j nOtio ^ ndtare ) confido u notus diffido lidus ddium a 5di infidus fiducia I — 252 — 867. Reduplicated Perfects shorten both syllables, but the second may be made long by position, as: tango, tgtlgi — fallo, fgfelli. The only exception is caedo, cecidi in distinction from cado, cecidi. 868. Perfects in Qi have their stem vowel short, as: vSto-vetuI; pl5.c6o-piacuI; c61o-c61iii. Exceptions: debSo, = dehibSO; florae from flos; par^O, and pono, but posui. 869. Supines in ittim have i long when from Perfects in Tvl (ii), as: cupitum, petitum, auditum. recenseo has recensitum from recensLii in the Perfect. 870. Verbs in io (i6r) of the Third ConjugatioD have a short stem vowel: faciO, cGpIO, j2.cio, potior, &c. &c. 871. The verb endings imus, itis have only in the Present of the Fourth Conjugation a long penult; also in simus, sitis; posslmus, possitis; velimus, velitis; nolimus, nolitis; malimus, malitis; faxi- mus, faxitis. 872. In rimiis. and ritis of the Future Perfect, and Perfect Suh- junctive, i of the penult is common^ i. e., it may be long in verse, amaverimus, amav^ritis. 873. The terminations abtis, 5l)us, gbtis in plural cases, have a long penult, ibiis and tibus a short one. filiabus, duobus, diebus — duclbus, acGbus. 874. Derivative Adjectives in alis, aris, anQs, ivfls, 5siis have the penult long: naturalis, vulgaris, hunianus, nativus, odi- osus; those in icus and idiis have it short: bellicus, cupidus. Exceptions: amicus, anticus, apricus, posticus, pudicus. 875. Verbal Adjectives in ilio have the penult shorty as docilis, facilis. But Derivatives from nouns have it long\ as hostilis, pueriHs. Exceptions: humilis from humus; parilis from par. 876. Adjectives in intls have the penult long^ as: divinus, genuinus, peregrinus, vicinus. But if such Adjectives denote time or material^ the penult ig shorty as: adamantinus, crastinus, diutinus. Exceptions: matutfuus, yespertiuus, repentinus, — 253 — Final Syllables. 877. In words of more than one syllable, final a, e, and y are short J i, o, and u are long: 1. a is short: terra, tecta, capita. Exceptions: Ablative of the First Declension: terra. Vocative of Greek words in as: Aenea. Imperative of First Conjugation: ama. Most uninflected words as triginta, antea, contra; but: ita, quiS. 2. e is short: rete, ips€, antg. Exceptions: Ablative of FiftJi Declension^ die. Imperative of Second Conjugation^ mone. Most Adverbs from Adjectives of the Second Declension^ as: recte, docte. But notice: b6n6, male, saepS, temerg, supernS, in- fern§. impune and necesse are from old forms impunis and necessis. Greek words in e (7) : Niobe, Tempe. 3. i is long: domini, viginti, amari. Exceptions: nisi, quasi. Dative and Vocative of Greek words^ Daphnidi, Alexi. i is common in: mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, ubi. Notice the Compounds: of iibi: ubinam, ubivis, ubique — of ibi: alibi, ibidem — of ut, utl: utinam, utique. 4. o is long: bono, amato. Exceptions: Nouns of the Third Declension and verbal forms, as: leO, vet6. 6g6, du5, m6d6, dummodd, tantummodd, quandS, quanddquidgm. 5. u is always long: cornu, fructii, auditii. 878. All Final Syllables that end in a single consonant other than s are short: Sd, amat, consQl, captit. Exceptions: Compounds of par, dispar, impar.— The Adverbs illlc, iliac, istGc. Many Greek nouns, as: aer, aether, crater; also alec, lien. — 254 — 879. Final as, es, os are long; final is, us, ys are short. 1. as is long: MessiEs, silvas, vocas. Exceptions: Greek nouns in Ss, ^dis, as Areas, Arc&dis. Greek accusative plur. : heroes, Arcad3;S. anS-s, anatis. 2. es is long: leges, dies, doces. Exceptions: Nom. Sing. Tliird Declension, when the Genitive has 6tis, itis, idis with short penult, as miles, seges, obses; but abies, aries, paries. Compounds of es, he; as: ades penes (Preposition). Greek words in es {eg) Thraees, ArcadSs. 3. OS is long: deos, nepos. Exceptions: compos, impds — Greek words in 6s: Delos. 4. is is short: canis, legis. Exceptions: Plural Cases of all Declensions: mensis, servis, nobis, omnis, partis (Aocus. pi.). The Nominative of such substantives as have in the Genitive itis, inis, entis, as Salamis, Samnis, Simois, -entis. Second Pers. Sing. Pros. Indie. Active, Fourth Conjugation audis; likewise veils, nolis, malis, possis and the Compounds of sis. pulvis and sanguis. 5. us is short: gladitis, vulnus, fructus, amamiis. Exceptions: Gen. Sing. Nom. and Ace. Plur. Fourth Declension., fructus. Nominative of the Third Declension when the Genitive has a long u: virtus, palus, tellus. Greek words with u long [ov) : triptis. 6. ys (in words of Greek origin) is short: chlamys, Halys. Monosyllables. 880. All words of one syllable that end in a vowel, are long: a, da, me, de, hi, pro, tu. The attached particles -qug, -ve, -ne, -ce, -te, -pte are short. On the Prefix r6 see below 885, I — 'JDO — 881, Substantives and Adjectives of one syllable are lonQf when they end in a consonant even if the stem-syllable be short, as: os, raos, ver, sol, fur, plus; pes (pedis), bos (bovTs), par (paris). Exceptions: vir. l^c, os (ossis), mel cof, v3.s (vadis), fel. liie, this 07ie, is sometimes short. 882. All ^other words of one syllable that end in a consonant, are short: per, ter, cis, in, fac. Exceptions: 6n, non, quin — eras, cur, sin the Adverbs J hic, hue, hac, sic. die and due have the quantity of their verbs ; es, he^ is short. Quantity in Compounds. S83. Compounds generally retain the quantity of their compo- nent parts, as: diico, dsduco, conduce; eo, abeo, obeo, in6o; dico, contradico. 884. pro is short in Greek words, as prophSta; but long in Latin {880) though there are many exceptions, especially before f; as: procella profestus profundo profanus pr5fite6r pronepos profari prdficiscor propago prdfectO profuglo proterviis. 885. Of the inseparable Prefixes, di, se, and ve are loyig^ rS is short: didiico, seduco, reduco. Exceptions: clirimo, disertus religio, refert, reliquiae. 886. In a few words, the quantity of the second part is changed. Such are: pejero, fromjuro; cogiiitus from notus. A remarkable change of quantity appears in the Compounds of -dicus, from dico: fatidicus, veridicus, maledicus, and in: inniiba, proniiba, from niibo. FIGURES OF PROSODY. ^ 887. E 1 i s i n is the omission or rather partial suppression of a final vowel or a final m when the following word begins with a vowel or h, as: deserto in litore to he read desert' in litore certae occumbere morti '' cert' occumbere morti supremum audire laborem *^ suprem' audire laborem. — 256 — 888. The practice of elision is followed in poetry to avoid the hiatus (gaping) J or the meeting of two vowels in separate syllables. But before and after Interjections the hiatus is allowed, as: et I d6 Lati|a, | et de | g^ntg Sa|bina. 889. Elided syllables should be sounded but lightly. After a vowel or m final, the word est drops its e and is joined with the preceding syllable; as: multa est, read multa'st; mnltum est, read multum'st. 890. Synaeresis, or the contraction of two vowels which are commonly pronounced separately, is regular in the following words: deinde, proinde, deest, deesse, antehac (= anthac) and in all forms of the verb anteire (== antire). 891. In like manner i and u before vowels are sometimes used as consonants with the sounds ofy and tf\ as: fluviorum saij fltivyo- riim; ablets = abyete; genua = genwa. 892. One syllable is sometimes resolved into two by D i a e r e s i s, as: SI 111 ae = sil vae; in su. 6 tus == in sue tus. 893. Syncope, a cutting short is the taking away of one or more letters from the middle of a word, as: saeclum for saecGlum; prendere for prehenderCo 894. Apocope, a cutting off, is the cutting off a letter or letters from the end of a word, as: viden, for videsne; ain for aisne. 895. Systole is the shortening of & long syllable, as: dede- runt for dederant; Diastole the lengthening of a short syllable, as Priamides for Priamides. 896. Epenthesis is the insertion of a letter or a syllable in the middle of a word, as in the old forms siet, possiet for sit, possit. 897. T m S s i s is the separation of compound words into their parts, as: quam rem cunque/or, quamcunque rem per mihi gratum '^ mihi pergratum super unus eram ^* unus superSram, — 25t — Essentials of Versification. 898. A verse, or line of poetry consists of a series of measures which are called Feet. The feet most frequently employed in Latin verse are the fol- lowing: Of two syllables. WW Pyrrhichius, jP^rrTitc Spondeus, Spondee u« Iambus, /am6us jTrochaeus, Trochee \ \ C h r e u s, Choree patSr virtus amans matgr W (w» _ w _ w u \J Of three syllables. Tribrachys, Tribrach Molossus, Molossus D a c t y 1 u s, Dactyl Anapaestus, Anapaest Amphibrachys, Amphibrach Amphimacrus, Amphiviacer ) CretTcus, Gretic ) Bacchius, Bacchius ' Antibacchlus, Antibacchius Of Feet of four syllables the following are recognized: Proceleusmaticus, Proceleusmatic c616rit6r adgrit mortales tempora sapiens adessg tScSrant amori pGccata KJ KJ \J ^ j — ^ yj \ L ^ Arma virumque cano, \ Trojae qui primus ab oris. The next is the feminine caesura of the third foot, also called fiETa rpLTQv rpoxcuov^ aS: passi graviora, f dabit deus his quoque finem. Then comes the Hephthemimeral in the arsis of the fourth foot, usually accompanied by the trithemimSres after the second arsis, as: Stat sonipes f ac frena ferox f spumantia mandit. 916, The last word of a Hexameter should be either a dis- syllable, or a trisyllable; monosyllables at the end denote em- phasis, as: L ^_|Zuu|Z||Zuu|Zu|y) Three Lesser Asclepiadeans < Z. _ |Zwv|Z||Zwu|Zu|y>- 925, 7 ( Z.^_|ZuulZ||Zuv^|Z w|y ) One Glyconio Z.^_ | Z u u | Z w | y 925. 4 Quis desiderio sit pudor aut modus Tam carl capitis? — Praecipe lugubr^s Cantus, M61pomene, cui liquidam pat^r Yocem cum cythara dedit. 7. Asclepiadean Strophe IV., consisting of: Two Lesser Asclepiadeans \ ~y~ l-'-'^l-ll-^^l-^l- I ^25.1 llX-U uw|JL||JLuu|Zuly One Phereoratean Z.^_ | Z u u | Z o 925. 3 One Glyconic Z.^_ I Z ^ u | Z u | y 925.4. O fons Bandusiae splendidior vitro Dulci digne mero, non sine floribus Cras donaberis haedo Cui frons turgida c6rnibiis. 265 — 8. Asclepiadean Strophe V., consisting of the i L^^\lyj^\l\\lu^\l\\lyj Dactylic Hexameter 1uo\1uo\1\uo\1ud\1\j^\1u Dactylic Trimeter I u w | Z u w | y Diffugere niv^s, redeiint jam gramina campis Arboribiisque comae. 11. Archilochian Strophe II., consisting of: Dactylic Hexameter 1ud\1uo\1\uj\1uo\1\j\j\1d Iambic Dimeter DZw_|Dlwy Dactylic Trimeter Z w u | Z u v^ | y Horrida tempestas caelum contraxit et imbres Niv6sque deduciint Jovem: Nunc mare, nunc siluae. The second and third lines of this strophe are often written as one verse. 12. Archilochian Strophe III., consisting of: Iambic Trimeter aJ[.w_|o||Zu_|aIuy Dactylic Trimeter Z w u | j!. u w | y Iambic Dimeter olw_|aZuy Pecti, nihil me sicut antea juvat Scribere versiculos I^H Amore perculsiim gravi. l^pThe second and third lines of this strophe are often written as one verse. — 266 ■— 13. Archilochian Strophe IV., consisting of: ArchilooMan 1oo\1ud\1J[Ud\1kjkj\\1^\1\j\1d 923, ii Iambic Trimeter wlw_|otI^_ | u Lo Solvitur acris hiems grata vice veris et Favoni Trahuntque siccas machinae carinas. Two pairs are combined to form a tetrastich. 14. Iambic Trimeter alone (see 922), 15. Iambic Strophe, consisting of: Iambic Trimeter aiu_|ofZu_|Dlvj<-f Iambic Dimeter DZw_|oZuy Beatus ille qui procul negotiis Ut prisca gens mortalium. 16. Pythiambic Strophe I., consisting of: Dactylic Hexameter Iud \ Iud \ 1 j; y Iambic Dimeter yZw_| oZuy Nox erat, ^t caelo fulgebat liina ser^no Inter minora sidera. 17. Pythiambic Strophe II., consisting of: Dactylic Hexameter Lud \ i.oci|Zfcu|Zvjo|Iu Iambic Trimeter oZu.. |DfJ[.w_|ui.u!-! Altera jam teritiir bellis civilibus aetas, Suis et ipsa Roma viribus ruit. 18. Trochaic Strophe, consisting of: Trochaic Dimeter Z u _ o | Z u y Iambic Trimeter aZw_[ofIu_|uZa N6n ebur neque aiireum Mea renidet in domo lacunar. 19. Xiesser Ionics (see 898), Two Dipodies | ^ "^ 7 ' u w JL ' \ .,., ± \j \j 1 j wui.-.|| Miserarum est neqi^e amori Dare ludum neque diiici Mala vino lavere aut exanimari Metuentes patruae verbera linguae. u w Z _ I u u f I TwoTripodiesj"^-;-!^"-:-"^^- — 267 — 928. INDEX TO the METRES of HORACE. The references are to the numbers in the preceding paragraph. Lib. I. 1. Maecenas atavis: 4. 2. Jam satis terris: 2. 3. Sic te diva: 5. 4. Solvitur acris hiems: 13 5. Quis multa: 7. 6. Scriberis Yario: 6. 7. Laudabunt alii: 9. H. Lydia die: 3. 9. Vides ut alta: 1. 10. Mercuri facunde nepos: 2. ] I. Ta ne quaesieris: 8. 12. Quern virum: 2. 13. Cum tu Lydia: 5. 11. navis: 7. 15. Pastor cum traheret: 6. 16. matre pulchra: 1. 17. Yelox amoenum: 1. 18. Nullam Yare: 8. 19. Mater saeva: 5. 1. Motum ex Metello: 1. 2. Nullus argento: 2. 3. Aequam memento: 1. 4. Ne sit ancillae: 2. 5. Nondum subacta: 1. 6. Septimi Gades: 2. 7. O saepe mecum: 1. 8. Ulla si juris: 2. 9. Non semper imbres: 1. 10. Rectius vives: 2. 1. Odi profanum: 1. 2. Angustam amice: 1. 3. Justum et tenacem: 1. 4. Descende caelo: 1. 5. Caelo tonantera : 1. 6. Delicta majorum: 1. 20. Yile potabis: 2. 21. Dianam tenerae: 7. 22. Integer vitae: 2. 23. Yitas liinnuleo: 7. 24. Quis desiderio: 6. 25. Parcius junctas: 2. 26. Musis amicus: 1. 27. Natis in usum: 1. 28. Te maris: 9. 29. Icci beatis: 1. 30. Yenus: 2. 31. Quid dedicatum: 1. 32. Poscimur: 2. 33. Albi ne doleas: 6. 34. Parcus deorum: 1. 35. diva: 1. 36. Et ture: 5. 37. Nunc est bibendum: 1. 38. Persicos odi: 2. Lib. II. 11. Quid belli cosus: 1. 12. Nolis longa: 6. 13. lUe et nefasto: 1. 14. Eheu fugaces: 1. 15. Jam pauca: 1. 16. Otium divos: 2. 17. Cur me querelis: 1. 18. Non ebur: 18. 19. Bacchum in remotis: 20. Non usitata: 1. Lib. nr. 7. Quid fles: 7. 8. Martiis caelebs: 2. 9. Donee gratus: 5. 10. Extremum Tanain: 6 11. Mercuri nam te: 2. 12. Miserarum est: 19. 268 13. fons Bandusiae: 7. 14. Herculis ritu: 2. 15. Uxor pauperis: 5. 16. Inclusam Danaen: 6. 17. Aeli vetusto: 1. 18. Faune nyrapharum: 2. 19. Quantum distet: 5. 20. Non vides: 2. 21. nata mecum: 1. 1. Intermissa Yenus: 5. 2. Pindarum quisquis: 2. 3. Quem tu Melpomene: 5. 4. Qualem ministrum: 1. 5. Divis orte bonus: 6. 6. Dive quem proles: 2. 7. DiflfugSre nives: 10. 8. Donarem pateras: 4. 1. Ibis liburnis: 15. 2. Beatus ille: 15. 3. Parentis olim: 15. 4. Lupis et agnis: 15. 5. At deorum: 15. 6. Quid immerentes: 15. 7. Quo quo seelesti: 15. 8. Rogare longo: 15. 9. Quando repostum: 15. 22. Montium custos: 2. 23. Caelo supinas: 1. 24. Intactis opulentior: 5. 25. Quo me Baeche: 5. 26. Yixi puellis: 1. 27. Impios parrae: 2. 28. Festo quid: 5. 29. Tyrrhena regum: 1. 30. Exegi monumentum: 4. Lib. IV. 9. Ne forte credas: 1. 10. crudelis adhuc: 8. 11. Est mihi nonum: 2. 12. Jam veris comites: 6. 13. Audivgre Lyce: 7. 14. Qua cura patrum: 1. 15. Phoebus volentem: 1. Carmen Saeculare: 2. Epodes. 10. Mala soluta: 15. 11. Pecti nihil: 12. 12. Quid tibi, vis: 9. 13. Horrida tempestas: 11. 14. Mollis ineitia: 16. 15. Nox erat: 16. 16. Altera jam: 17. 17. Jam jam efficaci: 14. — 269 MISCELLANEOUS. 929. The Roman Year, by the reformed Calendar of Julius Caesar^ had 365 days, divided as at present into 12 months: Januarms, 31 days. Maius, 31 days. September, 30 days. Februarius, 28 " Junius, 30 " October, 31 " Martius, 31 " Quintilis, 31 " November, 30 " Aprilis, 30 " Sextilis, 31 " December. 31 '^ Every fourth year the 24th of February (YI. Kal. Mart.) was counted twice giving 29 days to that month. The Intercalary day — 25th of February — was called bis sextus. In early times the year began m March; hence the names, Quintilis, Sextilis, September, etc. Quintilis and Sextilis were after- wards changed to Julius and Augustus, in honor of the first two Caesars. 930o The first day of the month was called K a 1 e n d a e (Calends) ; on the fifteenth day of March, May, July, and October, but the thirteenth of the other months, were the Id us (Ides); on the seventh day of March, May, July, and October, but tl[\e fifth of the other months were the N o nae (Nones). To these the names of the months were added as Adjectives, as: Kalendae Januariae = Jan. 1; Nonae Februariae = Fehr. 5; Idus Martiae = March 15. 931. From these three points the days of the month were reckoned backward in the following manner: The day before each of them was expressed by p r i d i e with the Accusative, as: pridie Kalendas Januarias = Dec. 31. pridie Nonas Januarias = Jan. 4. pridie Idus Januarias = Jan. IS. In counting further backward the point of departure was, by Ro- man custom, counted in the reckoning so that ante diem tertium Kal. Jan. means tivo days before the Calends of January; ante diem quartum Kal. Jan., three days before the Calends of January , and so on. This combination is treated as one indeclinable word, so that it can be used with prepositions, as: ex ante diem III. Nonas Junias usque ad pridie Kal. Septembres, from June 3 to August 31, — 2Y0 932. In stating the day of a month, two different constrnctions are used. The original construction is die tertio ante Kalendas Martias, February 27.; but die and ante are regularly omitted, thus: tertio Kalendas Martias, or in figures: III. Kal. Mart. The other form is: ante diem tertium Kalendas Martias, or in figures: a. d. III. Kal. Mart. 933. ( :^ALENDAE FOB THE YEAE, Days of our months. January. February. 1. Kalendis Jan. Kalendis Feb. 2. IV. Nonas Jan. IV. Nonas Feb. 3. III. (( a III. "• '' 4. 0. prid. '' " NoNis Jan. prid. '' '^ NoNis Feb. 6. VIII. Idus Jan. VIII. Idus Feb. 7. VII. VII. "• '' 8. VI. VI. " '^ 9. V. V. ^* ** 10. IV. IV. '* " 11. • III. III. "■ " 12. 13. prid. '<• "■ IdTbus Jan. prid. '* "' Idibus Feb. 14. XIX. Kalendas Feb. xvi. Kalendas Mart. 1.5. XVIII U (. i XV. '' *< 16. XVII. n ^ ( XIV. <* '' 17. XVI. U i ' XIII. " »* 18. XV. (< ( ' XII. " *< 19. XIV. li i ' XI. " " 20. XIII. (( i i X. " " 21. XII. It ( < IX. " '' 22. XI. (< < i VIII. " '' 23. X. (1 ( I VII. " '« 24. IX. (( ( i VI. <« ^• 25. VIII. U f 1 V. '* *^ 26. VII. ii I ^ IV. " ** 27. VI. H I I IIJ^ ii it 28. 29. 30. 31. V. '' < IV. '' ' III. '' ' prid. *' ' (So Aug., Dec.) * prid. *^ '' ' [prid. Kal. Mart, in leap- * year, the vi. Kal. (24th) * being counted twice.] 271 Days of 0U7' months. March, April, 1. Kalendis Mart. Kalendis Apr. 2. VI. N onas Mart. IV. Nonas Apr. 3. V. a it III. u C( 4. IV. (( n prid. ii U 5. III. a n NoNis Apr. 6. prid. u a vm. Idus Apr. 7. NoNis Mart. VII. li 8. VIII. Idus Mart. VI. ii 9. VII. u 11 V. u 10. VI. a u IV. ii 11. V. li u III. ii i 12. IV. n 11 prid. ii 13. III. u '' iDiBus Apr. 14. prid. a u XVIII . Kalendas Maias. 15. iDiBus Mart. XVII. 16. XVII. Kalendas Aprilis. XVI. 17. XVI. << a XV. 18. XV. a li XIV. 19. XIV. 11 li XIII. 20. XIII. (( n XII. 21. XII. (( n XI. 22. XI. it n X. 23. X. (( it IX. 24. IX. (( u VIII. 25. VIII. <( (( VII. 26. VII. (( it VI. 27. VI. a it V. 28. V. li ii IV. 29. IV. it n III. 30. III. it tt prid. 31. prid. a li (So June, Sept. ,, J^ov,) (So May, July, Oct,) 934, To turn Roman dates into English: For Calends: Add two to the days of the preceding month, and subtract the given number. For Ides and Nones: Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides of the month in question, and subtract the given number. Examples: a. d. YIII. Kal. Febr. (31 + 2 — 8) - Jan. 25. a. d. lY. Non. Mart. ( 7 + 1 — 4) = March 4» a. d. lY. Id. Sept. (13 + 1 — 4) = Sept. 10. — 212 — 935. The Year was designated by the names of the Consuls for that year: but was also reckoned from the building of the City (ab urbe condita, anno urbis conditae) which, according to Yarro, corresponds with the 753d year B. 0. In order to reduce such dates to those of the Christian era, if the given number be less than 754, subtract it from the latter, and the remainder will be the year B. C. as: a. u. c. 691 (the year of Cicero's consulship) = B. C. 63; if greater than 753, subtract 753 from it, and the remainder will be the year after Christ (A. D.), as: a. u. c. 767 (the year of Augustus* death) = 14 A. D. 936. The "Week of seven days (hebdQmas) was not in use among the Romans under the republic, but was introduced under the em- perors. The days of the week were named from the planets: dies Soils, Sunday dies Jovis, Thursday dies Lunae, Monday dies Veneris, Friday dies Martis, Tuesday dies Saturni, Saturday. dies Mercurii, Wednesday ROMA^[ MONEY, WEIGHTS, and MEASURES. 937. The Coins of the Romans were in early times of copper. The as, being originally the unit of currency, was nominally a pound weight, but was reduced by degrees to one twenty-fourth of its original weight and value. In the third century silver coins were in- troduced; the denarius = 10 asses, and tte sestertius = ^ asses (sestertius = semis-tertius, half third^ represented by IIS or HS = duo et semis, 2^). 938. The Sestertius was the ordinary coin of the Romans, by which the largest sums were reckoned. Gold was introduced later, the aureus being equal to 100 sesterces. The value of these «oins is seen in the following: 1 as nearly 2 cents. 2\ asses = 1 sestertius or nummus (HS) '* 4 ^' 10 asses = 4 sestertii = I denarius ^' 16 ^' 1000 sestertii = 1 sestertium $40.00 939. The Sestertium was a sum of money, not a coin. Though probably the genitive plural of sestertius, the word is inflected regularly as a neuter noun, thus: tria sestertia = $120.00. When joined with the multiplicative adverbs it denotes a sum of a hundred thousand^ centena milia being omitted, thus: decies sester- tium, a million = $40,000. — 273 940. The Eoman Measures of Length are the following: 12 unciae, inches = 1 pes, Eoman foot (11.6 Engl, inche.s) 1 cubitus, cubit = l^feet 1 gradus, step — ^\feet 1 passus, jpace = 5 feet mille passuum, 1000 paces = i mile (4S50 Engl. feet). 941. The basis of Square Measure was the j u g 6 r u m, an area of 240 Roman feet long and 120 broad, a liitle less than | of an English acre. 942. The Measures of Weight are: 12 unciae (ounces) = one pound (libra, about f lb. avoirdupois). « Fractional parts (weight or coin) are: P 1. (tV), uncia; 5. (tV), quincunx; 9. (f), dodrans; 2. (i), sextans; 6. (-^), semissis; 10. (f), dextans; 3. (i), quadrans; 7. (-r^), septunx; 11. (H^), deunx; 4. (i), triens; 8. (f), bessis; 12. As. The Talent was a Greek weight = 60 librae. 943. The Measures of Capacity are: 12 cyathi = 1 sextarius (nearly a pint). 16 sextarii^ 1 raodius (peck). 6 sextarii = 1 congius (3 quarts, liquid measure). 8 congii = 1 amphora (6 gallons) . 944. A., absolve. A. Chr., ante Christum. A. D., ante diem. A. U. C, anno urbis conditae. C, condemno. Cos., consul. Coss., consules. D. D., dono dedit. D. D. D., dat, dicat, dedicat. Des., designatus. F., filius. H. S., sestertius. Ictus, jurisconsultus. Id., idus. Imp., imperator. J. 0. M., Jovi Optimo maximo. K., Kal., Kalendae. Leg., legatus, legio. ABBREVIATIONS. N. L., non liquet. Non., Nonae. P. C, patres conscripti. P. M., pontifex maxTmus. P. R., populus Romanus. Pr., praetor. Proc, proconsul. Q. B. F. F. Q. S., quod bonum felix faustumque sit. Quir., Quirites. Resp., respubliea. S., senatus. S. C, senatus consultum. S. D. P., salutem dicit plurimam. S. P. Q. R., Senatus Populusque Romanus. Tr. pL, tribunus plebis. — 214: — 945. PRINCIPAL LATIN AUTHORS. T. Maccius Plautus B.c.254r-184 Comedies. Q. Ennius 239-169 Annals^ Satires j &c. (Fragments). M. Porcius Cato 236-149 Husbandry^ Antiquities^ Sc. M. Pacuvius 220-130 Tragedies (Fragments). P. TerentTus Afer (Terence) 195-159 Comedies. C. Lucilius 149-103 Satires (Fragments). L. Attius (or Accius) 170-75 Tragedies (Fragments). M. Terentius Varro 116-28 Husbandry J Antiquities^ &c. M. Tullius Cic6ro 106-43 Orations^ Letter s^ Dialogues, C. Julius Caesar 100-44 Commentaries. T. Lucretius Cams 99-55 Poem ^'De Rerum Natura". C. Valerius Catullus 87-47 Miscellaneous Poems. C. Sallustius Crispus (Sallust) 86-35 Histories. Cornelius Nepos 90- Lives of Famous Commanders. P. Yergilius Maro (Virgil) 70-19 Eclogues^ Georgis^ Aeneid. Q. Horatms Flaccus (Horace) 65_8 SatireSy Odes, Epistles, Albius Tibullus 54-18 Elegies. Sex. Aurelius Propertius 49-15 Elegies. T. Livius Patavlnus (Livy) , , b.c.59-a.d.17 Homan History, — 275 — P. Ovidius Naso (Ovid) b.c.43-a.d.16 Metamorphoses^ Fastis ear, 394 abscindo, -erg, to tear off] 374 abscondo, -erS, to hide , 372 absisto, -ere, to cease, 374 absolve, -ere, to acquit, 366 abstergSo, -ere, to wipe off, 360 abstineo, -ere, to abstain, 358 absum, abease, to be absent, 306 absCimo, -ere, to use up, 385 abutdr, -i, to use, abuse, 396 accedo, -ere, to approach, 374 accendo, -ere, to kindle, 373 accio, -ire, to call in, 362 accipio, -ere, to receive, 368 "acciibo, -are, to lie near, 347 accumbo, -ere, to recline at table, 376 accurro, -erg, to run to, 387 acesco, -ere, to turn sour, 394 acquire, -ere, to acquire, 389 acuo, -erg, to sharpen, 366 adfero, -re, to afford, 404 adhaereo, -erg, to stick, 360 adimo, -erg, to take aivay, 389 adipiscgr, -i, to obtain, 396 adjungo, -grg, to join (to), 378 adjuvo, -arg, to assist, 348 admitto, -ere, to admit, 374 adnuo, -grg, to nod assent, 366 adolgo, -erg, to grow up, 356 adolesco, -grg, to grow up, 394 adorior, -iri, to attack, 399 adsisto, -grg, to stand by, 374 adsiim, adesse, to be present, 306 aegresco, -grg, to fall sick, 395 affligo, -grg, to dash, 378 ag6, come, 417 aggrediSr, -i, to attack, 396 agnosco, -grg, to acknowledge, 393 ago, -grg, to drive, do, 383 ajo, I say, 416 albgo, -erg, to be white, 354 alggo, -erg, to be cold, 360 allego, -grg, to choose, 383 allicio, -grg, to allure, 368 allldo, -grg, to dash against, 371 allino, -grg, to besmear, 388 alloquor, -i, to address, 396 alo, -grg, to nourish, 386 ambigo, -grg, to contend, 383 ambio, -irg, to go about, 408 amicio, -Irg, to clothe, 398 amitto, -grg, to lose, 374 amplector, -i, to embrace, 396 ango, -grg, to torment, vex, 381 anquiro,-grg, to search after, 389 antecello, -grg, to excel, 386 antgpOno, -grg, to prefer, 386 antisto, -arg, to excel, 349 278 — apage, he gone^ 417 apgrio, -ire, to opeUy 398 apiscor, ~i, to reach after, 396 applando, -ere, to applaud, 371 applico, -are, to apply, 347 appono, -ere, to put by, 386 arceo, -ere, to keep off, 353 arcesso, -ere, to summon, 390 ardeo, -ere, to burn, 360 areo, -erg, to he dry, 353 aresco, -ere, to become dry, 394 arguo, -ere, to accuse, 366 arrldeo, -ere, to smile upon, 360 arripio, -ere, to seize, 368 ascendo, -ere, to ascend, 373 aspicio, -ere, to look, 368 assentior, -iri, to assent, 399 assequor, -i, to pursue, 396 assideo, -ere, to sit by, 361 assldo, -ere, to sit down, 374 assuesco, -Sre, to be accustomed, 393 attendo, -ere, to attend to, 371 attineo, -ere, to belong, 358 attingo, -ere, to touch, 382 aiideo, -ere, to dare, 363 auf ero, -re, to carry away, 404 augeo -ere, to increase, 359 augesco, -ere, to augment, 394 avS, hail, 417 avello, -ere, to pull down, 389 aveo, -ere, to long for, 354 B. bibo, -ere, to drink, 376 C. cado, -erS, to fall, 371 caedo, -ere, to fell, 371 calesco, -ere, to become warm, 394 callgo, -er§, ^o he versed^ 363 ^o rouse, 362 calveo, - erg, ^o 6^ bald, 354 candeo, -ere, /o shine, 353 cando, I burn, 373 caneo, -ere, ^o 6e ^ra^/, 354 cano, -ere, to sing, 387 capesso, -ere, to lay hold of, 390 capio, -ere, to take, 331, 368 carpo, -ere, to pluck, 375 caveo,-ere, to take heed, 357 cedo, give, 417 c6do, -ere, /o yield, 374 cello, I impel, 386 ceno, -are, ^o cZine, 278 censeo,-ere, to value, think, 358 cerno, -ere, to see, discern, 388 cette, ^it'^, 417 cieo, -ere ] CIO, -Tre cingo, -ere, to gird, 378 circumdo,-are, to surround, 349 circumfundo, -ere, to surround, 373 circumsedeo,-ere, to si^ around, 361 circumsto,-are, to s^an^ around, 349 clango, -erg, to clang, 381 claudo, -ere, to shut, close, 371 coalesce, -ere, to ^row; together, 394 coarguo, -ere, /o convict, 366 c6emo,-ere, to fei^y together, 389 coepi, coepisse, to 7ia?;e begun, 415 cognosce, -ere, to know, 393 cogo, -ere, to force (c6-ago), 383 cohaereo, -ere, to s^ic/i, 360 collTdo, -ere, to ^as/t together, 371 colligo, -ere, to collect, 383 colo, -ere, to cultivate, 386 comburo, -ere, to twr/i [wholly), 389 — 279 — commTniscSr, -i, to devise^ 396 committo, -ere, to commit^ 374 cOmo, -ere, to adorn, 385 compesco, -ere, to restrain, 393 compingo, -ere^to drive tight, 382 compleo, -ere, to fill (up), 356 comprlmo, -ere, to press to- gether, 389 concino, -ere, to sound together, 387 concio, -ire, to call together, 362 concludo, -ere, to shut up, 371 concupisco, -ere, to covet, 394 concurro, -6re, to run together, 387 concutio, -ere, to shake, 368 condo, -erS, to found, 372 cond61esco,-ere, to feel pain, 394 confero, -re, to collect, 404 conflcio, -ere, to make, 368 confido, -ere, to confide, 373 confiteor, -eri, to confess, 364 confligo, -ere, to fight, 378 confodio, -ere, to pick out, 368 confringo, -ere, to break in two, 383 congero, -ere, to bring together, 389 congruo, -ere, to agree, 366 cOniveo, -ere, to shut the eyes, 357 conscisco, -ere, to bring upon^ 394 censer ibo, -ere, to frame, 375 eonsero, -ere, to plant, 388 consido, -ere, to settle, 374 conspergo, -^re, to sprinkle, 384 eonsto, -are, to consist, 349 construo, -ere, to construct, 367 consueseo, -Sre, to be wont, 393 consiilo, -ere, to counsel, 386 consumS, -Srg, to consume, 385 contemn5, -ere, to despise, 385 contendo, -ere, to exert, 371 eontgro, -ere, to rub off, 388 conticesco, -ere, to become stilly 394 contmeO, -ere, to hold together, 358 contraho, -ere, to contract, 378 contremisco,-ere, to tremble, 394 contribuo, -ere, to contribute, 366 eontundo, -erg, to break down, 371 convaleseo, -ere, to recover, 394 coquo, -ere, to cook, bake, 378 oorrigo, -ere, to correct, 378 corrumpo, -ere, to corrupt, 376 eorrrio,-ere, to fall to the ground, 366 erebresco, -ere, to become fre- quent, 395 credo, -ere, to believe, 372 crepo, -are, to creak, 347 cresco, -ere, to grow, 393 cubo, -are, to lie down, 347 cudo, -ere, to forge, 373 cupio, -ere, to desire, 332, 368 curro, -ere, to run, 370, 387 D. decern o, -ere, ^> determine, 388 decerpo, -ere, to pluck, 375 decet, it becomes, 420 decido, -ere, to cut down, 371 decipio, -ere, to deceive, 368 dedecet, it is unbecoming, 420 dedisco, -ere, to unlearn, 393 defendo, -ere, to defend, 373 det^tiscor, -i, to be worn out, 396 dSfungSr, -i, to discharge, 396 deglubo, -ere, to skin, 375 deg5,-6rS, to spend {d^'^gO), 383 — 280 del65, -erg, to destroy^ 351, 356 deligS, -€r6, to choose, 383 dGlitesco, -Srg, to hide away, 394 demo, -€r€, ^o ^aA:e attJay, 385 depello, -erc^, to dispel, 387 dCpendeo, -erg, ^o M??^ dow7i^ 361 dCposco, -erg, to request, 393 depso, -gre, to knead, 390 deridgo, -erg, to ?aw(7/i at, 360 describo, -grg, to describe, 375 dSs6co, -arg, to cut down, 347 desSro, -grg, to forsake, 388 desliio, -grg, to leave off, 388 desipio, -grg, to &e foolish , 368 despicio, -grg, to despise, 368 desporidgo, -erg, topromise, 361 desLim, deessg, to &e wanting, 306 detSgo, -grg, to discover, 378 detgro, -grg, to loear att^ay, 388 devincio, -Trg, to ?)in(Z, 398 devovgo,-erg,toroio, devote^ 357 dlco, -grg, to sa2/, toZZ, 336, 378 diflfgro, -rg, to de/er, 404 diflfltgor, -eri, to disavow, 364 diffundo, -grg, to pour forth, 373 dilabdr, -T, to/aZ^ asunder, 396 diligo, -grg, to Zoye, 383 dlraico, -arg, to Ji^/i<, 347 dirigo, -grg, to direct, 378 diruo, -grg, to destroy, 366 discerno,-grg, to distinguish, 388 discerpo, -grg, to toar asunder, 375 discindo, -grg, to spZif, 374 disco, -grg, to Z(?ar7i, 370, 393 discrepo, -arg, to disagree, 347 dissero, -grg, to discourse, 388 dissidgo, -erg, to disag7^ee, 361 dissilio, -Trg, to 6urs^ asunder, 398 dissuadgo, -erg, to dissuade^ 360 distinguS, -gre, to distinguish, 378 disto, -arg, to 6e distant, 349 distribuo, -grg, to distribute, 360 ditesco, -grg, to grow rich, 39;") (livid 6, -grg, to divide, 371 do, -arg, to grh-e, 349, 370 docgo, -erg, to toac7i, 358 domo, -arg, to tome, 347 duco, -grg, to ?ea^, 336, 378 dulcesco, -grg, to become sweet, 395 duresco, -grg, to ^roii; hard, 395 E. ediscS, -grg, to Z6«?'n &?/ 7iear^, 393 6do, -grg, to ea^, 373, 410 edo, -grg, to (/it'e out, 372 educ5, -grg, to lead forth, 378 eflf6r6, -rg, to carry out, 404 effervesco, -erg, to 6oiZ t^p, 394 effloresco, -grg, to te^'in to 6toom, 394 effodio, -grg, to ^?*(7 out, 368 effringo,-grg, to bi'cakopen, 383 eflfuudo, -grg, to 270?e,360, 384 tero, -grg, to rub, wear out, 388 texo, -grg, to weave, 390 timgo, -erg, to fear, 353 tingo (tinguo), -grg, to stain, 378 tollo, -grg, to lift, take away, 389 tondgo, -erg, to shear, 361 tono, -arg, to thunder, 347 I — 28r — torpeo, -ere, to he numbj 353 torqueo, -ere, to torture^ 359 torreo, -ere, to roast, 358 trado, -ere, to deliver, 372 traho, -ere, to draw, 378 transeo, -Ire, to pass over, 407 tremo, -ere, to tremble, 386 tribuo, -ere, to confer on, 366 trudo, -ere, to thrust, 371 tumeo, -ere, to swell, 353 tundo, -ere, to thump, 371 turgeo, -ere, to swell, 360 U. ulcisc5r, -1, to avenge, 396 ungo(unguo), -ere, to anoint, 378 urgeo, -ere, to urge, 360 firo, -ere, to burn, 389 utor, -1, to use J 396 vado, -ere, to go, 371 vale, farewell, 417 veho, -ere, to carry, 378 vello, -Srg, to pluck, pull, 389 vendo, -er6, to sell, 372 veneo, -ire, to be for sale, 408 venio, -ire, to come, 398 venumdo, -Sre, to sell, 349 vergo, -gre, to verge, 384 verro, -ere, to sioeep, 389 verto, -ere, to turn, 373 vesc6r, -i, to feed upon, eatj 396 veto, -are, to forbid, 347 vId€o, -ere, to see, 361 vigeo, -ere, to be vigorous, 353 vllesco, -€re, i^o become vile, 395 vincio, -ire, ifo bind, 398 vinco, -ere, ^o conquer, 383 vireo, -ere, to be green, 353 viso, -ere, to visit, 390 VIVO, -ere, to live, 367 volo, vellg, to be willing, 405 volvo, -ere, to roll, turn, 366 vomo, -ere, to vomit, 386 voveo, -ere, to vow, 357 I 288 — INDEX OF SUBJECTS. The references are to paragraphs. A. -a, Nouns in, of 1st decl., 56; of 3d decL, 83; ace. sing. 3d decl., 153; changed in compounds, 517 a, ab, abs, 655; with abl. of se- paration^ 620; of agentj 603; in compounds, 519; with nega- tive force, 531. 2 Abbreviations, 944 abesse — non multum abest quin, nihil abestquin, 766; tantum ab- est ut. .ut, 760 abliinc, denoting tinie^ 674 abhorrere, with abl, 620, 621 Ablative, 49 ; sing, of 3d decl., 140, 144; Syntax, 603-628; abl. of agentj 603; of cause, 603, 604; of comparison, 609-612; oi dif- ference, 612; of limitation, 608; of manner, 613, 614; with opus est, 624; of means or instru- ment, 605-607; of plenty and t(;aM^,622,623; of price, 617-619; of quality, 615, 616; of separa- tion, 620,621; in special con- structions, 625; oftime,^'12\ with prepositions, 445, 446, 655-671; of place, 687, 688; with names of towns, 683-686 ; of distance how far, 681 Ablative absolute, 836, 837 absolvgre, with gen., 570 absque, 656 abstinSre, with abl., 620 Abstract substantives, 37; for concretes, 691, 693; in the plur., 694, 695; derivation, 488, 493 abundare, with abl, 622 -abus for -is, Ist decl, 59 abiiti, with abl, 626 ac, atque, 849 Acatalectic verses, 907 Accent, rules of, 29-31 acceptus, with dai, 598 accidit, with ut, 759 accipere, with dat. of purpose^ 595; with ace. & infin., 812; with gerundive, 841 accusare, with gen., 570 Accusative, 49; sing. 3d decl, 143; plur., 148; in -Ss, 157; Syntax, 574-586; with active transitive verbs, 574; with intransitive verbs, 575, 576; with compound verbs, 577; with verbs of nam- ing, 578; with verbs of teaching and asking, 579-582; with iin- personal verbs, 583^ 584; in ex- clamations, 585; used adver- bially, 586; with prepositions^ 629-654; with names of towns, 683; to denote space, 679, 680; time how long, 674; how old, 678 Accusative with Infin., 810-820; as subject, 811; as object, 812; after verbs of wishing, &c., — 289 814, 815; tenses, 818, 819; in indirect discourse, 825; how to translate J 816 Active voice, 272; its participles, 829 ad, 629; assimilated in com- position, 520 ; in compounds with dat., 592; with gerund, 845; with interest, 573; with adjec- tives signifying useful.suiiahle, 599 adducere, with ut, 758 -3-des, suffix in patronymics, 4:81 adipisci, with ut, 758 Adjectives, 32, 198-227; of 1st and 2d decL, 72-77; of 3d decL, 137-142; of three terminations, 199; of two terminations, 200; of one termination, 141, 201; de- fective, 203, 204; indeclinable, 205; indefinite, 268; pronominal, 269; comparison, 207-227; used as substantives^ 701, 702; used instead of adverbs, 550; used instead of possessives, 703; de- noting a part of a thing, 704; appositive, 550 ; attributive, 546; predicative, 536, 544; in re- lative clauses, 554; with gen., 567; with dai, 598-600; with abl, 623, 625; position, 559, 561; derivation, 496-511; special uses, 701-709; in abl. absol., 836 Adjuncts of the predicate, 558; of the subject, 558 adjuvare, with ace, 589 admonere, with gen., 568; with ut, 758; with aco. & inf., 814 Adonic verse, 925. i adspergere, with dat. & ace, 593 adulescens for in adulescentia, 691; in adulescentia, 673 Advantage, dative of, 587 advenire, with in & ace, 690 adventu, abl. of time, 673 Adverbial accusative, 586; phra- ses, 431 Adverbs, 32, 424-446; derivation of, 425-434; from adjectives of the 1st & 2d decl, 425; of the 3d decl, 426; of time, 437; of man- ner, 438; of order, 242; nu- meral, 241; of place, 436; used as ^prepositions, 436; compari- son, 440-442; with gen., 566. 6; correlative, 439; position, 562 Adversative conjunctions, 451,853 adversus, adversum, 632 ae, changed In compounds, 517 aedes & templum omitted, 566. 9 aeger, with abl. , 604 aequalis, w. gen., 598 aequare, w. ace. 589 aeque ac, 849 aestimare, w. gen., 569; w. abl, 617 aetate, abl. of time, 673 -aeus, suffix, 508 aflutim, w. gen., 566. 6 afferre, w. dat., 592 affic^re, w. abl., 607 affirmare, with ace. & infin., 812 Agent, abl. of, with a or S-b, 603; dat.of,596,597; w. opera, per, 606 agere, with annus, to express how old, 678; id aggre, with ut, 758 agnomen, 194 Agreement of predicate and sub- ject, 536-539; of attribute and substantive, 546, 547; of appo- sition and substantive, 548-550 ; of pronoun & antecedent, 551- 557 ajo, conjugated, 416; its use, 823 -ai, Nouns in, 3d decl.j 91 290 — Alcaic verses, 925.9.10; stanza, 92 7.1 Alcmanian stanza, 927. 9 ail- in aliquis rejected, 723, 762 alienare, with a and abl, 621 alienus, with abl., 925 allquanto, with comparatives y1 OS aliquantum, w. gen., 566. 6 aliquid, with gen., 566. 5; used ad- verbiallyj 586 aliquis, 266; its use, 722; after si emphatic^ 723 -alls, suffix^ 501 aliter atque, 849 alius, 202, 728; alius .. alius, alii. . alii, 729; quantity in gen., 861 Alphabet, 3; vowels and diph- thongs, 4, 5; consonants, 6, 7 alter, 202, 728; alter, .alter, 729 Alternative questions, 798 altero tanto, 612 alteruter, 202 amans, w. gen., 567. 2 amicus, w. dat. & gen., 598 amplius, without quam, 610 an, inierrog., 797, 798; annon, 798 Anacrusis, 925. lo anceps syllaba, 908 animadvertere, w. ace. & inf., 812 Animals, Names of, 47 ammo, abl. of manner, 613; animo aequo, without cum, 613 Answer, Form of, 799 ante, 631; in composition, 521; in compounds with dat. 592 ; to de- note distance oftimey 675; with quam, 675; ante diem, 931 Antecedent of relative, 553; in- corporated in the relative clause, 719; agreement, 551-557 antepenult, 25 antequam, 779, 780 -anus, suffix^ 504, 505, 507 anxius, with abL, 604 Apocope, 894 Apodosis, 787 apparere, with two nom., 540 apparet, with ace. & inf., 811 appellare, with two ace., 578 appellari, with two nom., 540 Appendix to 3d conjugation, 331 Apposition,548; in relative clause, 554; gen. of specification in its stead, 566. ?; expressing time, 549; with names of towns, 684, 685; agreement, 548-550 aptus, with dat., 598; with gerund. & gerundive, 844; with qui & sub- junct., 793 apud, 630 -ar. Nouns in, 3d decl, 94, 95 arbitrari, with two ace, 578; with ace. &inf., 812 arcessgre, with gen., 570 Archilochian verse, 925. u; stan- zas, 927. 10-13 argugre, with gen., 570 -aris, suffix, 501 Aristophanic verse, 925. 2 -arium, suffix, 482 -arius, suffix, 501 Arsis, 900 Article, not in Latin, 57 as. Unit of value, 937 -as, Nouns in, Ist decl., 60; 3d dec!., 105-107; -as, Greek ace. pi. added, 157; suffix, 507 Asclepiadean verses, 925. 7. s; stanzas, 827. ^t-s -asco, "Verbs in, 472 assgqui, with ut, 758 Assimilation of prepositions, 518 assuescSre, with inf., 809 Asyndeton, 850 at, 853 I 291 — atque, 849; atque is, 715 atqui, 853 Attraction of mood, 826 Attribute, its agreement, 546, 547 Attributive adjective, 546 -atus, suffix J 503 au, changed in compounds, 517 audere, with inf., 809 audlre, with ace. & inf., 812; with pres. participle, 813, 835 auditu, 848 aureus, the coin, 938 -aus, Nouns in, 3d decL, 123 ^ut, 852 autem, 853; its place, 564 Authors, Latin, 945 Auxiliary esse, 303 -ax, Nouns in, 3d deoL, 132; suffix, 498 b changed to p, 375 belli, in connection with domi, 686; bello Antiochi, 673; bello Persico, 673; in bello, 673 bene, compared 441; with em6re & vendere, 619 benedicgre, with dat., 589 -b6r. Nouns in, 3d decl, 96 -bills, suffix, 498 bini, instead of duo, 238 bia die, abl. of timej 673 blandtri, with dai, 589 -bs, Nouns in, 3d decl., 124-126 -bulum, suffix, 494 -bundus, suffiXj 496 C. -c. Nouns in, 3d decl, 89 caelum, decl, 191 Caesura, 909-911; of the hexa- meter, 915; of the trimeter, 924 Calendar, Roman, 929-936 Calends, 929 capio, -ere, conjugated, 331 Capital initial letters, 3 capitis et capite damnare, 570 caput, 129 Cardinal numerals, 228-233 carSre, with abl, 622 cams, with dai, 598 Case-endings of the 5 declen- sions, 54 Cases, 35,49; dependent, 50; in- dependent, 50; of adjectives & nouns used adverbially, 430; construction of, 566-690 casu, abl. of manner, 614 casus obliqui, 50; recti, 50 Catalectic verses, 907 causa, w. gen. &mea,tua &c., 566. 8, 604; w. gerund & gerundive, 843 Causal clauses, w. suhjunctiveyl 82 Causal conjunctions, 452, 456; their uses, 781-786, 851 cave, cave ne, in prohibitions, 806 cave re, with dat. & ace, 591 -ce, -cine, appended to hie, 254 celare, with two ace, 579 celer, special forms of, 138, 140 -ceps, Compounds in, 3d decl, 126 eernere, with ace. & inf., 812; with pres. part., 813 cerneres, potential subjunct, 750 certe, certo, 430 certum est, w. ace. & inf., 811 cetgri, defective, 204, 728 Characteristic of stem; 52 circa, circum, 634; in composi- tion, 522; compounds of, w. ace, 577 circiter, 635 circulre, 522 circumdare, w. ace, 593 ^ 292 cis, citra, 633 Classification op Verbs, 346- 399 coarguere, w. gen., 570 cogere, with in & ace, 690 cogitare, with ace. & inf., 812 cognomen, 194; with dat., 594 cognosc6re, with aco. & inf., 812 Collective noun, 38; with plural verb, 543 collocare, to let, w. abl., 617; with in & abl, 689 c5in z=z cum, in composition, 523 ; in compounds w. dat., 592 Common gender, 45; common noun, 38; common quantity, 27, 863 commonere, commonefacere,with gen., 568 communis, w. gen., 667. 3; w. dat., 598 Comparative, how formed, 209; how declined, 139; wanting, 224; with abl, 609; with the force of too, unusually, somewhat, 705 ; used in reference to only two objects, 709; its force increased, 706; with -cuius, 510; followed by quam ut, quam qui w. sub- junct., 795 Comparative conjunctions, 461, 772; comparative value with verbs ofhuying and selling ,619 Comparison of adjectives, 207- 227; irregular and defective, 220-227; of participles, 227; of adverbs, 227, 440-442; of two qualities of the same object, 708 comperire, with ace. & inf., 812 complere, with abl, 622 complures, decl, 221 compos, with gen., 567, 1 Composition op Words, 465, 512- 531 Compound adjectives, 531 ; comp. forms of the verb, 303-315; comp. numerals, 231,232; comp. substantives, 530; declined, 192; comp. tenses of the passive, 309; comp.verbs, 513-529; comp. verses, 903, 925 Compounds, Quantity, 883; sylla- hification, 24; of dare, 572; of esse, 306; of facere, 413; of ire, 407; of prepositions with dat., 592; of prepositions with aco., 577 con see com concedgre, with ut, 758 Concessive conjunctions, 458; uses, 767-771 Concessive subjunctive, 753 Concrete substantives, 37; used for abstracts, 691 condemnare, with gen. , 570 Conditional conjunctions,457; use, 787-790; conditional sentences, 787-788; conditional wishes w, dum, modo, 790 conducere, to hire, with abl, 617; 1 with gerundive, 841 I conducit, with ace. & inf , 811 ' confidSre, with. dat. or abl, 628 congregari, with in & ace. , 690 Conjugation, 35, 270, 295; First, 316, 317, 327, 346-350; Second, 318,319,328,351-364; Third,320, 321, 329, 365-396; appendix to Third, verbs in 10, 331, 332; i^owr/;i, 322,323,330,397, 398; of deponents, 324-330; periphra- stic, 311-314; special forms in conjug., 333-338; of irregular verbs, 400-413; of defective I 293 — verbs, 414-418; of impersonal verhSy 419-423 Conjunctions, 32, 447-462; co-or- dinating, 448-453; use of, 849- 857 ; subordinating, 454-462; use of, 749-790; place of, 564 Conjunctive clauses, 755 ff. Consecutive conjunctions, 460; use of, 756-766 consequi, witli ut, 758 considere, with in & abl, 689 consilio, abl of manner^ 613 Consonants, Classification of, 6 Consonant-stems, 3d deol., 79, 81; of verbs, 339, 345 constare, to cost, with abl, 617 constat, with ace. & inf., 811 constituere, with in &• abl, 689 Construction of Cases, 566-690 consul, used for consulatus, 692 consulere, its construction, 591; with ut, 758 contendere, with ut, 758 contentus, with abl, 625 Continental pronunciation, 15 continere ; vix me contineo quin, 766 contingit, with ut, 759 contra, 636 Contracted syllables, Quantity of, 860 ; contracted vowels in con- jugatiouj 344 convenire, with in & aee., 690 convenit, w. aee. & inf. 811 convinc6re, with gen., 570 Co-ordinating conjunctions, 448- 453: use of, 849-857 Copulative conjunctions, 449; use of, 849-851 coram, 658 Correlatives, 269, 439 Corresponsive conjunctions, 858 Countries, Gender of names of, 42 creare, with two ace., 578 creari, with two nom., 540 credere, with dat., 589; with two ace, 578; in the pass. w. two nom., 540; with aee. & inf, 812 craderes, potential subjunct., 750 credibile est, with ace. & inf., 811 crime or charge, gen. of, 570 crimine or nomine, with gen., 570 -crum, suffix, 495 cujas, patrial adject., 264 -culiim, suffix, 494 -cuius, su-ffix, 480, 510 cum, prep., 659; with abl of man- ner, 613; in composition, 523 cum, conjunction; cum temporal, 774; cum, whenever, 740; cum causal, 786; cum concessive, 769; cum historical, 774; cum primum, 773; cum quis, 723, 762 cum-tum, 857 cunctus. Nouns with, in abl with- out prep., 687 -cundiis, suffix, 496 -cunque, appended to pronouns, 258; followed by indie., 748 cupere, w. inf. or w. ace. & inf, 814 cupidus, with gen., 567. i cura, ut, imperat. phrase, 806 curare, w.ut, 758; w. gerundive, 841 D. Dactylic Hexameter, 914 ff. damnare, with gen., 570. i dare, 349; with two ace, 578; with two dat., 595; with gerundive, 841 Dates, Koman, 931; of year, 935; how to turn into English, 934 Dative, 49 ; pi 3d decl, 149 ; 4tli decl , 172; Syntax, 587-602; indirect object, advantage^ 587; with — 294 — intransitive verbs, 589; with transitive verbs, 588 ; with com- pounds of ad, ante, &c., 592; with verbs of twofold construc- tion, 593; of purpose, with verbs 0^ giving and receiving^ 595; ethical, 602; of agency, with gerundive, 596, 741, 840; with pas- sives, 590, 597; of 2^ossession, 594; with adjectiveSy 598-600; with substantives^ 601 de, 657; with accusare, 570; ne- gative meaning in compounds, 531. 2 dea, deus, dec!., 59, 67 debSre, with inf., 809; with the force of the potential, 747 deced^re, with abl, 620 decet, dedecet, with ace, 583 declarare, with ace. & inf., 812 Declension, 35,51; general rules, 55; First, 56-62; Second, 63- 71; Third, 78-170; Fourth, 171-175; Fifth, 176-180; of ad- jectives,12-ll, 137-142; of com- pounds, 192. Case-endings of the 5 declensions, 54 Defective substantives, in case, 182-185; in number, 186-188 defective adjectives, 203, 204 defective comparison, 224, 225 of adverbs, 442 ; defective verbs, 414-418 deficere, with ace, 589 defigere, with in & abl., 689 Degree of difference, in the abl ,612 delectari, with abl, 604 demergere, with in & abl, 689 demonstrare, with ace. & inf., 812 Demonstrative pronouns, 252- 254; position, 561; agreement, 551, 552; where not used, 716 Denominative inceptives, 391 395; denominative verbs, 475- 479 depellere, with abl, 620 Dependent cases, 50 Dependent clause, 742; in indi rect discourse, 825; dependen uses of the subjunctive, 755 fi Deponents, 276; conjugation of, 324-330; of the first conj., 350 of the secondj 364; of the third, 396; of thejfourth, 399; parti- ciples, 831 Derivation of AYords, 465, 467- 511; of adjectives, 496-511; of verbs, 470-479 ; of substantives, 480-495; of adverbs, 425-434 Desiderative verbs, 473 designare, with two ace., 578 desinere, with inf., 809 Determinative pronouns, 255 deterrgre, with abl, 620 ; with ne or quommus, 764 dcus, decl, 59, 67 Diaeresis, in pronunciation, 13; in prosody, 892, 909 Diastole, 895 dicere, with twoaoc, 578; with ace. & inf., 812 dici, with two nom., 540; with nom. & inf., 821 dictu, 848 -dicus. Adjectives in, 216; quan- tity, 886 dies, 180; in diem, 670; ante diem, 931 differre, with a & abl, 621 difficilis, 215; adverb., 429; with dat., 598; with gerund, or supine, 848 diffidere, with dat., 589, 628 dignari, with abl, 625 — 295 dignus, with abl., 625; dignus qui, with subjunct., 793. c diligens, with gen., 567. 2 Dimeter, 904 Diminutive substantives, 480, 481 ; adjectives, 510; verbs, 474 Diphthongs, 5 Dipody, 906 Direct discourse, 823; dir. object, in the ace, 574-577; direct questions, 796-800 dis-, inseparable prep., 516; com- pounds of, with a & abl, 621 discSre, with inf., 809; with a, for doc6ri, 679 discernere, with a & abl., 621 discessu, abl. of time, 673 discrepare, with a & abl., 621 Disjunctive conjunctions, 450; use of, 852 dispar, with dat., 598 displicSre, with dat. , 589 displicet, with ace. & inf., 811 dissentire, with a and abl, 621 dissimilis, 215; with dat., 598 Distance Jiow far in the ace. or abl, 681; of time how long be- fore or after, 675 distare, with a & abl, 621 Distich, 926; Elegiac D., 919 distinguere, with a & abl., 621 Distributive numerals, 237, 238 docere, with two ace., 579 dolere, with ace, 575; with abl, 604; with ace. & inf., 815; with quod, 783 dolo, fraude, abl of manner, 614 domi bellique, 686; domus, 173; used like name of town, 686 donare, with twofold construc- tion, 593 donee = quamdiu, 776, 777 Double questions, 798 Dubitative subjunctive, 754 dubito & non dubito quin, 766 dubium non est quin, 766 ducere, with dat. of purpose, 595; with gen., 569 dulcis, with dat., 589 dum, while, with pres., 734, 776; until, 777; if only, 790 dummodo, 790 E. e. Quantity of, in -ei, 5th decl, 178, 861; changed to -i, 517 -e, Greek nouns in, 1st decl, 60 -e, Nouns in, 3d decl, 84; abl. sing., 3d decl, 144 e, ex, 660; in composition, 524; with negative power, 531. 2 edicSre, with ut, 758 edocere, with two ace, 579 efficSre, with two ace, 578; with ut, 758 egSnus, compar., 217 egere, with abl or gen., 622 -eis, suffix in patronymics, 484 ejicere, with abl, 620 ejus, eorum, earum, as posses- sives, 247, 711 ejusmodi, w. ut or qui & subjunct., 793. a -eia, suffix, 489 Elegiac Distich, 919; E. Penta- meter, 918 eligere, with two ace, 578 Elision, 887-889 -eims, suffix, 481, 510 emere, w. abl, 617 ; bene, male, 619 Emotion, verbs of, with ace & inf., 815; with quod, 785 Emphasis, as affected by the or(?er of words, 565 296 .-en, Nouns in, 3d dec!., 93 Enclitics, control accent, 31; quan- tity, 880 Endings in declension, 54; in com- parison, 209; in conjugation, 294 -endus, -undus, endings of ge- rundive, 337 English method of pronunciation, 16-20 enim & nam, 854; position, 564 Ennehemimeres, 912 -eiisis, sufflXj 501, 507 -entior, -entissimtis, 216 -entiis, suffix, 502 Epenthesis, 896 Epicene nouns, 47 Epistolary tenses, 740 eques, in collective sense, 698 Equivalents of supine, 848 -er, Nouns in, 2d decL, 64, 65 -er, -er. Nouns in, 3d decl., 96-98 -er, -a, -um, Adject, in, 74-76 -€r, -is, -e. Adjectives in, 138; superl., 213 -ere for -erunt (Perf. Ind.), 334 erg-a, 637 ergo, 855; with gen., 566. 8 erudire, w. abl., 607 erumpere, with a & abl., 620 -es, Greek nouns in, 1st dec!., 60; -es, -es, nouns in, 3d dec!., 108- 110; -es,noiii.pliir., Greek nouns, 157; proper names in -es, 151 -esco, verbs in, 472 ess6, conjugated, 303; with abl., 617; with gen. as predicate, 571 ; with gen. of value, 569; with gen. & abl. of quality, 556. 5., 615; with dat. of possessor, 594; with dat. of pitrpose, 595; the infin. esse as subject, 808; as object, 809 est, qui, with subjunot., 793. b. St, 849; used after multi, 850; et is, et is non, 715 etSnim, 854 Ethical Dative, 602 etiam, 849; with compar., 706 etiamsi, w. indie. & subjunot., 770 etsi, 771 -etiim, suffix, 482 Etymology, 1, 32-464 eu, 11; vocative-ending, 69 -eus, Greek nouns in, 2d decl., 69 -eus, suffix, 500; -eus, suffix, 506 evadere, with two nom., 540 evenit, with ut, 759 -ex, Nouns in, 3d decl., 133 Exclamations, in ace, 585 Existence, General expressions of, w. subjunot., 793. b existimare, with two ace, 578; pass. w. two nom., 540 expgdit, with ace. & inf., 811 expers, with gen., 567. i explore, with abl., 622 exsistere, with two nom., 540 exsistunt qui, with subjunot., 793 exspectatiOne, abl. of compari- son, 611 External qualities in the abl., 616 extra, 638 extreraus, with subst. to denote part thereof, 704 faba, in a collective sense, 698 fac, with ut or subjunot., 806 facere, with two ace, 578; with gen., 569; with ut, 758; with pres. partic, 835 ; facere non pos- sum quin, 766 facilis, 215; adv., 429; w. dat. 598; w. ad & gerund or w. supine, 848 297 ~ factu, 848 fallit, with aoc, 583 fama est, with ace. & inf., 811 familiaris, with gen. or dat., 598 familias, old gen., 58 fas est, with ace. & inf., 811; with supine, 847 fatCri, with ace. & inf., 812 favSre, with dat., 589 Feet, metrical, 898 Feminine, Rule of gender, 42, 43 fertur, with nom. & inf., 821 -ficus, Adjectives in, compared^ 216 fiddre, with dat. or abl., 589, 628 figri, with two nom., 540; with gen., 571; with dat. ot^ purpose, 595; quantity, 412, 861 fi^ri non potest quin, 766 Fifth Declension, 176-178 Figures of prosody, 887-897 filia, films, 59, 67 Final conjunctions, 459; use of, 756-766 Final syllables, Quantity, 877-879 Finite verb, 285 First Conjugation, Active, 316; Passive, 317; Deponent, 327; Verbs of, 346-350 First Declension, 56-62 fit, with ut, 759 flagitare, with two ace., 580; with ut, 758 flocci, gen. of value, 569 for, corresponding to dat., 588 fore ut, to express fut. inf., 819 Formation of the Genitive, 3d dec!., 82-136; of tha Principal Parts, 339-399; of the Tenses, 298-302 the former, hie, ille, 713 Fourth Conjugation, Active, 322; Passive^ 323; Deponent, 330; Verbs of, 347-399 Fourth Declension, 171-175 Fractions, denoted by ordinals, 236; of weight, 942 fraude, abl. of manner, 614 Frequentative verbs, 471 fretus, w. abl. , 625 frugi, indeel., 205; oompar., 222 frui, with abl., 626 fugit, with ace., 583 fungi, with abl, 626. Future I & II, 280; how formed, 298, 300; wanting in the sub- junct., 302, 746; Fut. Inf., 819; Fut. Inf rass.,315,847; Fut.Inf of deponents, 325; Fut. Parti- ciple, 301; syntax, 736-739 futurum esse, ut for fut. inf., 819 G. gallina, in a collective sense, 698 gaudere, with abl., 604; with quod, 783; with ace. & inf, 815 Gender, 35; natural or gramma- tical, 39, 48; of adjectives, 48; in Ist decl., 61, 62; in 2d deel, 70, 71; in 3d dec!., 158-170; in 4th decl, 174, 175; in 6tli decl, 179, 180; of the predicate, 544 General relatives, 258, 259; fol- lowed by the indie, 748 General value, expressed by the abl, 618 Genitive, 49; endings of, 51; for- mation in 3d decl , 82 ; gen. pi in -um for -orum, 2d decl, 68 ; of 3d decl. in -iGm, 146, 147; in -on, 156; in -lus, 77; Syntax, 566- 573 ; with substantives, 5 ^^ ; sub- jective, 566. 1. 4; in predicate 571 ; objective, 566. 2; of personal 298 — pronouns, 566.3; partitive, 566.6; of quality, 566. 5; answering the qnestion how old? 678; of spe- cification, 566. 7; with adjecti- ves, 567; with verbs of valuing, 569; with verbs of remember' inQj 568; with verbs of accus- ing, 570; with esse & fieri, 571; with impersonalSj 512 j 584; of gerund, 843 Gerund & Gerundive, 288, 289, 298; uses, 839-846; with est, 840; gerund changed into ge- rundive, 842; gen., 843; dat., 844; ace, 845; abl., 846; gerun- dive with verbs of giving^ tak- ing^ sending &c., 841 gloriari, w. abl, 604; w. quod, 783 Glyconic verse, 925. ^ gracilis, superlat., 215 gratia, with gen., 566. 8; with ge- rund & gerundive, 843 gratiam agere, with quod, 783; with ace. & inf., 815 gratus, with dat., 598 gravis, with dat., 598 Greek nouns of let decl., 60; of 2d dec!., 69; of 3d decl., 83, 88, 117, 122, 150-157 H. habere, with two ace, 578; pass, with two nom., 540; with gen., 569; with dat. of purpose^ 595; liabSo quod, with subjunci, 793. b Hephthemimeres, 912 Heroic verse, 914 Heteroclites, 190 Heterogeneous nouns, 191 Hexameter, 904; Dactylic Hexa- meter, 914-917 hiatus, 888 hie, 252; its use 712; hie, ille, the latter^ the former^ 713; hieine, hicce, 254 Historical Infinitive, 809 ; Histori- cal Perfect, 737; Historical Pre- sent, 732 ; Historical tenses, 743 hora nona, abl. of time^ 673 Horace, Metres of, 926-928 horrere, with ace, 575 hortari, with ut, 758 Hortatory subjunctive, 752 hostis, in a collective sense, 698 how old? 678 hurai, like name of town^ 686 humilis, Buperl, 215 Hypothetical sentences, 787, 788 i & j, but one character, 2, 891 i, gen. ending of the 2d decl., 63; for -11 from nouns in -ius, -lum, 63 ; voc. ending, 2d decl, 67; dat. ending, 2d decl., 77; stems in i, 3d decl, 79, 80; Greek nouns in i, 3d decl, 88; voc. ending of 3d decl, 154; abl. ending of the same, 140, 142, 144; i, connect- ing vowel in compound subst., 530 -la, neut. pi. 3d decl., 140, 142, 145 -ia, suffix^ 488 -iades, suffix^ 487 Iambic Strophe, 927. i5 Iambic Trimeter, 922-924 -iantis, suffix^ 505 -ias, suffix^ 487 -iciQs, suffiXy 501 '' Ictus, 900 -icGs, suffix, 501, 506, 509 id, adverbially, 586 id agere, with ut & subjunct., 758 id quod — . quod, 581 - 299 idem, 255, 533; used adverbially ^ 717 Ides of the Calendar, 929 -ides, -ides, suffixes, 487 idoiieus, with ad, 599; idoneiis qui, with subjunct., 793. c; witli ge- rund & gerundive, 844 -idus, suffix J 497 igitur, 855; its place, 564 igiiarus, with gen., 567 -lie, suffix, 484 -Tlis, -ills, suffices, 498, 501; su- per!, of adjectives in -ilis, 215 Illative conjunctions, 453, 855 ille, 255; its use, 712, 713 -illimus, superl. ending, 215 -illiis, suffix, 481 -im, aco ending, 3d dec!., 143; ad- verbs in, 432, 433 immemor, with gen., 567. i imminere, with dai, 589 immo, in answers, 800 Imparisyllabic nouns, 3d decL, 81 impatiens, with gen., 567. i impedlre, w. quominus or ne, 764 impellere, with ut, 758 iraperare, with dai, 589; with ut, 758 Imperative, 283; personal en- dings, 294; of dicere, ducere, &c., 336; of scire, 338; uses, 804-806; supplied by cura ut, fac ut, 806; by the subjunctive, 752, 805 Imperative phrases, 806 Imperative sentence in indirect discourse, 825 Imperfect, 280, 298, 299; its use, 735; in letters, 740; Imperf. Subjunct. in conditional sen- tences, 788. Ill Impersonal verbs, 419-423; their conjugation, 421; with aco. 583; with ace. & gen., 584 impetrare, with ut, 758 implere, with abl, 622 imponere, with dat., 592 impos, impdtens, with gen., 567. i imprimere, vrith in & abl., 689 imus, to denote Si part, 704 in, with the ace, 670; with verbs of assembling, 690; to denote time for how long, 677; with the abl., 671; to denote time 'i(;/ien, 673; with verbs of plor cing, 689; to denote place, 682; in composition, 525; with ne- gative power, 531. 2; in com- pounds with dai, 592 -inS, suffix, 485 inanis, with abl., 62o Inceptive (Inchoative) verbs, 392- 395, 472 incipere, with infin., 809 incitare, with ut, 758 incusare, with gen., 570 Indeclinable nouns, 181; gender of, 44; adjectives, 205, 226 Indefinite adjectives, 268; Inde- finite pronouns, 265-267; use, 721 Independent cases, 50 Independent uses of the Subjunc- tive, 749-754 Index of verbs, pag. ^74; Index to the metres of Horace, 928 Indicative, 282; use of, 747, 748 indigere, with abl. or gen., 622 indignus, with abl, 625; indigna»s qui, with subjunct., 793. c Indirect discourse, 824-829 Indirect object, 587 Indirect questions, 801-803 inducere, with pres. partic, 835 300 — indugre, construction of, 593 indulgere, with dai, 589 ab infante, 691 inflmus, to denote a jpart^ 704 Infinitive, 287; its use, 807-809; as object, 809; as subject, 808; its tenses, 818; historical inf., 809; fut. inf. with fore, 819 Inflection, 34, 35 infra, 641 ingratus, with dai, 598 inimlcus, with dai or gen., 598 initio, abl. of time^ 673 injucundus, with dai, 598 injuria, abl. of manner^ 614 inquam, 416; its use, 823 inscius, with gen., 567. i inscribere, with in & abl., 689 Inseparable prepositions, 516 insimulare, with gen., 570 instituere, with abl., 607 intellegere, with ace. k inf., 812 inter, 640; in compounds with dai, 592; inter se, iov recipro- cal action, 711 interdicere, constr., 621 interesse, with dai, 592 interest, with gen., 572; degree of importance, ^1^] with reference to lohichj 573 Interjections, 32, 463-464 intermittere nihil quin, 766 interrogare, with two ace., 580 Interrogative adverbs, 796; con- junctions, 462, 797; pronouns, 260-264,796; place thereof, 562; use of Interrogatives, 796-803 Interrogative sentences, 796 ff., in indirect questions, 825 intra, 639 Intransitive verbs, 273; imper- sonal passive, 590; with dai. 589; w, aoc. of kindred mean- ing, 576; becoming transitive by composition, 577 -intis, sufflx, 504, 505, 507 inutilis, with dai, 598, 599; with gerund, 844 invidere, with dai, 589 -io, Yerbs in, of 3d conjug., 331 Ionic rhythm, 927. i9 ipse, 255; use, with reflexive, 718 -ir, Nouns in, 2d decl., 64, 66 irasci, with dat., 589 Irregular adjectives, 77; irreg. comparison, 220-223; of ad- verbs, 441; irreg. conjugation, 400; irreg. nouns, 181-192 is, 247; use, 553, 714; is qui, with subjunci 793. a -is, -is, Nouns in, 3d decl, 111- 114; -is, ace. pi. ending, 3d decl., 148; Greek nouns in, 3d decl., 154; -iSjSufflx in patronymics^ 487 -is, -e. Adjectives in, 139, 140 -isco, Yerbs in, 391 Islands, Gender of names of, 42 ; constr. like names of towns, 683 isque, 715 -isslmus, in snperl, 211 iste, 252; use of, 712 ita ut, 759; ita est, yes, 799 itaque, 855 -itare, Frequentatives in, 471 -itas, -itia, -ities, -ittido, suf- fixes, 488 -itus, suffix, 503; adverbs in, 434 -iiim, gen. pi. 3d decl., 98, 140, 146 -iiiin, gen. of nouns in, 63; suffix, 486 -ills, gen. smg. 2d decl, 77 -ius, gen. of nouns in, 63 ; proper nouns in, 67; suffix^ 501, 508, 509 f 301 ivus, sufflXj 501 ix, Nouns in, 3d decl., 134 J. j & i, 2 ; affecting the quantity of the syllable, 864 jubare, with ace. , 589 ; with ace. & inf., 814; with nom. & inf., 822 jucundus, with dat., 598; with ge- rund or supine, 848 judicare, with two ace., 578; pass, w. two nom., 540 jugum, its quantity, 864 Juppiter, 97 juratus, active^ 278 jure, abl. of manner , 614 jussu, abl. of cause J 604 justum est, with ace. & inf., 811 juvare, with ace, 589 Juvenaiis, abl. sing., 144. 4 juvenis, abl. sing., 144. 3; gen. pi, 146. 2; how compared, 224. iii juxta, 642 L. -1, Nouns in, 3d decl, 90-92; adjec- tives in, 141 laborare, w. abl, 604; w. ut, 758 laetari, with abl, 604 laetus, with abl, 604 Latin Authors, 945 Latin Grammar, 1 the latter, hie, ille, 713 Lesser Ionics, 927. 19 Letters, 3-7; names of, 3; gender of, 181 liber, with abl, 623 liberare, with abl, 620 libel, with dat., 421 libra, weighty 942 licere, to be for sale, with abl, 617 Like cases in substantives, 55 liquet, with dat., 421 locare, to let, with abl, 617; with gerundive, 841 Locative case, 683 loco, locis, 687 Logaoedic verse, 925 Long vowels, 10, 859 longe, with superl, 707 longius, without quam, 610 longum est, 747 longus, with ace, 679 -Is, Nouns in, 3d decl, 127 ludis, abl of time, 673 M. maergre, with abl, 604 magis, maxime, in adverbial com- parison, 218, 708 magni, parvi, gen. of value, 569 magno, parvo, abl of value, 618 major, minor natu, 608, 678 male emere, vendere, 619 maledicere, with dat., 598 malle, with ace. & inf., 814 mandare, with ut, 758 manere, with two nom., 540 Masculine caesura, 911 Masculine gender, 40, 41 Materials, Names of, 38 matiirus, compared, 214 maximam partem, adverbially, 586 maxime, in forming superl, 218 Means or instrument, abl. of, 605- 607 Measure in prosody, 905, 906; Ro- man measures, 937 - 943 ; length how expressed, 680 mederi, with dat., 589 medius, to denote a part, 704 licet, w. dat., 421; conjunction, 768 ^ memini, with gen. or ace, 568 of — 302 memor, with gen., 567. i -men, suffix^ 494 mente, abl. of manner, 613 -mentum, suffix^ 494 mercari, with gen. & abl., 617 -met, appended to pronouns, 251 Metres of Horace, 926, 927 Metrical Feet, 898 metuere, with dat. & ace, 591; with ut & ne, 761 metus est, with ut & ne, 761 meum est, 571 Middle syllables, Quantity, 866- 876 miles, in collective sense, 698 mille, 230 minari, with dat, 589 minimi, gen. of value^ 569 minimo, abl. of value^ 618 minor natu, 608, 678 minoris, gen. of value^ 569 misSret, with aco. & gen., 584 mittere, w. dat. of purpose, 595; with gerundive, 841 Mobilia substantiva, 46 moderari, with dat. & ace, 591 Modification in compounds, 512 modo, abl. of manner, 613 modo, if only J w. subjunct., 790 molestus, with dat., 598 monere, with ut, 758 Money, Roman, 937 -monia, suffix, 488 Monometer, 904 Monosyllabic nouns, defective, 184, 185 Monosyllables, Quantity of, 880- 882 Months, Gender of, 40; in Ro- man* calendar, 929 Moods of the verb, 35, 281-285; attraction of, 826 mora, 899 more, abl. of manner, 613 mori, w. two nom., 540 mos est, with ut, 759 movere, with ut, 758 -ms. Nouns in, 3d dec!., 124-126 multare, with abl, 570 multi et.., 850 Multiplicative numerals, 239 multo, degree of difference, 612; abl. of price, 618; with compar. & super!., 706, 707 muta cum liquida,'i?i_prosor7y,863 nam, appended to inierrogatives, 263; nam, namque, 854 Names of men and women, 193- 196 Names of towns. Construction of, 683-686 Names of verses, 904 narrare^ with ace. & inf., 812 nasci, w. two nom. , 540 natus, with ace, 678; natu, with grandis, 608 navibus, abl. of manner, 614 ne, that not, 756, 762 ; after verbs of hindering, 764; after verbs of fearing, 761; in prohibi- tions, 805 ; ne quis, 723, 762 ; with optative subjunct, 751; with concessive subjunct., 753, 769 n6, interrogative particle, 797; ne..an, 798; ne..quidem, 564 nee. .nee, 857 necessarius, with gen. or dat., 598 necesse est, with ace. k inf , 811 necne, or not, 798, 803 neciibi, 762 nefas, 181; with ace. & inf., 811; with supine, 847 303 negare, with ace. & inf., 812 Negative Conditions (nisi, si non),789; nep;siti\e Imperative, with ne, 752, 805; negative of Optative subjunct, ne, 751; ne- gative of Potential subjunct, non, 750; negative of Conces- sive subjunct., ne, 753; negative of Dubitative subjunct, non, 754; negative with partic, 834 nemo, 182 ; equivalent to nullus, 700; nemo est qui, with sub- junct., 793. b nequam, indecl., 205, 222 neque, and not, neque quisquam, neque uUus, etc., 851; neque. . neque, 857 neque is, 715; neque enim, &c., 856 nescius, w. gen., 567. i Neuter adjectives or pronouns used adverbially, 429, 586 Neuter gender, 44; like cases, 55 Neutral passives, 279 neve, with subjunct., 757 nihil, 181; its oblique cases, 700; used adverbially, 586; nihil ab- est quin, 766; nihil antiquius habere quam, w. ut, 758; ni- hil est quod, w. subjunct., 793. b; nihil praetermitto, intermitto quin, 766 nihili, gen. of value, 569 nihilo, abl. of value, 618 nimis, with gen., 566. 6 nisi & si non, 787, 789; nisi quis, 723, 762 niti, with abl, 627; with ut, 758 no, 799 nobilitas, used for nobiles, 693 nocere, with dat., 589 noli, with inf, in prohibitions, 806 nolle, with aco. & inf., 814 nomen, 194; nomenest,w.dat.,594 nominare, with two ace, 578; pass. with two nom., 540 Nominative, 49 ; plur. in -ia, 3d decl., 140, 142, 145; in-es, 157; case of subject, 534; of the pre- dicate, 540 Nominative with Infin., 821, 822 non quin, with subjunct., 785 non quo, non quod,w. subjunct., 785 Nones, in the Roman montli, 929 nonne, interrog. particle, 797 nostras, patrial adjective, 250 nostri, nostrum, 566. 3 Noun, see Substantive Nouns substantive & adjective, 33 -ns, Nouns in, 3d decl., 127, 128 nub ere, with dai, 589 nudare, with abl, 622 nudus, with abl, 623 ■ num, 797; num quis, 723, 762 Number, 35, 49 ; of the predicate, 541, 542 Numbers & persons of verbs, 293 Numerals, 228-242 ; numeral ad- jectives,228-233; num. adverbs, 241; position, 561 nuntiare, with in & ace. , 690 ; with ace. & inf., 812 -nus, suffix, 501 nusquam, with gen., 566. 6 O. -5, Nouns in, 3d decl, 85-87; -o, Greek nouns in, 152 0, with ace. in exclamations, 585 ob, 643; in composition, 526; in compounds with dai, 592 Object, direct, 574; indirect, 587; of transitive verbs becomes subject in pass., 574 304 — Objective genitive, 566. 2 oblivisci, with gen., 568 oboedire, with dat., 589 obsecrare, with ut, 758 obsistere, obstare, with ne, quo- minus, 764 obtrectare, with dat., 589 odiosus, with dat., 598 Official titles to indicate time, 692 -51us, suffix, 481, 510 omnes, 726 -on, for -urn, Greek ending, 2d decl.,69; -on, gen. pi, 3d dec!., 156 onustus, with abl., 623 opera aliciijus, to denote the agent, 606 operam dare, with ut, 758 opinio est, with ace. & inf., 811 opinione, abl. of comparison, 611 oportet, w. ace. & inf., 811 oppidum, in apposition with na- mes of towns, 684, 685 optare, with ut, 758 Optative subjunctive, 751 opus, with supine, 847; opus est, with abl., 624; with ace. & infin., 811 -or, Nouns in, 3d decl., 99-101; suffix, 489 -or, -us. Adjectives in, 139, 209, 210 orare, with two ace., 580; with ut, 758 oratio obliqua, 824; or. recta, 823 orbare, with abl., 622 orbus, with abl, 623 Order of words, 558-565 Ordinal numerals, 234-236 ordlne, abl of manner, 614 Origin, expressed by abl, 604 Orpheus, 154 -os,for-us,6rreeA; ending, 2d decl, 69; -OS, Latin nouns, 3d decl, 115-117; Greek nouns, 3d decl, 153; -OS, gen. 3d decl, 153; nom. 3d decl, 155 -osus, suffix, 502 -ox. Nouns in, 3d decl, 135 P, in pace, abl of time, 673 paenitet, with ace. & gen., 584 par, with dat., 598; with ace. & inf., 811; par est, it would be fair, 747 Paradigm Charts, 54, 302 parcere, with dat., 589 Parisyllabic nouns, 3d decl, 80 particeps, with gen., 567. 1 Participial adjectives with gen., 567. 2 Participle, 290, 291 ; of depo- nents, 325; how declined, 198; comparison, 227; use of, 829- 835; used appositively, 833; at- tributively, 832 ; with negative, 834; in compound infin., 817 Particles, 36 Partitive genitive, 566. 6 Parts of the body in the plur., 696 Parts of speech, 32 parvi, parvo, gen. & abl of value, 569, 618 a parvulo, 691 Passive voice, 271, 276; pass, tenses how formed, 302, 309; pass, participles, 830; passive used impersonally, 423 ; of in- transitives, 590; followed by dat, 597 paterfamilias, 58 pati, with ace. & inf., 814 patiens, with gen., 567. 2 Patrial adjectives, 250, 264, 507 I 305 — Patronymics, 487 pauci, defective^ 204 pedes, in collective sense, 698 pedibus, abl. of manner, 614 pendgre, with gen., 569 penes, 644; quantity, 879. 2 Pentameter, 904; Elegiac, 918-921 Penthemimeres, 912 penult, 25 per, 645, 674; in composition, 527; in compounds with ace, 577; to denote the agents 606 Perfect, 280; its formation, 344; tenses formed upon it, 300; Perf. Ind. special terminations, 294; special forms, 333; Perfect Infin.,300; Perf. Part., 301; Perf Subjunct, 300; its uses, 737; Perf definite, 737; its sequence of tenses, 744; in letters, 740 perficSre, with ut, 758 perfrui, with abl, 626 perfungi, with abl, 626 pergere, with infin., 809 periciilum est, with ut & ne, 761 Periphrastic conjugation, 311- 315; uses, 741; Indie, 747 perire, pass, to perdere, 408 perltus, with gen., 567. 1 permittere, with ut, 758; with ge- rundive, 841 Personal endings of the verb, 294 Personal pronouns, 244-247; not expressed, 710; expressed in ace. with inf., 820 Persons, 35, 243, 293; names of, 193-196; with different termi- nations, 46 persuadgre, w. dai, 589; w. ut,758 pet6re,w. two ace, 580; with ut,758 Pherecratean verse, 925. 3 Phonetic pronunciation, 9-14 Phonology, 1, 2-31 piget, with ace. & gen., 584 Place, Eolations of, 682-690 placere, with dat., 589 placet, with ace. & inf., 811 plenus, with gen., 567. 1 plerlque, defective, 204 Pluperfect, 280, 300; use, 738 Plural, 49; with change of mean- ing, 189; wanting, 187; plural expressions to be noted, 697; of proper names, 699 Plural la tantum, 188 plurimi, gen. of value, 569 plurimo, abl. of value, 618 pluris, gen. of value, 569, 619 plus, 221; without quam, 618 Poetical Forms, 858-927 . Polysyndeton, 850 ponere, with in & abl, 689 porcus, in a collective sense, 698 poscere, with two ace, 580 Position, in prosody, 862 Positive, 208; wanting, 224 Possessive pronoun, 249 ; not ex- pressed, 710; as subjective gen., 566.4 Possessor, dat. of, 594 possum, poteram, / might, I could, 747; with infin., 809 post, 646; to denote distance ot time, 675; in compounds with dat., 592 posteritas, used for posted, 693 postquam (posteaquam) w. perf., 737, 773 postulare, w. two ace, 580; with ut, 758 Potential subjunctive, 750 potiri, with gen. & abl., 626 potis, pote, 308 potus & pransus, active, 278 — 306 — prae, 662; in composition, vert/, 531. 3; in compounds with dai, 592 praebere se, with ace, 578 praecipere, with ut, 758 praeditus, with abl, 623 praenomen, 194 Praenomens abbreviated, 197 praestare se, with ace, 578 praeter,647; in compounds with ace., 577 praet^rit, with ace, 583 praetermittere nihil quin, 766 praetor, for in praetura, 692 l)recari, with ut, 758 Predicate, 534; its place, 558; its number, 541-543; its gen- der, 544; with dijfferent per- sons, 545; predicate adjective & substantive in ace. & inf., 817; predicate gen., 571 ; pred. abl., 616 Prepositions, 32 ; List of, 443-446 ; uses, 629-671; with the ace., 629-654; with the abl., 655-664; with the ace. & abl., 665-671; place, 563; in composition, 516; assimilation of, 518 Present Indicative, 280; tenses formed upon it, 298; Pres. Sub- junct., 298; Pres. Imperat, 299; Pres. Infinitive, tenses formed upon it, 299; Pres. Partic, 298; Present, its uses, 731-734; to express a past action, 733 ; for the historical perfect, 732 ; with dum, 734 Price, abl. of, 617 pridie, with ace, 930 prima pueritia, 673 Primitive adverbs, 424; primi- tive verbs, 470; primitive and derivative words, 466 primus, to denote a part, 704 Principal clause, 742, in indirect discourse, 825 Principal parts of verb, 296; their formation, 339-399 Principal tenses, 743 Principal term of compounds, 512 principio, abl. of time, 673 prior & primus instead of ad- verbs, 550 priusquam, 779, 780 privare, with abl, 622 pro, 661; its quantity in com- pounds, 884 prodesse, with dat, 589 prodest, with ace. & inf., 811 prohibere, with quommus, 764 Prohibitions, 805 proinde, 855; proinde ac si, 772 Pronominal adjectives, 269 Pronouns, 32, 243-269; special uses, 710-729; personal, 244; reflexive, 248; demonstrative, 252; determinative, 255; rela- tive, 265; interrogative, 260; indefinite, 256; their agreement, 551-557 Pronunciation of Latin, 8 prope, 648 Proper names, 38, 193-197; in plur., 699 propior, propius, with ace, 600 Proportional numerals, 240 proprius, oivn, 567. 3 propter, 649 Prosody, 858-897; figures of, 887- 897 prospicere, with ut, 758 Protasis, 787 providere, with dat. & ace, 591,- with ut, 758 providus, compared, 217 I SOT — proximug, proxime, with ace, 600 -ps, Nouns in, 3d decL, 124-126 -pte, appended to pronouns, 251 pudet, with gen. & ace, 584 puer, instead of in pueritia, 691 in pueritia, prima pueritia, 673 , Punishment, abl. of, 570 Purpose, subjunctive of, with ut, ne, 758; quo, 763; with relative, 792; expressed by ad with ge- rund, 845 putare, with gen., 569; with two ace, 578; pass., with two nom., 540 putares, potential subjunctive, 750 Pythiambic strophe, 927. lo. n Qo quaerere, with two ace, 580 Quahty, gen. of, 566. 5; abl. of, 615 quam, with comparatives, 609; regularly omitted in relative sentences, 610; omitted after plus, amplius, longius, 610; with posse & super!., 707; quam quis- quam, uUus, 724; quam qui, quam ut, w. subjunct., 79^ 759 ,. quamquam, 771 I' quam vis, 768 quandoquidem, 781 quanti, gen. of value, 659, 619 Quantity, 859-896; general rules, 28; in compounds, 883; of the radical syllable, 865 ; of middle syllables, 866-876; of final syl- lables, 877-879; of monosyllab- les, 880-882; marks of, 10 quantumvis, 768 quantus potuit, with super!., 707 quasi, 772 que, 849 quemadmodum, with indie, 772 Question, 532; direct, 796, 797; alternative, 798; question and answer, 799; indirect, 801, 802; indirect disjunctive, 803; in in- direct discourse, 825 qui, 256; its agreement, 551; =^ cum ego, &c. with subjunct. 792; = ut ego, &c. with subjunct., 792 ; qui? 720; qui dicitur, 555 quia, 781 quidam, 725 quidem, its place, 564 quilibet, 726 quin — qui non in clause of re- sult, 765; after verbs o^ hinder- ing , 764; after negative clau- ses, 765 quippe qui, with subjunct., 791 quls ~ quibus, 257 quis, 720, 723 quisquam, 724 quisque, 727 quisquis, with indie, 748 quivis, 726 quo — ut eo, with subjunct., 763 quoad, w. indie & subjunct., 776-778 quod, in explanatory clauses, 784; quod, quia, because^ 781; quod, as to, 785 quodsi, 787 quommus r^r ut eo minus, 764 quoniam, since, 781 quoque, 849 ; its place, 564 quotiens, with perf. & pluperf, 740 quotquot, with indie, 748 -qvius, adjectives in, 219 R. -r, Nouns in, 3d dec!., 94-103; ad- jectives, 141 Radical syllables, quantity of, 865 ratiOne, abl. of manner , 613 — 308 — -rg, for -ris in the pass., 335 re-, red-, inseparable prep., 516 Reading-charts, 8 Reciprocal, how expressed, 640 recordari, with gen., 568 recusare, w. ne & quominus, 764 reddere, with two ace, 578 redimere, with abl, 617 Reduphcated perfects, 349, 361, 370; quantity of, 867 Reduplication in compounds, 349, 361 refert, with gen., 572 refertus, with abl., 623 Reflexive pronouns, 248, 711; in indirect discourse, 828 Reflexive verb, 275 Relative pronoun, 256-259; agree- ment, 551, 552 ; relative for de- monstr. at the beginning of sentence, 556; in abl. oi compa- rison^ 610; never omitted, 557; place, 562; general relatives w. indie, 748; relative clauses with subjnnct, 791-795 rehnquere, with two ace, 578; with dat. of pwrpo,96, 595; with ge- rundive, 841 reliquus, to denote a part^ 704; reliquum est, ut, 759 reminisci, with gen., 568 reperiuntur qui, w. subjunct., 793. b replere, with abl., 622 resistere, with dat., 589 respondere, with ace. & inf., 812 Responsives, 799 restat, with ut, 759 Result, subjunct. of, with conjunc- tions^ 759, 760 retingri non possum quin, 766 reum facere, with gen., 570 Rhythm, 900; Ionic, 927. i9 Rhythmical feet, 902 rid^re, with ace, 575 -rimiis, superl. ending, 213 ritu, abl. of manner, 613 Rivers, gender of names of, 40 rogare, with two ace, 580; with ut, 758 rogatu, abl of cause^ 604 Roman method of pronunciation, 9-14 Root, 467, 468 -rs, Nouns in, 3d dec!., 127 rus, like name of town^ 686 S. -s. Nouns in, 3d decl., 103-128; ad- jectives in, 141 salutaris, with dat., 598 Sapphic stanza, 927. 2. 3; verse, 925. 5. 6 satiare, with abl., 622 satis, with gen., b^^. 6 Scanning, 913 scire, w. infin., 809; scito for sci, 338 -SCO, Inceptives in, 391 scribere, with ace & inf., 812 se-, sed-, inseparable prep., 516; compounds of se with a & abl., 621 secernere, with a & abl., 621 Second Conjugation; Active^ 318; Passive^ 319; Deponent^ 328: Verbs of^ 351-364 Second Declension, 63-77 secundum, 650 secus ac, 849 sed, 853 sejungere, with a & abl., 621 Semi-deponents, 277, 278; 2d con- jug, 363; 3d conjug., 373 in senectute, 673 — 309 — senex, instead of in senecttite, 691; compared, 224 Sentence, 532, 533; of result, se- quence of tenses, 745 sententia mea, 608 sentire, with ace. & inf , 812 separare, with a & abl, 621 vSeparation, abl. of, 620 Sequence of tenses, 742-746; in sentences of result, 745 ; in sen- tences of comparison, 772 sequitur, with ut, 759 sescenti, indefinitely^ 233 sestertius, sestertium, 938, 939 Short vowels, 10, 861 si, with indie. & subjuDCt, 787; si quis, 723, 762 si modo, 790 si non & nisi, 787, 789 sic ut, 759 sicut, with indie., 772 silentio, abl. of manner^ 614 sirailis, 8uperl.215; with dat. or gen., 598, 600 Simple feet, 902; simple forms of verb, 298-302; simple verse, 903 simulac, simulatque, 773; with perf., 737, 740 sin, 787 sine, 664; sine,w. quisquam,ullus, 724 sinere, with aee. & inf., 814; with nom. & inf., 822 Singular, 49 ; used for the plural, 698; wanting, 188 Singularia tantum, 187 singLili, defective ^ 204 si qu idem, since^ 781 sitire, with aee., 575 sive, 852; sive. .sive, w. indie., 748 Small islands. Names of, 683 so-called^ qui dicltur, 555 solito, abl. of comparison^ 611 solus qui, with subjunet., 793. a ~s6r, suffix^ 489 Space, Relation of, 679-681 spe, abl. of comparison^ 611 Special Forms in conjugation, 333-338 Specification, gen. of, 566. 7 id spectare, with ut, 758 spes est, with aee. & inf, 811 spoliare, with abl, 622 Spondaic Hexameter, 914 Stanza, 926; stanzas of Horace, 927 stare, cost^ with abl, 617 statuere, with in & abl., 689; with infin., 809 Stem, 52, 468; in the 5 declen- sions, 53; 1st deel., 56; 2d deel, 63; 3d deel, 79; 4tli deel., 171; 5tli deel., 176; in the 4 conju- gations, 295; in a, 340; in e, 341; in i, 342; in u (v), 343, 365-367; in consonants,365-396; in d, t, 369-374; in b, p, 375, 376; in c, g", q, li, ct, 377-384; in 1, m, n, r, 385-389 ; in s, x, (cs), 390; insc, 391-395 Stem-words, 466 Strophe, see Stanza studere, with dat., 589 studiosus, with gen., 567. i I suadere, w. dat., 589; w. ut, 758 sub, 666-667; in composition, 528; in compounds w. dat, 592 Subject and Predicate, 534, 535 ; place, 558; adjuncts, 558 Subjective genitive, 566. i; as predicate, 571 Subjunctive, 283; of the future tenses wanting, 746; uses, 749- 803; with conjunctions, 755-790; with relatives , 791-795 ; in — 310 — indirect questions, 801-803; to express the thought of some other person, 794, 827; in cau- sal clauses, 782 Subordinating conjunctions, 454- 462; uses, 755-790 Subordination ,of sentences, 742 Substantiva mobilia, 46 Substantives, 32, 37, 38; gender, 39-48; number, 49; declen- sions, 51-192 ; indeclinable, 181 ; defective, 182-186; heteroclites, 190; heterogeneous, 191; deri- ved from adjectives, 488; deri- ved from substantives, 480-48 7; derived from verbs, 489-495; used as adjectives, 206; sub- stantive predicate, 536; with dai, 601; special uses, 691-700; in abl. absol, 836 subter, 669 Suffixes, 469 6ui, sibi, se, 711; w. quisque, 727 sumere, with two ace, 578 summus, top of^ 704 sunt qui, with subjunct., 793. b super ,668;incompoundsw.dat.,592 snperbus, with abl., 604 superlative, 211; its declension, 212 ; with the force of very^ 705 ; strengthened, 707 ; wanting, 224; requires more than two objects, 709 Supine, 292, 344; tenses formed upon it, 301; its uses, 847; its equivalents, 848; not changed in ace. & inf., 817 supplicare, with dai, 589 supra, 651 -sura, suffix J 494 -stis & -ttis. Nouns in, 4th dec!., 183; suffixes J 493 suns, its use, 711 Syllables, 21-25; long & short, 860, 861, 899; long by position, 862; common, 863; middle, 866-876; final,877-879; syllaba anceps,908 Synaeresis, 890, 891 Syncope, 893 Synopsis of Declensions, 54 Synopsis of Tenses, 298-302 Syntax, 1, 532-857 Systole, 895 T. -t. Nouns in, 3d decL, 129 taedet, with ace. & gen., 584 talis, 269; talis qui, with subjunct., 793. a; talis ut, with subjunet.,759 tam w. adject. & qui, 793. a tarn w. adject. & ut, 759 tamen, 853 tametsi, 771 tamquam, 772 tanti, tantidem, gen. of value^ 569, 619 tantum abest, ut. .ut, 760 tantus qui, with subjunct., 793. a; tantus ut, with subjunct., 759 -te, appended to pronouns, 251 temperare, with various cases, 591; temperare mihi non pos- sum quin, 766 templum, omitted^ 566. 9 Temporal conjunctions, 455; uses, 773-780 in tempore, temporibus, 673 Tenses, 35, 280; formation of, 298- 302; principal and historical^ 743; uses, 730-741; sequence of tenses, 742-746; tenses of the infin., 818, 819; tenses in letters, 741 tenus, 663 — 311 I f ^t6r, Nouns in, 3d decL, 96, 97 P terra marique, 688 Tetrameter, 904 Tetrastich, 926 that & thosej not expressed in La- [ . tin, 716 Thesis, 900 Third Conjugation, Active^ 320; Passive, 321; Deponent^ 329; in-io(appenclix),331,332; Verbs of, 365-396 Third Declension, 78-170 Time, Relation of, 672-678; for how long, 677; how long, 674; how long before^ 675; how long sincej 674; when,672,673; with- in which, 676 timere, with ut, ne, 761 -ti5, suffix^ 493 Tmesis, 897 -t6r, suffix, 490, 491 totus, 202 ; nouns with, in aW. with- out prep., 687 Towns, Names of, Gender, 42 ; con- struction of, 683 trans, 652; in composition, 529; in compounds with ace, 577 Transitive verbs, 271; transitive & intransitive, 575 Trees, Gender of names of, 42 Trimeter, 904; Iambic, 922-924 trini, for terni, 238 Tristich, 926 Trithemimeres, 912 -trix, suffix, 492 Trochaic strophe, 927. 18 -trftm, suffix, 495 -tura, suffix, 493 turpis, with dat., 598 -tiSs, suffix, 493 U, u & V, but one character, 2, 891 u. Stems, 3d decL, 79; 3d conjug.,343 -ii. Nouns in, 4th dec!., 171 ubi, with gen., 566. e; when, 773; ubi, ubi primum, with perf , 737 -tibus, dat. & abl pi, 4tli dec!., 172 uUus, 202 ; its use, 724 ultima, 25 ultimus, to denote a part, 704 ultor, ultrix, adject, 206 ultra, 654 -uliiin, suffix, 494 -Glus, suffix, 480, 499, 510 -um, suffix, 489 -um, for -arum, -orum, 1st & 2d decL, 68; -um, gen. pi. of ad- ject., 3d decL, 147 -undi, -undus, for -endi, -en- dus, 337 Unit of measure, 899 unus, 202; in the plur., 229; in- stead of singuli, 238; unus om- nium, with Buperl., 707; unus qui, with subjunct., 793. a unusquisque, 267; its use, 726 -uo, Yerbs in, 1st conjug., 3G5 -ur. Nouns in, 2d decL, ^^', 3d decL, 102, 103 urbs, in apposition with names of towns, 684, 685 -urio, Yerbs in, 473 -us, Nouns in, 2d decl., 63; 3d decL, 118-122; 4tlidecl., 171 -Qs, -a, -Gm, Adjectives in, 72 ut, comparat, 772; final & con- secutive, 756-761; concessive, 769; temporal, 773; as soon as, 737 ut primum, 773; with perf., 737 ut si, w. subjunct., 772 uti, with abl., 626 312 — Ulilis, with dat. or ad & ace, 598; with gerund & gerundive, 844; uti- lius fuit, 747 utiriam, with subjunci, 751 utpote qui, with subjunct., 792. ii utrum, 797; utrum..an, 798 -iitiis, sufflXy 503 -ux, Nouns in, 3d decl., 136 V, vacare, with abL, 622 vacuus, with abL, 623 Yalue, in the gen., 569, 619; in the abl., 618 vapulare, neutral pass., 279 ve, 852 vel, 852; with superl, 707 velle, with inf. or ace. & inf., 809, 814 velut si, with subjunct., 772 venclere,w.abl.,617;bene,male,619 veneo, pass, to vendere, 408 venire, with dat. oi purpose^ 595 Verba sentiendiet declarandi,812 Verbal nouns & adjectives, 286- 292 Verbal inceptives, 392-394 Verbal predicate, 536 Verbs, 32, 270-423; voices, 271; tenses, 280; moods, 281; finite verb, 285; persons, 293; conju- gations, 295; formation of the tenses, 298; verb-stem, 295; for- mation of the principal parts, 339; of the 1st conjug., 346-349; of the 2d conjug., 351-364; of the 3d conjug., 365-396; of the 4tli conjug., 397-399; in -lo, 3d con- jug., 331, 368; compounded with prepositions, 516; derived from verhs^ 471-474; derived from subst. & adj.y 475-479; place, 558; Syntax, 730-848; Verbs of reminding , remem- bering, forgetting with gen., 568; of accusing y convicting^ condemning^ acquitting^ with gen., 570; of valuing^ with gen., 569; of naming, Tnalcing, tak- ing^ choosing y with two accus., 578; of asking J demanding^ requesting, inquiring^ with two ace, 580; of benefitting, pleasing, obeying, command- ing (fee, with dat. , 589 ; of giving k putting ,^N\i\\ dat., 593; of buy- ing & selling, with abl., 617; of removing, abstaining, with abl, 620; of plenty & want, HI- ling and depriving, with abl., 622; of placing, with in & abl., 689 ; of assembling, with in & ace, 690; of willing, wishing, ivarning, beseeching, urging^ demanding, resolving, endea- voring, forcing, permitting, with ut & Tie, 758; of wishing, desiring, with ace. & inf., 814; of fearing, with ut, ne, 761 ; of hin- dering, with quommus, 764; of emotion, joy, grief, with quod, 783; with ace. & inf., 815; verbs mgnifyingtobe able, must,dare, begin, continue, cease, be accu- stomed, learn, wish, desire, resolve, with infin., 809; verbs of perceiving, with pres. part., 813,835; of perceiving and de- claring, with ace. & infin., 812; withnom. &inf., 821 vergri, with ut & ne,761 vero, verum, 853, 564; place, 564 Verses, 898; names of, 904; com- pound, 903; simple, 903 313 — Versification, 898 flf. versus, 653, vertgre, with dat. of purpose, 595 verum, vero, 564, 853 verum est, with ace. & inf., 811 vesci, with abl., 626 vestis, in a collective sense, 698 vestras, patrial adject., 250 vestrum & vestri, 566. 3 vetare, with ace, 589; with ace. & infin., 814; with nom. & inf., 822 vetus, superl., 240 vi, vi et armis, abl. of manner, 614 via, without prep. , 688 via et ratione, abl. of manner, 614 vicinitas =: vicini, 693 vicinus, with dat. & gen. , 598 victor, victrix, adjectives, 206 videre, with ut, 758; with ace. & infin., 812; with pres. part., 813, 835 vidgres, potential subjunct., 750 videri, with two nom., 540; with nom. & infin., 822 vis, 114; per vim, 645 visu, 848 vix, with quisquam, ullus, 724 vocare, with two ace, 578; vocari, with two nom., 540 j Yocative, 49; of nouns in -iiis, I 2ddecl., 67; in 3d deel., 154 Voices, 35, 271-279 voluntate, abl. of manner , 614 -volus. Adjectives in, 216 Vowel- changes in compound verbs, 517 Vowels, 4 Vowel-stems, in deel., 79, 80; in conjug., 339, 344 vox, with gen., 566. 7 W. w, not in Latin, 2 Way by which, abl., 688 Week, Days of the, 936 Weights, Koman, 942 Winds, Gender of names of, 40 without, with partic. 834 Women, Names of, 196 Word-formation, 1, 465-531 X. -X, Nouns in, 3d deel, 130,131, 141 Y. -y. Nouns in, of Greek origin, 88 Year, Date of, 935 yes, 799 -ys, Nouns in, 154 v^ 14 DAY USE RETURN ORROWED r6xrwt ^W book is due on the last date stamped below, or This book ^s^cl^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^j^.^^ ^^^,^^. Renewed books are subjea to immedme^ecaU^ JSSep^:^!^-^ ___REgD i:g — LD 21-100m-6,'56 (B9311sl0)476 General Library . University of California Berkeley VB 00227 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY